PROJECT SPECIFICATION - DOBCO GROUPprojects.dobcogroup.com/PS20/Project Documents/PS20 DCA FINAL 2.… · PROJECT SPECIFICATION DCA SUBMISSION – VOLUME 4 February 6, 2013 Revision

PROJECT SPECIFICATION DCA SUBMISSION – VOLUME 4

February 6, 2013 Revision #15 –Issued for Final DCA Release

February 11, 2015

NEW PS #20 ELEMENTARY SCHOOL for

JERSEY CITY PUBLIC SCHOOLS HUDSON COUNTY, NEW JERSEY

CONTRACT NO. JE-0010-C01

prepared by:

SSP Architectural Group 1011 Route 22, Suite 203

Bridgewater, NJ 08807 908.725.7800

for the

NEW JERSEY SCHOOLS DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY ONE W. STATE ST., 3RD FLOOR

P.O. BOX 991 TRENTON, NJ 08625-0991

Revised: 2-11-15 NJSDA Contract #: JE-0010-C01

TC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................... (TC)

BID ADVERTISEMENT .................................................................................................................. (AD)

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL ........................................................................................................... (RFP)

TECHNICAL PROPOSAL FORMS ....................................................................................... (TPF)

CONSTRUCTABILITY REVIEW SERVICES DESCRIPTION ........................................... (CRS)

PROJECT RATING PROPOSAL ..................................................................................................... (PRP)

PRICE PROPOSAL ........................................................................................................................... (PP)

STATEMENT OF JOINT VENTURE .............................................................................................. (JV)

NJSDA TOTAL AMOUNT OF UNCOMPLETED CONTRACTS FORM ..................................... (UC)

BID BOND FORM ............................................................................................................................ (BB)

SAMPLE OF FORMS TO BE COMPLETED UPON EXECUTION OF CONTRACT .................. (SF)

FORM OF CONTRACT ..................................................................................................... (FC)

PERFORMANCE BOND FORM ....................................................................................... (FB)

PAYMENT BOND FORM ................................................................................................. (PB)

SBE FORM A – SCHEDULE of SBE PARTICIPATION for CONTRACTORS………(FA)

FORM C – CONFIRMATION of SBE STATUS and BID PRICE ………………….…(FC)

OWNER’S CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM (OCIP)

DEMOLITION PROCEDURES MANUAL AND SUPPLEMENT ………. ………….(OCIP)

SUBCONTRACTOR APPROVAL FORM ......................................................................... (1105)

INTEGRITY AFFIDAVIT ................................................................................................. (IA)

DISCLOSURE FORM ........................................................................................................ (DF)

AA-201 INITIAL PROJECT WORKFORCE REPORT………………………………….(AA)

AA-201a SUBCONTRACTOR PROJECTION FORM………………………………….(AAa) PUBLIC LAW CHAPTER 51 AND E.O. 117 INSTRUCTIONS …………………….(DPP c51) TWO-YEAR CHAPTER 51/EXECUTIVE ORDER 117 - VENDOR CERTIFICATION

AND DISCLOSURE OF POLITCAL CONTRIBUTIONS ……………………. .(CH51.1) OWNERSHIP DISCLOSURE FORM………………………………………………..(ODF)

EFT AUTHORIZATION FORM ……………………………………………………….. (EFT)

CODE OF ETHICS FOR VENDORS……………………………………………………...(CE)


TC-2

SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (SBE) REQUIREMENTS….……………………….……….(SB)

QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL MANUAL FOR CONTRACT WORK………………..(QAQC)

SAFETY MANUAL. ......................................................................................................................... (SM)

PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT (signature page & letter of assent)……………………………(PLA)

NJ PREVAILING WAGE RATES ………………………………………………………………..(NJPW)

US DEPARTMENT OF LABOR REVAILING WAGE RATES ..................................................... (FPW)

GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................... (GC)

Article 1 Definitions Article 2 Interpretation and Intent Article 3 The Authority’s Responsibilities Article 4 Contractor’s Responsibilities Article 5 Time, Project Schedule and Progress Article 6 Prosecution and Progress of the Work Article 7 Subcontractors Article 8 Changes in the Work Article 9 Bonds and Insurance Article 10 Suspension of the Work Article 11 Default and Termination Article 12 Substantial Completion and Final Completion Article 13 Payment and Contract Completion Article 14 Protection of Persons and Property Article 15 Documents and Records Article 16 Risk of Loss and Indemnification Article 17 Claims Article 18 Affirmative Action and Non-Discrimination Article 19 Warranties Article 20 Solid Waste, Hazardous Waste, Underground Storage Tanks, and Asbestos Transportation and Disposal Article 21 Legal Relations and Additional Provisions

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ................................................................................................ (SC)

DRAWING LIST ............................................................................................................................... (DL)

SPECIFICATIONS___________________________________________________________________

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010 Summary of the Work ....................................................................................................... 01010

01020 Allowances ........................................................................................................................ 01020

01030 Alternates .......................................................................................................................... 01030

01050 Field Engineering .............................................................................................................. 01050

01080 Change Order Procedure ................................................................................................... 01080

01100 Coordination ..................................................................................................................... 01100


TC-3

01130 Cutting & Patching ........................................................................................................... 01130

01200 Preconstruction Conference .............................................................................................. 01200

01220 Project Meetings ............................................................................................................... 01220

01300 Submittals ......................................................................................................................... 01300

01310 Schedules and Reports ...................................................................................................... 01310

01410 Testing Laboratory Service ............................................................................................... 01410

01411 HVAC Test & Balance ..................................................................................................... 01411

01500 Temporary Facilities ......................................................................................................... 01500

01520 Storage and Protection ...................................................................................................... 01520

01600 Products & Substitutions ................................................................................................... 01600

01700 Contract Closeout .............................................................................................................. 01700

01810 Project Record Documents ................................................................................................ 01810

01820 Operating & Maintenance Data ........................................................................................ 01820

01850 Warranties & Bonds .......................................................................................................... 01850 VOLUME 2 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS No. of Pages

01 11 13 Work Covered by Contract Documents ....................................................................... 7

01 45 00 Quality Requirements ................................................................................................. 6

01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal ........................................................... 4

01 79 00 Demonstration and Training ......................................................................................... 5

01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirement .......................................................................... 16

01 91 15 Commissioning Process .............................................................................................. 23

01 91 16 Building Exterior Enclosure Commissioning ........................................................... 9 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE No. of Pages

03 33 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete .................................................................................................. 10

03 45 00 Precast Architectural Concrete ...................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 04 – MASONRY No. of Pages

04 20 00 Unit Masonry ................................................................................................................ 19


TC-4

DIVISION 05 – CONCRETE No. of Pages

05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing ............................................................................................... 6

05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing ........................................................................................................ 4

05 31 00 Steel Decking ................................................................................................................ 4

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications ........................................................................................................ 7

05 51 00 Metal Stairs ................................................................................................................... 6

05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings ................................................................................................. 5 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES No. of Pages

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry ........................................................................................................... 5

06 20 23 Interior Finish Carpentry ............................................................................................ 5

06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets ............................................................ 5 DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION No. of Pages

07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing ........................................................................................... 3

07 17 00 Bentonite Waterproofing ............................................................................................ DELETED

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation ........................................................................................................ 3

07 22 00 Roof Insulation .............................................................................................................. 8

07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers.......................................................................... 5

07 41 13 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels ................................................................................ 17

07 52 20 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing .................................................................. 21

07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ..................................................................................... 11

07 71 00 Roof Specialties ............................................................................................................ 7

07 72 00 Roof Accessories .......................................................................................................... 6

07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing .................................................................................................. 4

07 81 23 Intumescent Fireproofing .............................................................................................. 4

07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping ............................................................................................... 4

07 84 46 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems ......................................................................................... 5

07 92 00 Joint Sealants ................................................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS No. of Pages

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ................................................................................ 7


TC-5

08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors ....................................................................................................... 4

08 17 43 FRP Flush Doors ......................................................................................................... 5

08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames ............................................................................................. 4

08 33 26 Overhead Coiling Grilles .............................................................................................. 6

08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts .......................................................... 10

08 41 30 Fire Rated Glass and Framing Systems .................................................................... 6

08 43 34 Bullet Resistant Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts ........................... 5

08 45 23 Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Assemblies ...................................................................... 7

08 51 13 Aluminum Windows ..................................................................................................... 5

08 71 00 Door Hardware ............................................................................................................ 28

08 80 00 Glazing .......................................................................................................................... 8

08 83 00 Mirrors .......................................................................................................................... 4

08 88 56 Ballistics Resistant Glazing ........................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES No. of Pages

09 21 16 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies ......................................................................... 4

09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing ...................................................................................... 6

09 29 00 Gypsum Board .............................................................................................................. 5

09 30 00 Tiling ............................................................................................................................. 5

09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings ................................................................................................ 4

09 64 66 Wood Athletic Flooring ................................................................................................ 5

09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories ..................................................................................... 5

09 65 19 Resilient Flooring ........................................................................................................ 6

09 67 23 Resinous Flooring ........................................................................................................ 5

09 67 66 Fluid-Applied Athletic Flooring ................................................................................... 3

09 68 13 Tile Carpeting ............................................................................................................... 4

09 84 33 Sound-Absorbing Wall Units ........................................................................................ 4

09 91 13 Exterior Painting ........................................................................................................... 4

09 91 23 Interior Painting ............................................................................................................ 10

09 96 56 Graffiti Resistant Coatings ............................................................................................ 3


TC-6

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES No. of Pages

10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces ................................................................................................ 4

10 14 19 Signage .......................................................................................................................... 8

10 14 26 Post and Panel Signage ............................................................................................... 5

10 21 13 Toilet Compartments .................................................................................................... 4

10 21 23 Cubicle Curtains and Tracks ......................................................................................... 4

10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories .......................................................................................... 5

10 44 13 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets ............................................................................................ 3

10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers ....................................................................................................... 3

10 51 13 Metal Lockers ............................................................................................................... 6

10 56 13 Storage Shelving .......................................................................................................... DELETED

10 73 14 Canopies ........................................................................................................................ 3

10 75 00 Flagpoles ....................................................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 11 –EQUIPMENT No. of Pages

11 40 00 Food Service Equipment .............................................................................................. 41

11 52 13 Projection Screens ........................................................................................................ 3

11 54 13 Kilns .............................................................................................................................. 5

11 61 23 Folding and Portable Stages ........................................................................................ 5

11 61 43 Stage Curtains .............................................................................................................. 8

11 66 23 Gymnasium Equipment ............................................................................................... 9

11 66 43 Interior Electronic Scoreboard .................................................................................... 4

11 66 53 Gymnasium Dividers .................................................................................................... 4

11 68 00 Playfield Equipment and Structures ......................................................................... 4 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS No. of Pages

12 24 13 Roller Window Shades .................................................................................................. 5

12 32 02 Musical Casework ......................................................................................................... 6

12 35 54 Wood Laboratory Casework and Equipment .......................................................... 14

12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops ........................................................................................ 2


TC-7

12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames .................................................................................. 2

12 66 00 Telescoping Stands ....................................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT No. of Pages

14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevators ..................................................................................................... 8 VOLUME 3 DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION No. of Pages

21 00 00 Basic Fire Suppression Requirements ........................................................................ 7

21 05 00 Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods ............................................................ 7

21 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment .................................. 7

21 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping ................................................. 5

21 05 18 Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping ..................................................................... 2

21 05 48 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints ................................................................... 30

21 05 53 Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment........................................... 5

21 07 01 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems ......................................................................... 9

21 12 00 Fire-Suppression Standpipes ......................................................................................... 13

21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems ......................................................................................... 17

21 13 16 Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems .......................................................................................... 16

21 31 13 Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps ........................................................................ 7

21 34 00 Pressure-Maintenance Pumps ....................................................................................... 4

21 39 00 Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers ................................................................................ 9 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING No. of Pages

22 00 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements ...................................................................................... 7

22 05 00 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods ....................................................................... 7

22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment ............................................. 7

22 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping ..................................................... 5

22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping ............................................................. 4

22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping ................................................................................. 2

22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping ........................................................................ 8


TC-8

22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping ................................................................... 8

22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ........................................ 11

22 05 48 Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints ................................................................... 31

22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ...................................................... 5

22 07 01 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems ......................................................................... 9

22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation ........................................................................................... 13

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping ................................................................................................. 10

22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties ............................................................................... 12

22 11 25 Facility Natural-Gas Piping .......................................................................................... 14

22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ................................................................................... 8

22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties ................................................................................. 8

22 13 50 Grease Waste Interceptors ............................................................................................ 3

22 14 13 Facility Storm Drainage Piping ..................................................................................... 8

22 14 23 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties ............................................................................... 4

22 34 00 Fuel-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters ............................................................................ 6

22 42 13.13 Commercial Water Closets ...................................................................................... 5

22 42 13.16 Commercial Urinals ................................................................................................. 4

22 42 16.13 Commercial Lavatories ............................................................................................ 4

22 42 16.16 Commercial Sinks .................................................................................................... 5

22 42 23 Commercial Showers .................................................................................................... 3

22 47 16 Pressure Water Coolers ................................................................................................. 3 DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING No. of Pages

23 00 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements ...................................................................................... 7

23 01 30.51 Air Duct Cleaning .................................................................................................... 9

23 05 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods .................................................................... 11

23 05 13 Motors ........................................................................................................................... 8

23 05 14 Motor Controllers .......................................................................................................... 10

23 05 16 Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops ............................................................................... 8

23 05 19 Meters and Gages .......................................................................................................... 8


TC-9

23 05 23 Valves ........................................................................................................................... 9

23 05 29 Hangers and Supports ................................................................................................... 12

23 05 48 Vibration Isolation, Seismic & Windload Restraints .................................................... 34

23 05 53 Mechanical Identification ............................................................................................. 10

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ................................................................................. 18

23 07 00-1 Duct Insulation and Fire Wrap Systems .................................................................... 16

23 07 00-3 Pipe Insulation ........................................................................................................... 15

23 09 00 Automatic Temperature Controls .................................................................................. 31

23 21 13 Hydronic Piping ............................................................................................................ 15

23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps ............................................................................................................ 8

23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping ......................................................................................................... 9

23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment ............................................................................................... 8

23 31 13 Metal Ducts ................................................................................................................... 23

23 33 00 Duct Accessories ........................................................................................................... 21

23 34 23 Power Ventilators .......................................................................................................... 14

23 36 00 Variable Air Volume, Terminal Units .......................................................................... 5

23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles .................................................................................... 3

23 37 23 Louvers and Brick Vents ............................................................................................... 7

23 41 00 Air Filters ...................................................................................................................... 5

23 51 00 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks ................................................................................ 9

23 51 26 Condensing Boilers ....................................................................................................... 6

23 74 13 Rooftop Units ................................................................................................................ 12

23 74 33 Packaged Outdoor, Heating Makeup Air Units ............................................................ 7

23 80 00 Variable Frequency Controllers .................................................................................... 11

23 81 26 Split-System Air-Conditioning Units ............................................................................ 6

23 82 33 Fin Tube Radiation & Other Radiators ......................................................................... 4

23 82 39.13 Cabinet Heaters ........................................................................................................ 5

23 82 39.16 Propeller Unit Heaters .............................................................................................. 4


TC-10

VOLUME 4 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL No. of Pages

26 02 31 Diesel Engine Generators ............................................................................................ 17

26 02 89 Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits ................ 6

26 04 91 Low Voltage Fuses ....................................................................................................... 3

26 05 00.10 Special Requirements ............................................................................................... 17

26 05 00.20 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ................................................................... 16

26 05 00.40 Electrical Testing ..................................................................................................... 2

26 05 00.50 Penetration Firestopping .......................................................................................... 8

26 05 00.60 Electrical Related Work ........................................................................................... 11

26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ................................................ 8

26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding ................................................................................................ 6

26 05 29 Hangers and Supports ................................................................................................... 9

26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes ..................................................................................................... 15

26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Utility Structures .................................................................... 16

26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling ................................... 4

26 05 48 Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints ................................................................... 8

26 05 53 Identification ................................................................................................................. 10

26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis ... 7

26 07 21 Fire Alarm .................................................................................................................... 27

26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices .............................................................................................. 8

26 09 24 Lighting Control Systems ............................................................................................. 6

26 09 33 Theatrical Lighting System ........................................................................................ 37

26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers ........................................................................................... 6

26 24 13 Switchboards ................................................................................................................. 9

26 24 16 Panelboards .................................................................................................................. 11

26 27 26 Wiring Devices ............................................................................................................. 6

26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ....................................................................... 8

26 36 00 Transfer Switches .......................................................................................................... 9


TC-11

26 41 13 Lightning Protections for Structures ............................................................................. 4

26 51 00 Interior Lighting .......................................................................................................... 11

26 56 00 Exterior Lighting .......................................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS No. of Pages

27 05 00 Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces .................................................................. 9

27 10 00 Structured Cabling for Telecommunications ................................................................ 14

27 40 00 Video Distribution Equipment ...................................................................................... 12

27 41 00 Audio Visual and Sound Systems ................................................................................. 15

27 42 00 Radio Repeater System ................................................................................................. 10

27 50 00 Intercom and Clocks ..................................................................................................... 10 DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY No. of Pages

28 10 00 Intrusion and Access Control Systems .......................................................................... 15

28 20 00 Video Surveillance System ........................................................................................... 15

28 33 00 Boiler Room Gas Detection and Control System ......................................................... 4 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK No. of Pages

31 00 00 Geotechnical Investigation Report (For Reference Only)............................................. 52

31 10 00 Site Clearing .................................................................................................................. 4

31 20 00 Earth Moving ............................................................................................................... 10

31 21 00 Off-Gassing Mitigation ............................................................................................... 8 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No. of Pages

32 12 16 Asphalt Paving .............................................................................................................. 6

32 13 13 Concrete Paving ............................................................................................................ 12

32 17 23 Pavement Markings ...................................................................................................... 3

32 18 16.13 Playground Protective Surfacing ........................................................................... 4

32 31 00 Aluminum Cantilever Sliding Gate ............................................................................. 4

32 31 19 Steel Ornamental Fence .............................................................................................. 4

32 31 32 Vehicular Slide Gate Operator .................................................................................... 5

32 93 00 Plants ............................................................................................................................. 15


TC-12

DIVISION 33 –UTILITIES No. of Pages

33 10 00 Water Utilities ............................................................................................................... 9

33 30 00 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities ........................................................................................... 7

33 41 00 Storm Drainage ............................................................................................................. 7 VOLUME 5 APPENDIX No. of Pages

Remedial Investigation Report / Remedial Action Workplan - Volume 1A (For Reference Only)

..................................................................................................................................................... 48

Remedial Investigation Report / Remedial Action Workplan - Volume 1B (For Reference Only)

..................................................................................................................................................... 664

NJ Schools Development Authority New Public School #20

JE-0010-C01Revision #3 – April 26, 2013

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATORS 26 02 31 - 1 February 6, 2013DCA Submission

SECTION 26 02 31 - DIESEL ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency standby power supply

with the following features:

1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Load banks. 6. Outdoor enclosure. 7. Remote Fuel Storage Tank

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Electrical Specification Section "Transfer Switches".

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over

the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities,

operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other

components specified. 2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate

requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.




C. Air Quality Permits: For packaged compression ignition (diesel) engine driven generators with a

combined gross input of 1,000,000 BTU/Hr, or where the addition of the gross input to the existing input loads necessitates air permitting, fill out and file request for a Facility ID and air permit applications immediately upon acceptance of product submittal and pay all fees for the permit. Provide a copy of the application to the Engineer and Owner prior to mailing. Send forms along with the fees to: New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection and Energy Bureau of Source Review, CN07, Trenton, New Jersey 08625-0027.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that day tank, engine-

generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints". Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified”.

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event”.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer.

F. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in General Requirements Specification Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready

access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.




1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four; normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project

site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Authorized or franchised distributor shall have a minimum of ten years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of project.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one

source from a single manufacturer.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

G. Comply with ASME B15.1.

H. Comply with NFPA 37.

I. Comply with NFPA 70.

J. Comply with NFPA 99.

K. Comply with NFPA 101.

L. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

M. Comply with UL 2200.

N. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

O. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.




P. Noise Emission: The maximum noise level due to sound emitted by generator set including

engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of the installation shall be less than 70 dBA measured at a distance of 23 feet from the enclosure including the engine, engine exhaust discharge, and engine cooling-air intake and discharge.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of

proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's and Construction

Manager's written permission.

B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C, minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet (300 m).

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Concrete Division Specification Sections and Electrical Specification Sections "Electrical Related Work" and "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints".

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.




1.9 FUEL MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: When the main tank is initially filled, provide the initial treatment of

commercial grade fuel stabilizer in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Power Research Inc. PRI-D or other approved manufacturer of commercially available fuel treatment as recommended and provided by the fuel supplier.

2. Over-the-counter brands are not acceptable.

C. Continuing Fuel Maintenance: The generator vendor shall provide to the owner a list of a minimum of three service companies that can circulate and filter all of the fuel in the main tank and add stabilizers, fungicides, biocides, metal deactivators, anti-oxidants, as needed to refresh the remaining fuel supply.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 2. Generac Power Systems, Inc. 3. Kohler Co.; Generator Division. 4. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. 5. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

"Special Requirements". 2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.




B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete

foundation; and have lifting attachments.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.

A. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated with capacity as required to operate

as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. 2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and

address, and model and serial number of component.

B. Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads:

1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance.

a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract

Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.

2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no

load to full load. 3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step-

load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components.

9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load.

a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.

10. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.




2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm (11.4 m/s). D.

Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Engine Fuel System:

1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under

starting and load conditions. 2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess

fuel to source.

F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Thermostatically controlled, electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-

set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F

(82 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum. b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and

equipment connections.




I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected

with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer’s engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 at 500 Hz.. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from exhaust discharge after

installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less.

J. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

K. Starting System: Manufacturer's standard electric voltage, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with

ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine

flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project

Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.

Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal

insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after

battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet. 2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE

A. Comply with NFPA 30.




B. Remote-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Field installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank.

Features include the following:

1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for 24 hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 3. Vandal-resistant fill cap. 4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Float switches to start and stop the remote fuel oil transfer pump. 6. Tapings with plugs for fuel oil supply, return, overflow and vent piping. 7. Elevation legs/supports to provide tank above grade and to provide any needed head for

generator fuel pump.

2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator

control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and

engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and

engine gages shall be grouped in a common wall-mounted control and monitoring panel.

E. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 12. Generator overload.

F. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls:

1. AC voltmeter.



DIESEL ENGINE GENERATORS 26 02 31 - 10February 6, 2013DCA Submission

2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Start-stop switch. 11. Overspeed shutdown device. 12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. 13. Coolant low-level shutdown device. 14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device. 15. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 16. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 17. Generator overload.

G. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and

include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for

each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data-link transmission of indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections to terminals are covered in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control”.

I. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems.

Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.

1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. Control switch not in auto position. 4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 5. Battery low-voltage alarm.

J. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed below without

differentiating between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset.

1. Engine high-temperature shutdown. 2. Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown. 3. Overspeed shutdown. 4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown. 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm. 6. Lube-oil, low-pressure prealarm. 7. Fuel tank, low-fuel level. 8. Low coolant level.

K. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm

conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush- mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.




L. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled.

Push button shall be protected from accidental operation. Provide remote emergency stop switch in the generator enclosure. Additionally provide key operated remote generator stop switch inside stair tower near roof entry on roof floor as directed by Engineer/Owner. Provide 4#14+ Grd wire in 1” conduit from generator to each of the remote stop switch. These items may not be indicated on the drawings.

M. Provide controller within the generator enclosure. Also provide remote controller unit with

required power supply unit in Security Room/area on Ground floor as directed by the Engineer/Owner during construction. Provide 2 sets of twisted shielded pair 2#18 AWG cabling in 1” conduit between generator and remote control panel. Additionally, provide network interface card and connect to nearest available network switch with Cat-6 shielded wire in ¾ inch conduit. These items may not be indicated on the drawing and shall be provided by the contractor.

2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with

UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other

voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Dripproof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent

adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.




J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.8 LOAD BANK

A. Description: Portable generator load bank have been indicated, the contractor shall provide

rental portable load bank and demonstrate the generator testing to owner’s personnel. 2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph (160

km/h). Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Generator overcurrent and ground fault protection, instruments and controls shall be mounted within enclosure.

B. Description: Prefabricated or preengineered walk-in enclosure with the following features:

1. Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed building

erected on concrete foundation. 2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads. 3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation. 4. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when

engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. 6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation

while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 7. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in

coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by engine-generator-set components.

8. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

C. Noise Emission: The enclosure shall be designed to reduce the maximum noise level due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of the installation to less than 70 dBA measured at a distance of 23 feet from the enclosure including the engine, engine exhaust discharge, and engine cooling-air intake and discharge.

D. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components

within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable

louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. 2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed

to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.

E. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection.

1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available.




2. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both

unavailable.

F. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.

2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 2.11 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over

corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of

identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to

those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by

Owner's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of

connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment

instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection

of 1.5-inches (38 mm), 2.5-inches (64 mm) when located over occupied spaces on 4-inch- (100- mm-) high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Electrical Specification Section “Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints”.

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not

specified to be factory mounted. 3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in HVAC Division Specification Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and radiator with flexible

connectors.

D. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

E. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.

1. Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems are specified in HVAC Division Specification Section "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."

F. Ground equipment according to Electrical Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems”.




G. Connect wiring according to Electrical Specification Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables”.

H. Main fuel oil storage tank, transfer pump, piping, installation requirements, and connections to the base mounted fuel oil tank are specified in the HVAC Division Specifications and indicated on the HVAC Drawings.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to HVAC Division Specification Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems”.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and

prepare test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and

mechanical inspection (including those indicated to be optional) for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for

full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-

charging conditions. 5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity

of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.




6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch

wg (120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure

voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.

E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of

NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.

G. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist.

H. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

J. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

K. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

L. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and

measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

M. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months

after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and

connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken; and observations after remedial action.




3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to General Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training”.

END OF SECTION 26 02 31

NJ Schools Development Authority JE-0010-C01 New Public School #20 Revision #1 - March 6, 2013

TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE 26 02 89 - 1 ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 02 89 - TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted TVSS for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment.

B. Provide TVSS devices where indicated in the “Switchboard and Panelboard Schedules”, on the “One Line Diagram”, and elsewhere as indicated.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor(s), both singular and plural; also, transient voltage surge suppression.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

C. Product Certificates: For TVSS devices, from manufacturer.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For TVSS devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.

D. Comply with NEMA LS 1.

E. Comply with UL 1283 and UL 1449 2nd Edition listing and classification.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Service Conditions: Rate TVSS devices for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C). 3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing. 4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of field-mounted TVSS devices to allow adequate clearances for maintenance.

B. Coordinate TVSS devices with Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" if applicable.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

Switchboards: 120/208 Volt 277/480 Volt Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc. TE/2XGA/240/SC/(*FM) TE/4XGA/240/SC/(*FM) * where applicable * where applicable

Panelboards: 120/208 Volt 277/480 Volt Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc. TE/XF TE/XF

B. Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc.

C. Atlantic Scientific Corp.

D. Current Technology, Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions

E. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit

F. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

G. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.

H. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

I. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

J. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section "Special Requirements".

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protective Device Description: Shall feature bolt in modular design with field-replaceable modules and the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 3. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 4. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 5. One set of dry contacts for remote monitoring of protection status. Coordinate with

building power monitoring and control system. 6. Surge-event operations counter. 7. Mechanical indication for individual module status.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode, 240 kA per phase.



C. Connection Means: Permanently wired.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 2nd Edition clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 208Y/120 and 600Y/347; 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120 and 1200 V for 600Y/347. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120 and 1200 V for 600Y/347. 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120 and 1200 V for 600Y/347.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 2nd Edition clamping voltage for 240/120 V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits, shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V. 2. Line to Ground: 400 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 2nd Edition clamping voltage for 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, with high leg shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg. 2. Line to Ground: 400 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

G. Protection modes and UL 1449 2nd Edition clamping voltage for voltages of 480, 240, or 600; 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V and 2500 V for 600 V. 2. Line to Ground: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V and 2500 V for 600 V.

2.3 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 3. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 4. One set of dry contacts for remote monitoring of protection status.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 40 kA per mode, 80 kA per phase.

C. Protection modes and UL 1449 2nd edition clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 208Y/120 and 600Y/347; 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120 and 1200 V for 600Y/347. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120 and 1200 V for 600Y/347. 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120 and 1200 V for 600Y/347.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 2nd Edition clamping voltage for 240/120 V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits, shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.



2. Line to Ground: 400 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 2nd Edition clamping voltage for 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, with high leg shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg. 2. Line to Ground: 400 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 2nd Edition clamping voltage for voltages of 240, 480, or 600; 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V and 2500 V for 600 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V, 800 V for 240 V and 2500 V for 600 V.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected; flush or surface mounted to match switchboard or panelboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance ground.

B. Install TVSS devices for switchboards, panelboards, and other electrical equipment with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

1. Provide multipole, minimum 30-A circuit breakers in panelboards as a dedicated disconnect for the suppressor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide multipole, minimum 60-A circuit breaker in switchboards as a dedicated disconnect for the suppressor, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation requirements.

C. Perform tests and inspections.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, "Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. TVSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, switchboards, panelboards, or other electrical equipment to their sources until TVSS devices are installed and connected.

B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the TVSS installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is over.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain TVSS devices.



LOW VOLTAGE FUSES 26 04 91 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 04 91 - LOW VOLTAGE FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits enclosed switches panel boards switchboards enclosed controllers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in General Requirements Specification Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type of fuse provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc. 5. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

"Special Requirements".



2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Class RK1, dual-element, current-limiting and time delay unles otherwise indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00 .10 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 00 .10 – SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. “General Provisions of the Contract”, including “General and Supplementary Conditions” (here-inafter referred to as the “Conditions of the Contract”), “General Requirements Division Specifi-cation Sections” and this Section, apply to the Drawings, this Section, and other Sections of the Electrical Division.

B. This Section, related Drawings, and all other Sections of the Electrical Division describe the re-quirements pertaining to the Electrical Division Work for this project.

C. These Specifications, the accompanying Drawings, and any subsequent Bulletins, Addenda or Clarifications constitute the Contract Documents and are intended to be complimentary to each other and between them describe the full intent, extent and scope of the project.

D. Should an item be indicated in one document and not the others it shall be treated as if it were indicated in each.

E. Should a discrepancy in the quality, quantity or extent of the work occur within the documents the higher quality, greater quantity and more extensive work shall govern.

F. The complete set of project specifications and drawings shall be considered as the contract documents for each division. Include all items necessary for complete operating systems.

G. Examine the project site where practical and determine the conditions that affect the work. No extra payments will be made for extra work arising out of failure to make such examination.

1.2 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words “shall”, “shall be,” or “shall comply with,” depending on the context, are implied when a colon is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. References to other specification sections may be made using a shortened form of the section names in quotation marks.

3. Specifications requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are de-scribed in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.



2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following further define the definitions in General Requirements Specification Sections.

B. “Work”: All labor, material, equipment, etc. necessary to successfully complete the project ac-cording to the intent of the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

C. “Wiring”, "Feeder(s)", "Branch Circuit(s)": Raceway, conduit, fittings, wire, junction and outlet boxes, switches, cutouts, and receptacles and items necessary or required in connection with or relating to such wiring.

D. “Concealed”: Embedded in masonry or other construction installed behind wall furring, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, below floor or below grade.

E. “Exposed”: Not installed underground or “concealed” as defined above.

F. “Indicated”: A cross-reference to graphics, notes, or schedules on the drawings, to other para-graphs, schedules or tables in the specification, and to similar means of recording, defining or il-lustrating requirements in contract documents. Where terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “sched-uled”, and “specified” are used in lieu of “indicated”, it is for the purpose of locating the cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

G. “Directed, Requested, etc.”: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as “directed”, “re-quested”, “authorized”, “selected”, “approved”, “required”, “accepted”, and “permitted” mean “di-rected by the Architect/Engineer”, “requested by the Architect/Engineer”, etc. No such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Architect’s/Engineer’s responsibility into Contractor’s area of construction supervision.

H. “Furnish”: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, means supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

I. “Install”: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, means operations at project site includ-ing unloading, unpacking, assembly, erections, anchoring and connecting ready for use as ap-plicable in each instance.

J. “Provide”: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, with all accessories, appurtenances, connections, directions, fluids, fuels, guarantees, hardware, instructions, manuals, warranties, etc., as applicable in each in-stance.

K. “Project Site”: The location, space, structure, etc. for the Contractor’s performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of project site may be shown on drawings or described in specifications, and may or may not be identical to actual conditions encountered.

L. “Foreign Voltage”: An electric power source present in a box, cabinet, compartment, enclosure or the like, not derived from the main electrical power source contained therein, and which re-mains energized when the main electrical power source is de-energized or disconnected. For example; a motor starter control circuit not derived from the motor starter control power trans-former or branch circuit not originating from the panelboard or loadcenter it runs through.



M. “Others”: Contractors, subcontractors or tradesmen on the project performing Work on this Pro-ject under Sections or Divisions other than the Electrical Division Work.

N. “Electrical Contractor”: Contractor, subcontractor or tradesmen on the project performing Work on this Project under the Electrical Division Work.

O. “HVAC Contractor”: Contractor, subcontractor or tradesmen on the project performing Work on this Project under the Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning Division Work.

P. “Plumbing Contractor”: Contractor, subcontractor or tradesmen on the project performing Work on this Project under the Plumbing Division Work.

Q. “Mechanical Contractor”: Contractor, subcontractor or tradesmen on the project performing Work on this Project under the Plumbing Division Work, Fire Suppression Division Work or Heating, Ventilation or Air-Conditioning Division Work.

R. “Sprinkler Contractor”: Contractor, subcontractor or tradesmen on the project performing Work on this Project under the Fire Suppression Division Work.

S. "Basis-of-Design Product Specification": Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designa-tion, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service perfor-mance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

T. "Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)": The organization, office, or individual responsible for ap-proving equipment, materials, installation or procedure.

U. "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)": The legal entity recognized by OSHA as meeting the requirements defined in 29 CFR 1910.7


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels re-quired; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has re-sulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient pro-duction capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to prac-tice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering ser-vices of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installa-tions of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.



1.5 SUMMARY

A. These Specifications and the notes on the Drawings are written in the imperative language for the most part and specify products, materials and work to be provided by the Contractor for Electrical Division Work.

B. These Specifications may reference other Divisions or Sections by their long or short title rather than their Division or Section number. Short titles use keywords contained within the long title.

C. Specifications and notes are of simplified form and may include incomplete sentences. Omis-sion of words or phrases such as “the Contractor shall’, “shall be”, “furnish”, “provide”, “a”, “an”, “the”, and “all” are intentional. Omitted words or phrases shall be supplied by inference.

D. These Specifications and related Drawings are also applicable to Electrical Work performed un-der the Electrical Division Work by subcontractors, technicians, vendors, tradesmen, and the like, who are employed or otherwise engaged by the Contractor for Electrical Division Work.

E. Portions of these Specifications and related Drawings may also apply to electrical work per-formed by other trades under other divisions of these specifications.

F. Where the words “provide”, “furnish” or “install” are mentioned separately or in conjunction with one another they shall mean “furnish and install” unless specifically indicated otherwise. These words are further prefixed to all materials, equipment and apparatus mentioned in these specifi-cations or indicated on the drawings, either in abbreviated or in schedule form.

G. Where Specification Sections are referenced by a title in quotations, the title contained within the quotation marks may be a general short title describing the contents of the section and not the full title by which the section is identified.

1.6 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all required labor, materials, equipment, and Contractor’s services necessary for com-plete, safe, and operating installation of Electrical Work including in general, but not limited to the following:

1. Utility Services. 2. Switchboards. 3. Panelboards. 4. Raceway. 5. Wire and Cable. 6. Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Controls. 7. Wiring Devices and Plates. 8. Grounding. 9. Transformers. 10. Engine-Driven Generators. 11. Transfer Switches. 12. Circuit and Motor Disconnects. 13. Alarm and Communication Systems. 14. Testing. 15. Commissioning. 16. Selective Coordination of the Emergency distribution 17. Temporary Light and Power. 18. Supports. 19. Seismic Restraints.



20. Identification. 21. Rigging and Hoisting. 22. Excavation, Trenching and Backfill. 23. Cutting and Patching. 24. Flashing and Counterflashing. 25. Access Doors. 26. Submittal Documents.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, all project equipment requiring an electrical power source and any peripheral devices integrally or remotely mounted and necessary for the proper operation of the equipment shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor. Review all Divisions of the Specifications and all Drawings of all trades for the details of such wiring. Equipment furnished under other Divisions for installation by the Electrical Contractor will be accompanied by the approved wiring diagrams for use by the Electrical Contractor who shall set or mount these devices and wire them.

C. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, the Electrical Contractor shall provide electrical power wiring to equipment, appliances, motors, individual mo-tor starters, control panels, motorized dampers, control valves and VAV boxes furnished under Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Specification Sections and Drawings. All individual motor starters and combination motor starters will be furnished by the HVAC Contractor for in-stallation and wiring by the Electrical Contractor; all required disconnect switches shall be pro-vided by the Electrical Contractor. Individual control panels furnished under HVAC Specification Sections and Drawings shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. Temperature control pan-els, motors, motorized dampers, control valves and VAV boxes furnished under HVAC Specifi-cation Sections and Drawings shall be installed by the HVAC Contractor and connected to elec-trical power by the Electrical Contractor.

D. Plumbing and Fire Suppression Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, the Electrical Contrac-tor shall provide all electrical wiring to equipment, appliances, motors, individual motor starters, and control panels furnished under the Plumbing and Fire Suppression Specification Sections and Drawings. All individual motor starters and combination motor starters will be furnished by the Plumbing or Fire Suppression Contractor for installation by the Electrical Contractor; all oth-er required disconnect switches shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. Individual re-mote control panels furnished under Plumbing and Fire Suppression Specification Sections and Drawings shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. Motors furnished under Plumbing and Fire Suppression Specification Sections and Drawings shall be installed by the Plumbing or Fire Suppression Contractor and connected to electrical power by the Electrical Contractor.

E. Automatic Temperature Control/Building Automation System Equipment: Unless otherwise in-dicated, the Electrical Contractor shall provide electrical power wiring to central and remote con-trol panels, motorized dampers, control valves and VAV boxes. All wiring to the equipment and other peripheral devices described in the “Controls”, “Control Equipment” or “Sequence of Op-eration” Sections in the Specifications or on the Drawings shall be provided by the HVAC Con-tractor. Any other peripheral devices requiring electrical power for their operation shall be wired by the HVAC Contractor to the power source at the control panels.

F. Items of equipment requiring wiring but furnished by the Owner or by other Contractors under the Specification Sections and Drawings of other Divisions will be rigged in place, mounted and set by those furnishing such equipment. All wiring and disconnect devices necessary to place such equipment in operation shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.

1.7 DRAWINGS



A. Drawings are diagrammatic and define the intent of the Work. Locations of equipment, fixtures, devices, panelboards, ducts, pipes, diffusers, partitions, and openings are approximately correct but are subject to modifications caused by structural and / or existing conditions and equipment provided by other contractors or by the Owner. Coordinate all work with other trades. Deter-mine roughing locations from approved shop drawings only. Minor modifications of location re-quired to effect such coordination will be made at no cost to the Owner.

B. The Drawings indicate equipment, fixtures and devices based on the specified manufacturers and those indicated in the schedules. Equipment, fixtures and devices having equal or better performance characteristics and not exceeding the available space limitations may be consid-ered. Verify that equipment, fixtures and devices will fit through building openings, into the available space, and that all criteria for working clearances are fulfilled.

1.8 PERMITS, CODES, FEES AND SERVICES

A. It shall be noted that all electro-mechanical installations required by this Division shall be per-formed as outlined in the National Electrical Contractors Association's National Electrical Instal-lation Standards and the American Electricians Handbook, latest editions.

B. In addition to the requirements of the General Requirements Division, the Contractor shall make application to the local electrical inspection authority before any work commences and shall fur-nish a copy of such application for approval and record.

C. The permit must be signed and sealed by a contractor licensed to perform electrical work in the city and state in which the project is located.

D. Comply with all applicable federal, state and local electrical and safety codes.

E. Comply with all utility company requirements.

F. Comply with NJAC 5:23 NJ Uniform Construction Code (NJUCC).

G. Comply with the International Building Code (IBC) – IBC 2009 as amended.

H. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) – NFPA 70-2011 as amended.

I. Comply with the National Electrical Safety Code – ANSI C2-2007 as referenced by the NEC.

J. Comply with the National Fire Alarm Code – NFPA 72-2007 as amended.

K. Comply with the Energy Subcode IECC 2009 and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 as amended.

L. Comply with the Barrier Free Subcode – Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 as amended.

M. Comply with the Elevator Safety Subcode NJAC 5:23-12 ASME/ANSI A17.1 and A18.1 and as referenced by the NEC and other adopted codes.

N. Comply with the Standard for Emergency and Standby Systems NFPA 110-2010 as referenced by the NEC and other adopted codes.



O. Comply with the Life Safety Code – NFPA 101-2009 as referenced by the NEC, Healthcare Guidelines, and other adopted codes.

P. Upon completion of the Work, before final acceptance, furnish certificate of approval of electrical inspection authority having jurisdiction, or executed copy thereof.

Q. All electrical material and equipment shall bear the seal of approval of the National Fire Protec-tion Association, the Underwriters’ Laboratory Label, or other National Recognized Testing La-boratory acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction where such approvals and labeling are applicable.

1.9 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. The work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades installing inter-related work. Before installation, make proper provision to avoid interferences with other trades.

B. Locations of pipes, ducts, electrical raceways, switches, panels, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate the work for interferences anticipated and encountered. Deter-mine the exact route and location of each pipe, duct and electrical raceway prior to fabrication.

C. Right-of-way: Lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example, steam, condensate and plumbing drains shall normally have the right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right-of-way lines over lines whose eleva-tions can be changed. Lines containing liquid or gas have right-of-way over electrical lines.

D. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipe, ducts, and electrical raceways shall be made as required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indi-cated on the drawings. Furnish and install all offsets, pull boxes, etc., required to effect these transitions and changes in direction.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Make preliminary submission of three copies of the following items directly to the Engineer. Two copies will be returned directly to the Contractor.

1. Switchboards and panelboards. 2. Lighting fixtures.

B. Coordinate all construction and installation details with all other trades involved and verify all manufacturer’s requests prior to submission for consideration by the Architect, Engineer, Con-struction Manager and Owner.

C. Bind all related Product Data together, properly indexed and identified with all pertinent catalog numbers, options, etc. highlighted or targeted. Loose sheets or binding system relying on paper clips, slip-on spines or the like will be discarded and the transmittal returned to the Contractor.

D. Ensure that all copies of submittals are bound in the same sequence and order. Any conflicts, delays, additional costs, etc. arising as a result of the Contractor’s failure to do so shall be the burden of the Contractor to resolve.

E. Refer to “Schedule of Submittals” at the end of this Section for a guide to the minimum submit-tals required.



F. Submit Product Data for each type of product specified.

G. Submit Shop Drawings detailing fabrication and installation of supports and anchorage for elec-trical items.

H. Submit Coordination Drawings for electrical installation.

1. Prepare Coordination Drawings according to General Requirements Specification Section “Submittals” to a ¼-inch equals 1-foot (1:50) scale or larger. Detail major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relation to each other and to other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations and space requirements for installation, access, and working clearance. Show where se-quence and coordination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate drawing preparation with effort specified in other Specification Sections. In-clude the following:

a. Provision for scheduling, sequencing, moving, and positioning large equipment in the building during construction.

b. Floor plans, elevations, and details, including the following:

1) Clearances to meet safety requirements and for servicing and maintaining equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

2) Equipment support details. 3) Exterior wall, roof, and foundation penetrations of cable and raceway; and

their relation to other penetrations and installations. 4) Fire-rated interior wall and floor penetrations by electrical installations. 5) Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases.

c. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installing air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, alarm and communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling mounted items.

I. Submit Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification product for Project.

J. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance require-ments.

1.11 RECORD DOCMENTS

A. Provide a set of corrected digital data files of all Contract Drawings, revised to reflect the as-built conditions of the project, using the same digital data software program, version, and oper-ating system as the original Contract Drawings.

B. Prepare record documents/as-built drawings in accordance with the requirements in the Gen-eral Provisions of the Contract as a minimum. In addition to the requirements specified, indicate installed conditions, sizes, routing, manufacturer, model or catalog numbers, etc. for specified equipment as well as approved substitutions for:

1. Underground utilities. 2. Service and distribution equipment. 3. Switchboards and panelboards.



4. Feeder and branch circuit arrangements. 5. Schedule, diagrams, and symbol lists. 6. Major raceway systems. 7. Lighting fixtures and wiring devices. 8. Alarm, control and communication systems.

C. Indicate concealed locations with dimensions from prominent building or site lines.

D. Indicate approved contract modifications.

E. Assemble all operation and maintenance manuals, instructions, charts, diskettes, etc. required by the drawings and all sections of the specifications into one or more binders, properly identi-fied and indexed. Refer to “Schedule of Submittals” as a guide.

1.12 FINAL TESTS

A. Before an application for final acceptance of the work will be considered, all tests deemed nec-essary to show proper execution of the work will be performed, witnessed, approved, and com-pleted. Scheduling of all testing procedures shall be submitted for approval.

B. Where electricity-utilizing equipment, supplied by other trades is energized, controlled or other-wise made operative by electric wiring systems, the testing which will prove proper functional performance shall be conducted specifically by the trade responsible for the mechanical equip-ment.

C. Testing to show the proper functioning of all lighting fixtures and lamps, including those supplied by others, shall be included in the electrical work.

D. Perform all tests and inspections of equipment, material and wiring to determine whether all provisions of these specifications and drawings have been fulfilled. Wiring shall be tested for proper performance. Lubrication of all rotating equipment and direction of rotation of all 3 phase motors shall be checked.

1.13 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

A. All work performed shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of one (1) year from the date the project is turned over to the owner.

B. Remedy any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of occupancy by the Owner or the date of the Certificate of Final Payment of the total contract and in accord-ance with the terms of any special guarantees provided in the contract.

C. Unless the material suppliers or manufacturers extend such guarantees or warranties to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible to correct any deficiencies which arise after such warranties or guarantees expire and prior to one year after completion of the work.

D. See “General Conditions” and General Requirements Division Specification Sections for addi-tional requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation.

1. Provide products that are suitable for use in the environment in which they will be in-stalled with regard to temperature and humidity as well as its classification as a wet, damp, dry and/or hazardous location.

2. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devic-es and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

3. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

4. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Contract Docu-ments establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following:

1. Product/Manufacturer/Source: Where Contract Documents name only a single product and manufacturer or source, provide the product named or an unnamed product that complies with the contract requirements. Comply with provisions of Part 2 “Comparable Products” and “Substitutions” for consideration of an unnamed product.

2. Products/Manufacturers/Sources: Where Contract Documents name two or more prod-ucts and manufacturers or sources, provide one of the products named that complies with contract requirements or an unnamed product that complies with the contract re-quirements. Comply with provisions of Part 2 “Comparable Products” and “Substitutions” for consideration of an unnamed product.

3. Available Products/Manufacturers/Sources: Where Contract Documents name two or more products and manufacturers or sources, and indicate that the selection is not limited to them, provide products that comply with the Contract Documents.

4. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Ar-chitect’s/Engineer’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satis-factorily.

a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Con-tract Documents concerning “substitutions” for selection of a matching product in another product category.

7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase “…as select-ed from manufacturer’s standard colors, patterns, textures…” or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Archi-tect/Engineer will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected.

8. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases,



and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these in-creases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and com-missioning requirements.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: Contractor's request for substitution will be considered when the following condi-tions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the requests will be returned without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy con-servation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indi-

cated results. 4. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product

provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits. 5. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 6. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdic-

tion. 8. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 10. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 11. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

12. Provide a completed “Submittal Format for Consideration of Substitutions or Comparable Products” form for each proposed substitute product. A sample form and a blank form can be found in Part 4.

13. If the requested substitution affects the work of other trades in the manner of causing in-creased or additional equipment, material, time, labor or any other cost to be incurred by the other trades, the Contractor shall be responsible for assuming these costs and there shall be no additional cost to the Owner.

14. If the requested substitution affects the work of other trades in the manner of reducing the equipment, material, time, labor, or any other costs, the Contractor shall be responsible for including the appropriate amount of credit from these trades for their reduced costs in his or her proposed credit, if any, offered to the Owner.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Contractor's request to provide comparable products will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the requests will be returned without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicat-ed results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.



2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. See sample format at end of this and other applicable Sections.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. 6. Provide a completed “Submittal Format for Consideration of Substitutions or Comparable

Products” form for each proposed comparable product. A sample form and a blank form can be found in Part 4.

7. If the proposed comparable product affects the work of other trades in the manner of causing increased or additional equipment, material, time, labor, or any other cost to be incurred by the other trades, the Contractor shall be responsible for assuming these costs and there shall be no additional cost to the Owner.

8. If the proposed comparable product affects the work of other trades in the manner of re-ducing the equipment, material, time, labor, or any other cost, the Contractor shall be re-sponsible for including the appropriate amount of credit from these trades for their re-duced costs in his or her proposed credit, if any, offered to the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Install electrical work as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instruc-tions and complying with applicable portions of NEC, the American Electricians Handbook; the National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2; and National Electrical Contractors Association’s Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction NECA 1-2000.

PART 4 - SUBMITTAL FORMS AND SCHEDULES

A. Submittal forms and schedule may be found on the following pages.



B. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS.

Product/Manufacturer/Source INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURE

Feature Specified/Scheduled Product Proposed Substitute/Comparable Product

Lighting Fixture Type A

Manufacturer Generic 2x4

Catalog Number FLUOR440A12

Mounting Lay-in

Length - nominal 48-inches

Width - nominal 24-inches

Depth 5.875-inches

Mounting recessed - flanged

Housing

Material and gauge 24 ga. cold-rolled steel

Construction method Welded

Interior finish optical white paint

Application method electrostatic spray

Interior reflectance 85%

Ventilation openings louvers on top

Light seal method - housing to door frame

black polyurethane

Earthquake clips two on each side, none on ends

Leveling/fastening method jack-screws

Reflector

Material and gauge housing interior

Finish optical white paint

Reflectance 85%

Lens

Material 100% virgin acrylic UV stabilized plastic

Thickness 0.125" thick

Retention method spring steel clips

Pattern A-12 prismatic male prisms

Sheet 1 of 2



Retention method continuous frame

Frame flush cold-rolled steel w/ squared corners

Light seal method - lens to door frame

black polyurethane

Frame hinges lift and shift

Frame latches spring loaded rooster head

Ballast

Type Electronic

Sound rating A

THD less than 20%

Transient voltage protection IEEE Category A or higher

Operating frequency 20 kHz or higher

Lamp current crest factor 1.7 or less

Ballast factor 0.85 or higher

Power factor 0.95 or higher

Operating temperature 0 deg F. and higher

Lamps

Type F32T8

Quantity 4

Wattage 32-watts

Color temperature 3500 deg K

Color rendering index 85

Sheet 2 of 2



C. SUBMITTAL FORMAT FOR CONSIDERATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS OR COMPARABLE

PRODUCTS

Product/Manufacturer/Source Feature Specified/Scheduled Product Proposed Substitute/Comparable

Product



D. SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS

The following "Schedule of Submittals" is a comprehensive list of typical specification sections whether contained in the bound specifications or not. It is intended as a reference or guide to the contractor, owner, architect and engineer as to the locations in the specifications where references to required submittals may be located.

SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS

AS A MINIMUM, SUBMIT THE INFORMATION INDICATED IN THIS SCHEDULE AS DESCRIBED IN GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS AND THE REFERENCED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS THEREIN.

PR

OD

UC

T D

AT

A

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

S

SA

MP

LES

WIR

ING

DIA

GR

AM

S

QU

ALI

FIC

AT

ION

S

TE

ST

RE

PO

RT

S

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

DA

TA

SE

ISM

IC D

AT

A

PR

OJE

CT

CLO

SE

OU

T

OT

HE

R

CONTRACT REFERENCE SECTION SHORT TITLE 260500.10 Special Conditions 260500.20 Materials & Methods 260543 Underground Ducts 260543.10 Electrical Related Work 260573 Selective Coordination 260526 Grounding & Bonding Seismic Controls 260553 Identification 260500.40 Testing 260519 Conductors & Cables Control / Signal Cables 260519.13 Undercarpet Cables 260523 Medium Voltage Cables 260533 Raceway & Boxes 260539 Underfloor Raceway 260536 Cable Trays 262726 Wiring Devices 260923 Lighting Control Devices 260913 Power Monitoring 263213 Generators 263213.10 Fuel Tanks 263353 Static UPS 263323 Inverters 262923 Variable Frequency Controllers 261200 Medium Voltage Transformers 263533 Power Factor Correction Voltage Regulators 264313 TVSS 262100 Overhead Distribution 261300 Medium Voltage Switchgear



261116 Unit Substations 262816 Disconnects 263600 Transfer Switches Bolted Pressure Switches 262913 Starters & Controllers 262300 Switchgear 262413 Switchboards 262416 Panelboards 262419 MCC's 262500 Bus Duct 262200 600 Volt Transformers 262813 Fuses 265100 Interior Lighting 265600 Exterior Lighting 265688 Sports Lighting 265561 Stage Lighting Dimming Controls 264113 Lightning Protection 283000 Fire Alarm 275123 Intercom 275123.5 School Intercom & Program 275223 Nurse Call 275116 PA & Music System 275009 Sound Masking 275313 Clock Control Data & Video System 271300 Backbone Cabling 271500 Horizontal Cabling 274133 Television

END OF SECTION 26 05 00 .10


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 .20 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 00 .20 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Guards for physical protection. 2. Electrical demolition. 3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 4. Touchup painting. 5. Joint sealers. 6. Access doors. 7. Demonstration and instruction. 8. Temporary light and power. 9. Utility services. 10. Excavation, trenching and backfill. 11. Concrete for equipment foundations, electric utility work; for miscellaneous concrete work

and patching.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Guards:

1. Action Submittals

a. Product Data: For each type of product.

1) Include construction details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

b. Shop Drawings:

1) Include details for attachments to other work. 2) Detail installation of guards for each type of substrate.

c. Samples: For each device to receive a guard in size and finish specified.

B. Access Doors:


a. Product Data: For each type of product.

1) Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

b. Shop Drawings:



1) Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2) Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type

of substrate.

c. Samples: For each door face material, at least in size, in specified finish. d. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including

types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

C. Joint Sealers


a. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. b. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of

cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

c. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in wide joints formed between two long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

d. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1) Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2) Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3) Joint-sealant formulation. 4) Joint-sealant color.

2. Informational Submittals

a. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. b. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from

manufacturer. c. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate:

For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. d. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. e. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant

manufacturer, indicating the following:

1) Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2) Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

f. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

g. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. h. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER



A. The following are minimum requirements, refer to General Requirements Specification Sections and Conditions of the Contract for additional requirements. Remove all elements of the temporary light and power system at the completion of the project and restore all disturbed surfaces.

B. The existing light and power distribution system shall be utilized as the source of temporary light and power for construction operations.

C. Connect to the existing system where directed by the Owner.

D. Provide power outlets and flexible power cords as required for construction.

E. Connect to existing power source. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. Owner to pay for power consumed.

F. Provide power outlets for construction operations, branch wiring, distribution boxes, and flexible power cords as required.

G. Provide and maintain temporary lighting for construction operations.

H. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

I. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. Repair, clean, and replace lamps at the end of construction.

J. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.

K. Maintain feeders and branch circuits in service until replacement circuits are installed and ready to connect and energize.

L. Make the necessary arrangements with the local utility company to install temporary electric service. Where the utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the utility company's recommendations.

M. Arrange with the utility company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, where necessary to make connections for temporary electric service.

N. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction.

O. Obtain easements to bring temporary electric service to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose.

P. Cost or use charges for the temporary electric service are not chargeable to the Architect, Engineer or Owner, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order.

Q. Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during the construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters and main switchgear.



R. Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.

S. Provide grounded extension cords; use "hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic.

T. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress.

U. Provide general service energy saving incandescent lamps, or compact fluorescent lamps, of wattages required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

V. Except where overhead electric service must be used, install electric power service underground.

W. Install wiring overhead, and run vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 20 amps at 125 volts a.c. and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance.

X. Whenever overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching.

Y. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the entire system and will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

Z. Provide exterior yard and sign lights so that signs are visible when Work is being performed.

AA. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements Specification Sections for additional requirements.

1.4 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Electrical Service:

1. Provide primary service conduits, transformer pad, secondary service conduit and wiring, drag wires, fittings, connectors, supports, etc. as required and as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the Electric Utility Company requirements. Remove the existing electric service at the completion of the project. Demolish and remove existing transformer and associated switching equipment, pads etc. Remove and dispose of abandoned primary and secondary cables. Cut and cap existing abandoned primary and secondary conduits 6-inches below grade and mark location.

B. For Telephone Service, CATV Service and Telecommunication service requirements refer to technology consultant specifications.

1.5 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

A. Excavation, trenching and backfill for underground utilities and services, including underground raceways, manholes, handholes, pads, foundations, bases and equipment shall be done in



accordance with Electrical Specification Section "Electric Related Work" and "Site Construction" and "Earthwork" Division Sections.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.

B. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

D. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

E. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

F. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.

G. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces.

H. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

I. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION

A. Guards shall be heavy gauge welded wire mesh or clear perforated or slotted ultraviolet stabilized, high impact, virgin injection molded polycarbonate.

B. Wire guards shall be finish painted to match the device protected on the finished surface of the surface to which it is attached.



C. Guards shall not impair the normal physical operation or testing of the equipment.

2.2 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

2.3 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Joint Sealers:

1. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, one-part, neutral-curing, silicone sealant for masonry substrates.

2. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, one-part, mildew resistant, silicone sealant for Use NT, for nonporous joint substrates.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS

A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

B. Frames: 16-gauge steel, with a 1-inch wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in masonry, pre-cast, or cast in place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.

C. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1-inch wide exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.

D. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead.

E. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame.

F. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory prime paint.

G. Fire Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing mechanism.

H. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver operated cam locks.

I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Bar-Co., Inc. 2. J. L. Industries 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc. 6. Or Approved Equal.



2.5 CONCRETE FORMWORK

A. Forms for Concrete: Smooth lumber, plywood or other easy release materials; reinforced to prevent excessive deflection or possibility of failure during placement of concrete; sufficiently heavy for construction to prevent leakage which would be harmful to structural quality of concrete.

B. Exposed Corner Chamfer Strip: Provide wood, metal, plastic or rubber chamfer strips in form at exposed external corners of concrete.

C. Form coating compound: Commercially formulated compound, which will prevent bond of concrete forms. Provide compound recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, and which will not stain concrete or interfere with moisture curing of concrete or subsequent painting of exposed surfaces.

2.6 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: Except as otherwise indicated, provide ASTM A 615, deformed, Grade 40 for size numbers 3 through 18; ASTM A 675, plain, Grade 50, for size number 2; sizes as shown.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn.

2.7 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type 1, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Local Aggregate not complying with ASTM C 33 but which have shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used.

D. Water: Clean and free of substances harmful to concrete.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260

F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A (normal range) and Type F (high-range), (superplasticizer).

G. Set-Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:

1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water-reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water-reducing and Accelerating. 5. Type F, High range, water-reducing (superplasticizer). 6. Type G, High range water-reducing and Retarding (superplasticizer).

H. Calcium Chloride: Use not permitted.

2.8 DESIGN AND PROPORTIONING OF MIXES



A. General: Design electrical work concrete as follows, for each 28-day compressive strength class:

B. Admixtures: Except as otherwise indicated, use is at Contractor's option. Comply in each instance with admixture manufacturer's recommendations and suggested limitation for required quality of concrete. Use water-reducing admixture (normal or high range) in all concrete. Comply with the following limitations for the resulting air entrainment.

1. Concrete Above Grade: Not less than 2% nor more then 4%. 2. Concrete Below Grade: Not less than 2% nor more then 4%, except up to 6% where

maximum aggregate size must be 3/4" or less. 3. Backfill Concrete: Not ore than 7%.

C. Slump Limitations: Limit water content in design mixes to produce the following slumps at point of placement (but do not exceed specified water/cement ratios). Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture may have slump limit to 8".

1. Reinforced Structural Concrete: For concrete which is reinforced (with more than shrinkage crack protection), or in strength class of 3000 psi and above, limit slump to range of 1" to 3".

2. Plain Concrete: For concrete which is not reinforced or reinforced only for shrinkage crack protection, and in strength class of below 3000 psi, limit slump to range of 2" to 5".

3. Backfill Concrete: Limit slump to 5".

D. Mix for Patching: Where electrical work requires patching of exposed concrete, sidewalks or curbing which has been cut to accommodate electrical work, provide concrete patching mix of work being patched (same cement, aggregates, admixtures and proportioning).

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Job Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of 1.0 cu. yd., or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after all ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

1. Prepare and submit a batch ticket for each batch discharge and used in the work.

B. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, except as otherwise indicated.

1. Delete references for allowing additional water to be added to batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to batch will not be permitted.

2. During hot weather, under conditions contributing to setting of concrete, mix each load for shorter period of time than specified in ASTM C 94. When air temperature is between 85 deg and 90 deg F., reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F., (32.2 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION



A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Do not install wood or fiberglass supports or anchorages in the spaces over hung ceilings, or plenums used for the supply, return or exhaust of environmental air.

E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

A. Where electrical equipment (i.e. switchboards, panelboards, bus ducts, transformers, disconnects, etc.) or systems (i.e. fire alarm, sound, intercommunication, alarm, etc.) are indicated to be modified to accept new work said modifications shall be performed by electrical equipment fabricators or manufacturer's representatives who can affect such modifications without voiding the U. L. label or manufacturer's warranties.

3.3 SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Provide to the Owner any special tools required for the normal routine service and maintenance of any device, fixture or equipment.

3.4 JOINT SEALERS

A. Install sealants, forming, packing, and other accessory materials according to manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated to fill openings around all electrical services penetrating floors and walls.

B. All penetrations in foundation walls and floors including slab penetrations shall be substantially sealed by utilizing a non-cracking polyurethane or similar caulk or equivalent to close off the soil gas (Radon) entry routes as required by the Uniform Construction Code, Section 5:23 10.4(b) 6. To this end all conduit in this space which penetrates these barriers shall have threaded or solvented fittings.

3.5 ACCESS DOORS

A. Where floors, walls and ceilings must be penetrated for access to electrical work as indicated, in compliance with the National Electrical Code or recognized industry practices, provide types of access doors indicated, including floor doors. Furnish sizes indicated and adequate for intended and necessary access.

1. Provide minimum 8” x 8” for hand and arm access. 2. Provide minimum 16” x 16” for head and arm access. 3. Provide minimum 24” x 24” for full body access.



B. Provide manufacturer’s complete units of the type recommended for the application in the particular substrate construction encountered complete with anchorages and hardware.

C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.


A. Provide protective guards on all fire alarm devices, clocks, loudspeakers, call initiating devices, exit lights, emergency lighting units and battery packs in cafeterias, multipurpose rooms, gymnasiums, weight rooms, locker rooms, boiler rooms, mechanical rooms, loading docks, receiving areas, pipe spaces, pipe tunnels, stages, storage rooms, shops and shafts, on the building exterior, and other spaces and areas where devices are subject to damage or accidental operation from sports, physical activities, general housekeeping, maintenance, or the movement of supplies, materials, furniture and equipment.

B. Guards are not required where the physical construction of the equipment protects against damage.

C. Install guards after finish painting is completed.

D. Do not install plastic guards over devices containing graphics or text which must be legible and readable.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Provide four-inch high concrete housekeeping pads under all floor mounted electrical equipment.

B. Anchor equipment per manufacturer's instructions. Attach with bolts.

C. Coordinate size of bases with actual unit sizes provided. Fabricate base four inches larger than equipment in both directions.

D. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad.

E. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units.

3.8 DEMOLITION

A. Existing project conditions indicated on the drawings are based on field observation and existing record documents; are intended to indicate the scope of the work affected by this project.

B. Where electrical work to remain is damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality and functionality.

C. Where new work is indicated, disconnect and remove existing like work unless otherwise indicated.



D. Where a room, space or area is to be extensively renovated, disconnect and remove all electrical work in said room, space or area unless indicated otherwise.

E. Accessible Work Indicated to be Demolished: Remove exposed electrical installation in its entirety.

F. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.

G. Removal: Remove demolished material from the Project Site.

H. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation or which must be temporarily removed for the installation of new work.

I. Verify removal of existing electrical work. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as indicated on the drawings.

J. Report discrepancies to Architect, Engineer and Construction Manager before disturbing existing installation.

K. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

L. Perform demolition concurrent with construction phasing and Owner occupancy.

M. Disconnect existing electrical systems in walls, floors and ceilings indicated for removal.

N. Coordinate electrical outages with Owner.

O. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.

P. Remove, relocate and repair existing installations to accommodate new construction.

Q. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

R. Remove exposed abandoned raceway and boxes, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes.

S. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices.

T. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.

U. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.

V. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, brackets, stems, hangers and other accessories.

W. Remove equipment indicated to remain and reinstall on new finished surfaces as required.

X. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal of existing electrical work.



Y. Maintain access to existing active mechanical and electrical installations. Do not block, obstruct or impede means of ingress, egress or thoroughfare through the existing building or new construction site.

3.9 DISCONNECTION, RELOCATION AND REMOVAL

A. Refer to Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications for locations, schedules and descriptions of equipment to be disconnected for relocation to other areas of this project or removal from the project site.

B. Electrically disconnect all electrical utilization apparatus, appliance, device, equipment, etc.

C. Remove abandoned wiring and raceway as described for demolition.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, components of electrical systems shall be relocated or removed by the electrical contractor; components of mechanical systems will be relocated or removed by the mechanical contractors; building elements will be demolished and removed by the general construction contractor; furniture and equipment will be relocated or removed by others.

3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Do not penetrate stairway enclosures except as required for equipment serving the stairway. Do not penetrate walls common to adjacent stairway enclosures under any conditions.

C. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

D. Repair openings left in building elements as a result of removal of electrical work.

E. Replace tiles in accessible lay-in tile ceilings with new tiles having similar materials, patterns, finishes and fire ratings as existing.

F. Refurbish and reinstall grilles in masonry construction; in concealed suspension, gypsum board, plaster and other types of decorative ceilings; and elsewhere where it is determined to be inappropriate to attempt to restore the building elements by patching and painting. Provide harmonizing blank plates where replacement is determined to be not practicable.

3.11 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

A. Properly dispose of any and all asbestos insulated electrical wiring and materials encountered in the electrical work being removed under this project in accordance with NJUCC 5:23 - Subchapter 8 as minimum disposal procedures.

3.12 PCB DISPOSAL



A. If lighting fixture ballasts, transformers or other electrical equipment to be disposed of under this project exceeds the maximum permissible quantity or contains the sum total of the amount of polychlorinated biphynels which may be legally disposed of through normal means, they shall be disposed of in accordance with prevailing environmental regulations.


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Electricity-metering components. 6. Concrete bases. 7. Electrical demolition. 8. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 9. Touchup painting.

3.14 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. The following are minimum requirements; refer to General Requirements Specification Sections, Conditions of the Contract, and other Electrical Specification Sections for additional requirements.

B. Provide the necessary personnel to instruct the Owner and his representatives in the operation and maintenance of any and all systems, products and equipment which require routine or periodic cleaning, adjusting, inspection, testing or the replacement of worn parts.

C. Provide programming manuals and diskette copies of the software for microprocessor or computer based systems which are user upgradable in the field.

D. Demonstrate the operation and maintenance instructions at least two weeks prior to the date of Substantial Completion and Owner Occupancy, at the project site and at a date and time mutually agreeable to the principal parties concerned, but not until such time that the Operation and Maintenance manuals have been processed and distributed so they may be available for reference.

E. Unless indicated otherwise, give at least one week's notice of the proposed date to the Architect, Engineer, Construction Manager and Owner.

F. As a minimum, provide one six hour period of instruction at the project site.

G. Demonstrate startup, control, operation, adjustment, upgrading, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance and shutdown of each system, product and equipment.

H. Provide complete bound sets of typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in this contract. All instructions shall be submitted in draft for approval prior to final issue. Manufacturer’s advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable as a substitute for operating instructions.



I. Instructions shall include the maintenance schedule and replacement parts lists for the principal items of equipment provided under this contract. Include name, address, telephone and fax numbers, and contact name of service agents for each piece of equipment provided.

J. Provide any additional instructions indicated in the individual Specification Sections or on the Drawings.

3.15 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in "Finishes" Division Section "Painting."

B. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.

C. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.

D. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

E. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

3.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.17 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE WORK

A. Formwork:

1. General: Design, construct and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads including pressure of cast-in-place concrete. Construct formwork so that formed concrete will be required size and shape in required location. Construct with joints that will not leak cement paste. Form sides and bottoms of concrete work, except where clearly indicated to be cast directly in an excavation or against other construction, or on grade or prepared subgrade. Design and construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete and other work.

a. Install chamfer strips at external corners of exposed concrete work.

2. Curbing: Form curbing to match shape of existing.

B. Form Coating: Coat concrete-contact surfaces of forms to be removed. Apply form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and remove excess compound and spillage.



C. Placing Reinforcement:

1. General: Comply with requirements and recommendations of specified standards, including "Placing Reinforcing Bars" by CRSI. Place bars where indicated and support to prevent displacement during concrete placement, using appropriate reinforcement supports, properly spaced and wire tied to reinforcing bars.

a. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum recommended coverages for concrete protection. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

D. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials, which would reduce bond with concrete.

E. Placing Concrete:

1. Wet wooden forms that have been coated with compound, immediately before placing concrete, and remove excess water from forms.

2. Cold Weather Limitations: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduce strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg. F. (4 deg. C.) uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg. F. (10 deg. C.), and not more than 80 deg. F. (27 deg. C.) at point of placement. Do not use materials containing snow or ice. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen material. Do not use calcium chloride, salt or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

3. Hot Weather Limitations: When hot weather condition that could seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg. F. (32 deg. C.). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.

F. Strength-Class Applications: Comply with compressive-strength-classes shown on drawings for each unit of electrical concrete work, if not shown, comply with following general application requirements.

1. Backfill: Provide backfill class (clean concrete). 2. Plain Concrete Encasement: Provide 2400 psi class. 3. Reinforced Concrete Encasement: Provide 3000 psi class. 4. Concrete Fill: Provide 2400 psi class for filling structural steel foundation frames and for

filling similar large-volume units. 5. Concrete Grout: Provide rough grouting class for filling voids to be grouted that are too

small to be filled effectively with 2500 psi class concrete. 6. Patching General Concrete Work: Match concrete being patched

3.18 FORM REMOVAL AND STRUCTURE REPAIRS



A. Form Removal: Remove forms as soon as concrete has set and gained sufficient strength to ensure that neither removal of forms nor stress introduced by removal of support contributed by forms will result in damage to concrete.

B. Unexposed Surfaces: Repair significantly damaged and honeycombed areas, and remove major projections and fins where forms have been removed.

C. Exposed Surfaces: On formed surfaces which are to be exposed, including those to be coated or covered with a membrane or other thin-set applied finish, repair and patch form-tie holes and damaged and honeycombed areas, filling voids with grout and completely removing fins and other projections.

3.19 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK

A. Concrete Grouting: Grout openings and recesses as indicated, in and around electrical work and other work which penetrates or adjoins electrical concrete work, using rough grouting class of concrete mix. Provide formwork where required, and tamp, screed and trowel surfaces.



ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 00 .40 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 00 .40 - ELECTRICAL TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general requirements for electrical field testing and inspecting. Detailed requirements are specified in each Section containing components that require testing. General requirements include the following:

1. Qualifications of testing agencies and their personnel. 2. Suitability of test equipment. 3. Calibration of test instruments. 4. Coordination requirements for testing and inspecting. 5. Reporting requirements for testing and inspecting.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: As specified in each Section containing electrical testing requirements and in subparagraph and associated subparagraph below.

B. Test Equipment Suitability: Comply with National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Acceptance Testing Standard (ATS), Section 5.2.

C. Test Equipment Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.3.

PART 2 - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. If a group of tests are specified to be performed by an independent testing agency, prepare systems, equipment, and components for tests and inspections, and perform preliminary tests to ensure that systems, equipment, and components are ready for independent agency testing. For Contractor performed testing, perform the tests and inspections specified in the "Field Quality Control" paragraphs of each Electrical Specification Section. Include the following minimum preparations as appropriate:

1. Perform insulation-resistance tests. 2. Perform continuity tests. 3. Perform rotation test (for motors to be tested). 4. Provide a stable source of single-phase, 208/120-V electrical power for test

instrumentation at each test location. 5. Do NOT perform any type of ground-resistance, insulation-resistance, high potential or

continuity testing with Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSSs), Surge Protection


ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 00 .40 - 2 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

Devices (SPDs), Lightning Arrestors, Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs), or any other type of over-potential protection or surge protection device connected to the circuit.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, report the following:

1. Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions. 2. Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable devices involved in

tests. 3. Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements. 4. Tabulation of "as-found" and "as-left" measurement and observation results.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 26 05 00 .50 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 00 .50 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer’s written recommendations.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following:



1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with through-penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide Specified Technologies, Inc. products as specified or comparable product by one of the following in accordance with Electrical Specification Section “Special Requirements”.

1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Johns-Mansville. 3. 3M; Fire protection products Division. 4. Other “Approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

“Special Requirements”.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.



B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier walls, and fire partitions.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.

F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

G. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

H. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

I. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.



c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General: Use only through-penetration firestop system products that have been tested for specific fire-resistance-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements and fire-rating involved for each separated instance.

B. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI)

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSS Intumescent Sealant. 2. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCI Intumescent Sealant. 3. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series LC Endothermic Sealant. 4. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series AS Elastomeric Spray. 5. Hilti, Inc. 6. Or Approved Equal.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled steel collars lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific outside diameter of penetrating item, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSC Firestop Collars. 2. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCC Firestop Collars. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Or Approved Equal.

E. Firestop Putty: Intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty.

2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Or Approved Equal.

F. Firestop Putty Pads: Intumescent, non-hardening putty pads to be installed on metallic and nonmetallic electrical switch and receptacle boxes to reduce horizontal separation between boxes to less than 24”, the following products are acceptable.

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty Pads.




G. Wrap Strips: Single Component Intumescent elastomeric strips faced on both sides with a plastic film, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series RED2 Wrap Strip. 2. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STE) SpecSeal Series BLU2 Wrap Strip. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Or Approved Equal.

H. Firestop Pillows: Re-enterable, non-curing, mineral fiber core encapsulated with an intumescent coating contained in a flame retardant poly bag, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSB Firestop Pillows.

2. 3M Fire Protection Products Division. 3. Or Approved Equal.

I. Mortar: Portland cement based dry-mix product formulated for mixing with water at Project Site to form a non-shrinking, water-resistant, homogenous mortar, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSM Firestop Mortar.


J. Silicone Sealants: Moisture curing, single component, silicone elastomeric sealant for horizontal surfaces (pourable or nonsag) or vertical surface (nonsag), the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal SIL300 Silicone Firestop Sealant. 2. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal SIL300SL Self-Leveling Silicone Firestop

Sealant. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Or Approved Equal.

K. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers, that when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) Pensil 200 Silicone Foam.


L. Composite Sheet: Intumescent material sandwiched between a galvanized steel sheet and steel wire mesh protected with aluminum foil, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal CS Composite Sheet.




M. Cast-In-Place Firestop Device: Single component molded firestop device installed on forms prior to concrete placement with totally encapsulated, tamper-proof integral firestop system and smoke sealing gasket, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal CD Cast-In Firestop Device.


N. Firestop Plugs: Re-enterable, foam rubber plug impregnated with intumescent material for use in blank openings and cable sleeves, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series FP Firestop Plug.


O. Fire-Rated T Rating Collar Device: Louvered steel collar system with synthetic aluminized polymer coolant wrap installed on metallic pipes where T Ratings are required by applicable building code requirements, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal T-Collar Device.


2.4 FIRE RATED CABLE PATHWAYS

A. Specified Technologies Incorporated – STI EZ-PATH Brand device modules comprised of steel raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0 to 100 percent cable fill.

B. Fire rated pathway devices shall be the preferred product and shall be installed in all locations where frequent cable moves, add-ons and changes will occur.

C. The pathway shall be UL Classified and/or FM Systems Approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (US 1479).

D. Fire Rated in walls and floors: Up to 4 hours.

E. All cable bundles shall utilize an enclosed fire rated pathway device whenever said cables penetrate rated walls. The fire-rated pathway shall contain a built-in fire sealing system sufficient to maintain the hourly fire rating of the barrier being penetrated. The self-contained sealing system shall automatically adjust to the installed cable loading and shall permit cables to be installed, removed, or retrofitted without the need to adjust, remove, or reinstall Firestop materials.

2.5 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other



items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.



2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.



ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK 26 05 00 .60 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 00 .60- ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with electrical installations as follows:

1. Excavation for underground utilities and services, including underground raceways. 2. Asphaltic concrete paving for the replacement of excavated or installation of new asphal-

tic concrete paving. 3. Restoration of landscaping. 4. Painting of traffic/parking lines. 5. Concrete for equipment foundations, electric utility work; for miscellaneous concrete work

and patching.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The following definitions apply to excavation operations:

1. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are reached. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.

2. Subbase: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course material.

3. Subgrade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or pavement system.

4. Unauthorized excavation: consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect.


A. Concrete Work Codes and Standards: Comply with governing regulations and, where not oth-erwise indicated, comply with the following industry standards, whichever is most stringent in its application to work in each instance:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications:

a. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". b. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". c. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". d. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing

Concrete".

2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice".



B. Asphaltic Concrete Paving Codes and Standards: Comply with governing regulations and, where not otherwise indicated, comply with the latest edition of the following industry standards, whichever is most stringent in its application to work in each instance:

1. Federal Specifications (FS):

a. TT-P-115E "Paint, Traffic, Highway, White and Yellow".

2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Publica-tions:

a. MM226 "Viscosity Graded Asphaltic Cement" b. M82 "Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium-curing Type)" c. M140 "Emulsified Asphalt" d. M208 "Cationic Emulsified Asphalt"

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

a. D3301 "Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement" b. D2027 "Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)" c. D997 "Emulsified Asphalt" d. D2397 "Cationic Emulsified Asphalt"


A. Conditions affecting excavations: The following project conditions apply:

1. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by selective demolition.

2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards cre-ated by excavation operations.

3. Existing utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in excavation areas. If utilities are not indicated to be removed, support and protect services during excavation operations.

4. Remove existing underground utilities indicated to be removed.

a. Uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities: Contact utility owner immediately for in-structions.

5. Use of explosives is not permitted.

1.5 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of electrical service with the Owner and the utility company.

B. Notify the Architect at least 5 days prior to commencing demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Topsoil that has been stripped and stockpiled on site shall be used, provided it is a natural, fertile, friable soil, representative of local productive soil, 90 percent free of clay lumps, subsoil or other foreign matter larger than two inches diameter, not frozen or muddy. Acidity range pH 5-7, not less than 3% humus as determined by loss on ignition of moisture free sam-ples dried at 100 degrees Centigrade. Owner reserves the right to reject topsoil in which more than 50% of material passing U.S.S. No. 100 sieve consists of clay as determined by Buoy-oucous Hydrometer by dried weights of materials. If quantity of acceptable stockpiled topsoil is not sufficient to provide a 4" to 6" thick compacted layer of topsoil on areas indicated to be seeded, sodded and landscaped, Contractor shall provide required additional "off site" topsoil. Prior to scraping of topsoil inform the Engineer of source of "off site" topsoil.

B. Subbase material: naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand.

C. Drainage fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed grav-el, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

D. Backfill and fill materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; debris; waste; frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter.

E. Limestone: Shall be dolomitic limestone with minimum 85% carbonates. Bags shall show weights and analysis.

F. Commercial fertilizer: Shall be a complete plant food containing 10% nitrogen (50% organic), 6% phosphoric acid (from super-phosphate, bone meal or tankage), and 4% potash (sulphate or potash) unless soil test indicates need for different composition.

G. Commercial fertilizer must conform to applicable state fertilizer laws, be uniform in composition, dry, free flowing, and delivered in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaran-teed analysis.

H. Mulch: Silver Fiber wood fiber mulch as manufactured by Weyerhauser or approved equivalent.

I. Sod: Shall be cultivated type, weed, free, 1 inch in thickness not less than 18 months in age, and contain following mixture.

Kentucky Bluegrass 70% Pennlawn Fescue 30%

2.2 CONCRETE FORMWORK

A. Forms for Concrete: Smooth lumber, plywood or other easy release material; reinforced to pre-vent excessive deflection or possibility of failure during placement of concrete; sufficiently heavy for construction to prevent leakage which would be harmful to structural quality of concrete.

B. Exposed Corner Chamfer Strips: Provide wood, metal, plastic or rubber chamfer strips in form at exposed external corners of concrete.



C. Form coating compound: Commercially formulated compound, which will prevent bond of con-crete forms. Provide compound recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, and which will not stain concrete or interfere with moisture curing of concrete or subsequent painting of exposed surfaces.

2.3 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: Except as otherwise indicated, provide ASTM A 615, deformed, Grade 40 for size numbers 3 through 18; ASTM A 675, plain, Grade 50, for size number 2; sizes as shown.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn.


A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type 1, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Local Aggregate not complying with ASTM C 33 but which have shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used.

D. Water: Clean and free of substances harmful to concrete.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260

F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A (normal range) and Type F (high-range), (superplasticizer).

G. Set-Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:

1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water-reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water-reducing and Accelerating. 5. Type F, High range, water-reducing (superplasticizer). 6. Type G, High range water-reducing and Retarding (superplasticizer).

H. Calcium Chloride: Use not permitted.

2.5 DESIGN AND PROPORTIONING OF MIXES

A. General: Design electrical work concrete as follows, for each 28-day compressive strength class:

B. Admixtures: Except as otherwise indicated, use is at Contractor's option. Comply in each in-stance with admixture manufacturer's recommendations and suggested limitation for required quality of concrete. Use water-reducing admixture (normal or high range) in all concrete. Com-ply with the following limitations for the resulting air entrainment.

1. Concrete Above Grade: Not less than 2% nor more then 4%. 2. Concrete Below Grade: Not less than 2% nor more then 4%, except up to 6% where



maximum aggregate size must be 3/4" or less. 3. Backfill Concrete: Not ore than 7%.

C. Slump Limitations: Limit water content in design mixes to produce the following slumps at point of placement (but do not exceed specified water/cement ratios). Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture may have slump limit to 8".

1. Reinforced Structural Concrete: For concrete which is reinforced (with more than shrink-age crack protection), or in strength class of 3000 psi and above, limit slump to range of 1" to 3".

2. Plain Concrete: For concrete which is not reinforced or reinforced only for shrinkage crack protection, and in strength class of below 3000 psi, limit slump to range of 2" to 5".

3. Backfill Concrete: Limit slump to 5".

D. Mix for Patching: Where electrical work requires patching of exposed concrete, sidewalks or curbing which has been cut to accommodate electrical work, provide concrete patching mix of work being patched (same cement, aggregates, admixtures and proportioning).

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Job Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of 1.0 cu. yd., or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after all ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

1. Prepare and submit a batch ticket for each batch discharge and used in the work.

B. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, except as otherwise indicated.

1. Delete references for allowing additional water to be added to batch for material with in-sufficient slump. Addition of water to batch will not be permitted.

2. During hot weather, under conditions contributing to setting of concrete, mix each load for shorter period of time than specified in ASTM C 94. When air temperature is between 85 deg and 90 deg F., reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F., (32.2 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.7 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING MATERIALS

A. Base coarse aggregate shall be sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag, sand, stone or slag screenings.

B. Surface coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slag, and sharp-edged natural sand.

C. Asphalt cement shall comply with AASHTO M226 and ASTM D3301; viscosity grade AC-20, AR-80, or AC-10, AR-40.

D. Prime coat shall be cut-back asphalt conforming to AASHTO M82 and ASTM D2027, MC-70 or MC-250.



E. Tack coat shall be emulsified asphalt conforming to AASHTO M140 and ASTM D997 or AASHTO M208 and ASTM D2397, SS-1, diluted with one part water to one part emulsified as-phalt.

F. Herbicide treatment shall be a commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the Envi-ronmental Protection Agency (EPA). Provide granular, liquid or wettable powder form.

G. Pavement marking paint shall be chlorinated rubber-alkyd type, FS TT-P-115, Type III.

H. Provide an asphalt-aggregate mixture as recommended by local paving authorities to suit pro-ject conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as re-quired for stability of excavation.

B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to re-main, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.

C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excava-tions and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excava-tion limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench exca-vations as temporary drainage ditches.

E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees indicated to remain.

2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

F. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:

1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of raceways and equipment.

2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. 3. Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system from



damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.

4. Excavate by hand to locate existing utilities. 5. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the trench

backfilled within the same day. 6. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a

layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and elec-trical installations.

G. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each ar-ea classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.

1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials.

2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing

surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. 4. For raceways less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick con-

crete base slab support. After installation of raceways, provide a 4-inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase.

5. Other areas use excavated or borrowed materials.

H. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded. 2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 4. Removal of trash and debris.

I. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers.

J. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on sur-faces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

K. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift.

L. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.

1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the follow-ing percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well defined moisture densi-ty relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well defined moisture density relationship (cohesionless soils).

a. Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12



inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless mate-rial.

b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.

c. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils.

2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations.

M. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during the period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE WORK

A. Formwork:

1. General: Design, construct and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads including pressure of cast-in-place concrete. Construct formwork so that formed concrete will be required size and shape in required location. Construct with joints that will not leak cement paste. Form sides and bottoms of concrete work, except where clearly indi-cated to be cast directly in an excavation or against other construction, or on grade or prepared subgrade. Design and construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete and other work.

a. Install chamfer strips at external corners of exposed concrete work.

2. Curbing: Form curbing to match shape of existing.

B. Form Coating: Coat concrete-contact surfaces of forms to be removed. Apply form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and remove excess compound and spillage.

C. Placing Reinforcement:

1. General: Comply with requirements and recommendations of specified standards, in-cluding "Placing Reinforcing Bars" by CRSI. Place bars where indicated and support to prevent displacement during concrete placement, using appropriate reinforcement sup-ports, properly spaced and wire tied to reinforcing bars.

a. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum recommended coverages for con-crete protection. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward ex-posed concrete surfaces.

D. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials, which would reduce bond with concrete.



E. Placing Concrete:

1. Wet wooden forms that have been coated with compound, immediately before placing concrete, and remove excess water from forms.

2. Cold Weather Limitations: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduce strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compli-ance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. When air temperature has fallen to or is ex-pected to fall below 40 deg. F. (4 deg. C.) uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg. F. (10 deg. C.), and not more than 80 deg. F. (27 deg. C.) at point of placement. Do not use materials containing snow or ice. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade con-taining frozen material. Do not use calcium chloride, salt or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

3. Hot Weather Limitations: When hot weather condition that could seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein speci-fied. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of place-ment below 90 deg. F. (32 deg. C.). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before em-bedment in concrete.

F. Strength-Class Applications: Comply with compressive-strength-classes shown on drawings for each unit of electrical concrete work, if not shown, comply with following general application re-quirements.

1. Backfill: Provide backfill class (clean concrete). 2. Plain Concrete Encasement: Provide 2400 psi class. 3. Reinforced Concrete Encasement: Provide 3000 psi class. 4. Concrete Fill: Provide 2400 psi class for filling structural steel foundation frames and for

filling similar large-volume units. 5. Concrete Grout: Provide rough grouting class for filling voids to be grouted that are too

small to be filled effectively with 2500 psi class concrete. 6. Patching General Concrete Work: Match concrete being patched

3.3 FORM REMOVAL AND STRUCTURE REPAIRS

A. Form Removal: Remove forms as soon as concrete has set and gained sufficient strength to ensure that neither removal of forms nor stress introduced by removal of support contributed by forms will result in damage to concrete.

B. Unexposed Surfaces: Repair significantly damaged and honeycombed areas, and remove ma-jor projections and fins where forms have been removed.

C. Exposed Surfaces: On formed surfaces which are to be exposed, including those to be coated or covered with a membrane or other thin-set applied finish, repair and patch form-tie holes and damaged and honeycombed areas, filling voids with grout and completely removing fins and other projections.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK



A. Concrete Grouting: Grout openings and recesses as indicated, in and around electrical work and other work which penetrates or adjoins electrical concrete work, using rough grouting class of concrete mix. Provide formwork where required, and tamp, screed and trowel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

A. Prepare subgrade surface by removing loose material from compacted subbase surface imme-diately before applying herbicide treatment or prime coat. Proof roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until deficient subbase areas have been corrected and areas ready to receive paving.

B. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. Apply chemical weed control agent in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommended dosages and application instructions. Ap-ply to compacted and dry subbase prior to application of prime coat.

C. Apply prime coat at rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gallon per square yard over compacted subgrade. Ap-ply material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile.

D. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland cement con-crete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete pavement. Distribute at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gallon per square yard of surface. Allow to dry to proper condition to receive pav-ing.

E. Place asphaltic concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread and strike-off. Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 225 degrees F. (107 degrees C.). Place inaccessible and small areas by hand. Place each coarse to required grade, cross-section and compacted thickness. Pave-ment thickness to be at least that of existing pavement, but in no case less than 1-1/2".

F. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50 de-grees F. (10 degrees C.), when the temperature has been below 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) for 12 hours immediately prior to an application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains ex-cess moisture. Construct asphaltic concrete surface coarse when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees F. (40 degrees C.) and when base is dry. Base coarse may be placed when air temperature is above 30 degrees F. (-1 degree C.) and rising.

G. Compact by rolling, hot hand tamping or compacting with vibrating plate. Begin compacting when mixture will bear weight without excessive displacement. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edges. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material. Perform a second pass following the breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Con-tinue second pass until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of compaction marks. Continue until marks are elimi-nated and coarse has attained maximum density.

H. After compaction is complete, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

I. Sweep and clean all surfaces that will receive pavement markings to eliminate loose material and dust.

J. Repaint parking stall lines on new asphaltic paving. Use chlorinated-rubber base traffic lane-marking paint, factory mixed, quick-drying and hot bleeding. Color is to be white. Apply paint



with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply in two coats at manufac-turer's recommended rates.

3.6 LANDSCAPING

A. All grassed areas excavated for handholes, conduit and cable under this contract shall be sod-ded. This includes any grassed areas damaged by the Contractor's work forces or equipment.

B. Spread topsoil on areas to be sodded to a depth of four inches.

C. Add ground limestone at rate of fifty pounds per 1,000 square feet, unless soil tests indicate otherwise. Distribute evenly by machine over whole area and work thoroughly into top four inches of soil.

D. As a separate operation from limestone, apply commercial fertilizer at rate of forty pounds per 1,000 square feet. Incorporate thoroughly into the top four inches of soil.

E. Rake whole area to a smooth even draining surface with uniformly fine texture, and compact fill areas with an approved roller to the Engineer's satisfaction.

F. If surface of soil is dry when sod is to be placed, soil shall be wet down with a fine spray.

G. Lay sod parallel with slope and stagger joints. Peg to bank and furring strips or other means us-ing at least one peg per square yard on slopes of three to one (3:1) or steeper. Fill joints with dressing of fine topsoil. Tamp lightly to insure good contact with soil but do not roll. Soak thor-oughly.

H. A one-foot wide strip of sod shall be laid along areas adjacent to new walks, drives, building walls, or other paving, and at drainage swales.

I. Apply mulch at rate of 1500 lbs. per acre by hydra-machine method.

J. Remove and store any trees and shrubbery, which will interfere with and/or may be damaged by the work of this project including incidental damaged caused by the Contractor's personnel. Replace or compensate the Owner for the loss of any trees and shrubbery resulting from failure or inability to remove it.



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND 26 05 19 - 1 CABLES February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.



B. Comply with the latest National Electrical code (NFPA 70) as adopted by the State of NJ.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing wire with a minimum of ten years documented experience.

D. Supplier Qualification: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum five years documented experience.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Southwire Company. 5. Pirelli. 6. Superior Essex. 7. The Okonite Company 8. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

"Special Requirements". 9. Or Approved Equal.

B. Copper Conductors: Class B, Concentric-lay, stranded conductors. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN, UF and USE.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI Type SO and Type USE all with insulated ground wire.

E. Metal Clad Cable Type MC: Galvanized steel armor with interlocked metal tape, color coded 90-deg. C THHN-THWN insulated copper conductors with full size green insulated grounding conductor.

F. Ground wire: Provide a separate green isolated ground wire in each feeder and branch circuit and other conduits containing current carrying conductors.

G. Dedicated neutral: Each single-phase branch circuit shall consist of respective phase conductor and a dedicated neutral conductor unless specifically indicated otherwise on the plans.

H. Identification: Identify each conductor with its circuit number and /or other designations.

2.2 FIRE PUMP FEEDER CABLES

A. Manufacturer:

1. Pyrotenax USA Inc., Electrical Cable Systems Group. 2. Raychem Corp.

B. Description:

1. Mineral Insulated Cable Type MI: Pyrotenax System 1850 Type MI, 2-Hour Fire Resistive Cable consisting of one or more copper conductors factory assembled in a highly compacted magnesium oxide insulation and enclosed in a seamless, liquid and gas tight copper continuous sheath.



2. Polymer Insulated Type RHW Cable in Conduit: Raychem RHW, 2-Hour Fire Rated "Electrical Circuit Protective System" consisting of copper conductors with silicon rubber insulation, cross-linked polyolefin jacket, installed in steel conduit with threaded fittings.

3. Polymer Insulated Type MC Cable: Raychem MC, 2-Hour Fire Rated "Electrical Circuit Protective System" consisting of copper conductors with silicon rubber insulation, silicone rubber inner jacket, and a continuously welded corrugated copper armor.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. 6. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

"Special requirements".

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.4 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Electrical Specification Section "Penetration Firestopping".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Concealed Dry Locations: Install building wire in raceway or use metal clad cable. Use of metal clad cable is limited to 30 amps, single-phase circuits as permitted by NFPA 70.



3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Minimum size: General, #12 AWG; over 100 feet at 120 volts and 200 feet at 277 volts, #10 AWG; over 150 feet at 120 volts and 300 feet at 277 volts, #8 AWG. Control wiring, #14 AWG; over 200 feet at 120 volts and 400 feet at 208 volts, #12 AWG. For longer runs increase wire size so as not to exceed 2% voltage drop in feeders and 3% voltage drop in branch circuits. Where conductor size is not indicated, its current carrying capacity shall be equal to or greater than the rating of its overcurrent protective device or it shall be the minimum conductor size, whichever is larger.

B. Where no dimensions are assigned to a wire size it shall be understood to be the wire gauge or circular mil size indicated in the NEC tables. The abbreviations MCM, KCM, kcmil and the like are used interchangeably throughout these documents and refer to thousands of circular mils cross-sectional area of the conductor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where conductor size is not indicated, its current carrying capacity shall be equal to or greater than the rating of its overcurrent protective device.

D. Where conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop or other reasons the equipment grounding conductor shall be increased in size proportionately.

E. Where conductors sizes are increased for voltage drop they may be reduced in size within ten feet of the termination in order to fit under the lugs available on the overcurrent protective device but not less than the ampacity of the frame size of the overcurrent protective device.

F. Service Entrance Conductors; Underground in raceway: Type THHN-THWN, 90 Degree C., single copper conductors in raceway.

G. Feeders; Underground in raceway: Type THHN-THWN, 90 Degree C., single copper conductors in raceway.

H. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground Beneath Buildings or Structures: Type THHN-THWN, 90 Degree C., single copper conductors in raceway.

I. Feeders; Interior in raceway: Type THHN-THWN, 90 Degree C., copper conductor.

J. Fire Pump Feeder: Type MI, 3-conductor or three 1-conductor, copper conductor, 2-hour fire-rated.

K. Elevator Feeder: Type THHN-THWN copper conductor in raceway.

L. Branch Circuits; Underground: Type THHN-THWN, 90 Degree C., single copper conductors in raceway.

M. Branch Circuits; Underground, Beyond Building or Structure, Direct Burial: Type UF, 75 Degree C., multi-conductor, copper conductor with ground.

N. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, Below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground Beneath Buildings or Structures: Type THHN-THWN, 90 Degree C., single copper conductors in raceway.

O. Branch Circuits; Interior: Type THHN, 90 Degree C., copper conductor in raceway.



P. Branch Circuit Homeruns: Type THHN, copper conductor, in raceway from panelboards to first outlet box. Homerun, individual and multiple circuit cables are not to be run from panelboards. After the first outlet box, approved cable may be used.

Q. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

R. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway or Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Service entrance conductors in raceway shall enter directly into the service disconnecting means through the wall or floor at the exterior wall of the building or structure.

B. Where service entrance conductors must be run through or under any portion of the building or structure to reach the service disconnecting means the raceway shall be covered by or encased in not less than 2-inches of concrete supported from the building or structure in an approved manner.

C. Install direct burial cables on a 2-inch minimum depth fine sand bed with a 4-inch minimum layer of same material covering the conductors. Install in raceway under pavement and planter areas and within three feet of structures. Provide line marker tape.

D. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install cables concealed in ceiling spaces, in gypsum board partitions and in hollow spaces of interior masonry walls in dry locations.

F. Where cables are installed above new or existing accessible tile ceilings they shall be supported by acoustical tile support clips so the cables do not rest on the ceiling tiles.

G. Where cables are not fished in existing spaces they shall be securely fastened to the building structure at intervals prescribed by the NEC and not pulled through rings or wiring harnesses.

H. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

I. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

J. Pull no more than one 3-phase circuit or three consecutive 1-phase circuits in same raceway unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

L. Support cables according to Electrical Specification Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

M. Bundle incoming and outgoing feeder conductors together in switchboards and wrap with wire ties 6-inches on center up to within 6-inches of their termination. Ties shall be of sufficient strength to withstand device short circuit rating.



N. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Electrical Specification Section "Penetration Firestopping."

O. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

P. Ground wire: Provide a separate green isolated ground wire in each feeder and branch circuit and other conduits containing current carrying conductors.

Q. Dedicated neutral: Each single-phase branch circuit shall consist of respective phase conductor and a dedicated neutral conductor unless specifically indicated otherwise on the plans.

R. Identification: Identify each conductor with its circuit number and /or other designations.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Branch circuit and feeder taps shall be full circuit size up to their overcurrent protection device unless otherwise indicated.

B. Taps and splices for branch circuits and feeders larger than #10 AWG shall be made with Burndy “Insul-Tap” Type BIPC, or approved equal, insulation piercing connectors or Burndy “Hylug”, or approved equal, compression splices.

C. Taps and splices for branch circuits and feeders #10 AWG and smaller shall be made with Ideal Models 410, 411 and 412 crimp connectors, or approved equal, with Models 415 or 417 insulated caps.

D. Connections to fixture and motor leads #10 AWG and smaller shall be made with 3M "Scotchlok" pre-insulated spring pressure connectors Types Y, R or G or approved equal.

E. Stranded wiring conductors shall be made up to screw terminals of terminal blocks with 3M, T&B or Panduit locking fork crimp terminals with nylon insulated grips.

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

G. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

H. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Thermal and Moisture Protection Section "Penetration Firestopping" and Electrical Specification Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.



D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Thermal and Moisture Protection Section "Joint Sealants" and Electrical Specification Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Thermal and Moisture Protection "Penetration Firestopping" and Electrical Specification Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Electrical Specification Section "Penetration Firestopping".


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: Include the following inspections and related work.

a. Verify cables and conductors comply with contract documents. b. Verify cables and conductors are braced for short circuit stresses where specified. c. Verify cables and conductors are correctly identified at each termination, splice

and tap where applicable. d. Verify correct phase rotation is maintained throughout project. e. Verify color coding and identification comply with specifications and the National

Electrical Code. f. Inspect all exposed sections of cables and conductors for physical damage and

correct connection. g. Inspect all bolted and compression connections.

3. Electrical Tests: Include the following items.

a. Insulation resistance tests of all conductors, cables and connections.

4. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Test all wiring for continuity and insulation resistance in accordance with NETA standards.

5. Verify phase identification is A, B, C, left to right, front to back and top to bottom. If corrections are required change feeder and branch circuit identification at each end of circuit so that correct phase identification is maintained throughout the project. If incorrect identification is noted on existing systems notify the Architect/Engineer for action to be taken.

6. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment plus the following special applications:

1. Overhead-lines grounding. 2. Underground distribution grounding. 3. Common ground bonding with lightning protection system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features.

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:

1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir

or cypress or cedar.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Intersystem Bonding Termination Device: A bonding bar or listed device for connecting data, alarm, communication and lightning protection systems.

E. Provide cast bronze cable splices and clamps.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long (19 mm diameter by 3 m long)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.



B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system intersystem bonding termination device to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.



G. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Intersystem Bonding Termination Device: Locate in the service equipment or near a grounding electrode conductor. Connect to the grounding electrode conductor with a #6 AWG copper conductor or directly via a listed split or snap-in connector. The grounding electrode conductor shall not be broken.

D. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

E. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Electrical Specifications Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

F. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

G. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service



entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

4. Gas appliances electrically connected by cord and plug shall have separate bonding conductors connected to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductors at the outlets serving the appliances. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

H. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.

I. Grounding for Cable Sleeves and Stubs:

1. Each metallic sleeve for cables passing through a non-fire-rated wall or slab between metallic cable trays or from metallic cable trays to grounded or bonded equipment shall contain an equipment grounding conductor to connect the cable tray equipment grounding conductors and the equipment to provide effective continuity of the ground path and shall be bonded to the cable trays and equipment at each end of the sleeve.

2. Each metallic sleeve for cables passing through a fire-rated wall or slab between metallic cable trays or from metallic cable trays to grounded or bonded equipment shall contain an equipment grounding conductor to connect the cable tray equipment grounding conductors and the equipment to provide effective continuity of the ground path and shall be bonded to the cable trays and equipment at each end of the sleeve. The bonding shall not interfere with the design function of the fire stopping.

3. Conduit stubs used for cables from wall outlets up to the ceiling space for transition to metallic cable tray system and are terminate 30-inches or less from the cable tray or other grounded or bonded object shall be bonded to the that cable tray or object.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural



drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohms. 5. Building structure Grounding electrode system and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Concrete equipment bases.


1. Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.



B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Concrete


a. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. b. Other Action Submittal:

1) Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

2. Informational submittals

a. Qualification Data: For [Installer] [manufacturer] [testing agency]. b. Welding certificates. c. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1) Cementitious materials. 2) Admixtures. 3) Form materials and form-release agents. 4) Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5) Fiber reinforcement. 6) Waterstops. 7) Curing compounds. 8) Floor and slab treatments. 9) Bonding agents. 10) Adhesives. 11) Vapor retarders. 12) Semirigid joint filler. 13) Joint-filler strips. 14) Repair materials.

d. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1) Aggregates.

e. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

f. Field quality-control reports. g. Minutes of preinstallation conference.




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in "Concrete" Division Specification Sections.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in "Thermal and Moisture Protection" Division Specification Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.


a. Allied Tube & Conduit.



b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification

Section "Special Requirements".

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification

Section "Special Requirements".

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.



4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in "Metals" Division Specification Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

2.3 SUPPORT SYSTEMS NOT PERMITTED

A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, or in accordance with the National Electrical Code and with the written permission of the Engineer, the following means of securing or supporting shall not be used.

1. Cables and raceways shall not be secured to or supported by ceiling grids. 2. Cables and raceways shall not be secured to or supported by ceiling support assemblies,

including ceiling support wires and rods. 3. Cables and raceways shall not be used as a means to support other cables and

raceways. 4. Cables, raceways and electrical equipment shall not be secured to or supported by

piping, ductwork or equipment of other trades.

2.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. General: Design electrical work concrete for 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength class:

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Local Aggregate not complying with ASTM C 33 but which have shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used.

E. Water: Clean and free of substances harmful to concrete.

F. Mix for Patching: Where electrical work requires patching of exposed concrete, sidewalks or curbing which has been cut to accommodate electrical work, provide concrete patching mix of work being patched (same cement, aggregates, admixtures and proportioning).

G. Job Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of 1.0 cu. yd., or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after all ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

H. Forms for Concrete: Smooth lumber, plywood or other easy release material; reinforced to prevent excessive deflection or possibility of failure during placement of concrete; sufficiently



heavy for construction to prevent leakage which would be harmful to structural quality of concrete.

I. Exposed Corner Chamfer Strips: Provide wood, metal, plastic or rubber chamfer strips in forms at exposed external corners of concrete.

J. Form Coating Compound: Commercially formulated compound, which will prevent bond of concrete to forms. Provide compound recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, and which will not stain concrete or subsequent painting of exposed surfaces.

K. Reinforcing Bars: Except as otherwise indicated, provide ASTM A 615, deformed, Grade 40 for size numbers 3 through 18; ASTM A 675, plain, Grade 50, for size number 2; sizes as shown.

L. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

E. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.

F. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

G. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

H. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.



3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Electrical Specification Section “Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints”.

C. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

D. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

E. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

F. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

G. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

H. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

I. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

J. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.

K. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

L. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.



M. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

N. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

O. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.

P. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.

Q. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

R. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

S. Provide bushings on each end of sleeves used for cables. Use insulated bushings on sleeves 1-1/4-inch and larger.

T. Do not support lighting fixtures, equipment, etc. from metal decks; provide channel iron spanning and fastened to two adjacent joists, beams, purlins, columns or girts to support anything heavier than branch circuit conduit and wiring.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in "Metals" Division Specification Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in "Concrete" Division Specification Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete, Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)" and Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Related Work".



C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in "Finishes" Division Specification Sections "Painting" and "High Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 05 33 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. c. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:



1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Source quality-control test reports.



B. Comply with the latest editions of ANSI C80.1, ANCI C80.3, NECA 1, NECA 101, NCEA TC 2, NEMA TC3 and NFPA 70 as applicable.

C. Products to be listed and classified by underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown on construction documents.

D. Protection: Conduits to be protected from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade and providing appropriate covering. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Electri-Flex Co. 4. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 5. Wheatland Tube Company. 6. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.



1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Steel or malleable iron compression type up to 1-1/4 inch EMT, and set screw type; 1-1/2 inch and larger EMT.

2. Cast compression fitting are not acceptable. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch (1 mm),

with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

H. Bushings: Insulated, hot-dip galvanized for rigid steel conduit; malleable iron or zinc plated steel for EMT.

I. Grounding / Bonding Bushings: Insulated, hot-dip galvanized for rigid steel conduit; malleable iron or zinc plated steel for EMT. Molded-on, non-separable, high impact thermosetting insulation. Tinned copper lay-in lug.

J. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 2. CANTEX Inc. 3. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 4. Condux International, Inc. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 9. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

"Special Requirements”.

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-80 PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.



2.3 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS


1. Arnco Corporation. 2. Endot Industries Inc. 3. IPEX Inc. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 5. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for plenum installation.

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 4. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 12 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard ivory enamel finish, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. d. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section




2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Floor Boxes: Cast metal or concrete-tight stamped steel, fully adjustable, rectangular in slabs on grade; stamped metal above grade.

F. Floor boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, for use with nonmetallic raceways in slabs; round for single device outlets; rectangular for multiple device outlets.

G. Floor Box Covers and Flanges: Brass or cast aluminum, polished satin finish.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

1. Receptacle Boxes: Minimum 2-gang box with 1-gang plate. 2. Switch Boxes: Minimum 1-gang box with 1-gang plate. 3. Telephone and Data Outlet Boxes: Minimum 2-gang box with 2-gang plate.

I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.



3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with ANSI/SCTE 77-2007.

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. Cover design load shall not exceed the design load of the box.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering. "ELECTRIC", "TELEPHONE", or as required to

adequately identify the type of service. 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger

shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. Quazite. e. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass.


a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


2.8 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.



B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Electrical Specification Section "Penetration Firestopping".

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.

a. Unless otherwise indicated, use rigid steel conduit with threaded steel fittings for all medium voltage applications.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, EMT with rain tight steel fittings.

a. Unless otherwise indicated, use rigid steel conduit with threaded steel fittings for all medium voltage applications.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 or 80-PVC, direct buried.

a. Unless otherwise indicated, use RNC, Type EPC-40 with concrete encasement for medium voltage cables.

b. Use concrete encasement for raceways passing under roadways, parking areas, and other areas subject to heavy vehicular traffic.

4. Unless otherwise noted, Rigid Steel Conduit shall be used where conduit is encased in the buildings poured concrete construction or exposed to weather or wet and damp locations.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer



concrete, Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N) vertical loading.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Interior Installation: Unless otherwise noted, all conduits located concealed in ceiling and

walls or run exposed shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing for branch circuit wiring.

2. Raceways for Medium Voltage Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, use rigid steel conduit with threaded steel fittings for all indoor medium voltage cable applications.

3. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 4. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 5. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes

raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms.

6. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 7. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

8. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 9. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: Plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway or EMT. 10. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-

type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway or EMT. 11. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or

Communications Cable: Plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway or EMT.

12. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that

material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. Use raintight steel compression fittings outdoors and indoor wet locations.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.



E. Hazardous Locations: Use rigid steel conduit and threaded fittings of NEMA type listed and labeled for the location and class of hazard indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. All rigid steel conduit installation shall also comply with NECA 101.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints ".

C. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from other piping systems and at least 12 inches (300 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Route raceways through roof using roof jacks with semi-rigid base flanges and rubber caps dedicated for electrical work. Do not use mechanical contractors' roof jacks without specific instructions.

E. Run raceway on roof on dedicated supports, eight inches high minimum.

F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

G. Support raceways as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

H. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

I. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

J. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

L. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install concealed raceways in the shortest practical distance with a minimum of bends, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

M. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover.

2. Do not install raceways in slabs less than 6-inches thick without written permission of the Architect and/or Structural Engineer.

3. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.

4. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.



5. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

6. Transition from nonmetallic conduit to rigid steel conduit or electrical metallic tubing before rising above grade or slab. Bond equipment grounding conductor to metal raceway.

7. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

N. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows

can be installed in parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. 3. Install all major wall mounted horizontal raceways at the ceiling line in all rooms and

spaces having ceilings or unobstructed exposed slabs 12 ft. or less above the floor. Make offsets required for the neat and workmanlike installation of the raceway. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.

4. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

O. Joints in nonmetallic raceway and fittings shall be made watertight by using joint sealing compound applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

P. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

Q. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

R. Raceways terminated with Locknuts and Bushings: Align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. Use insulated bushings on raceway 1-1/4 inch and larger.

S. Raceways Terminated with Threaded Hubs: Screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against with protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so couplingis square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

T. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

U. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch (19-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet (15 m).

2. 1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet (23 m).

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.



V. Install electrical nonmetallic tubing and electrical flexible tubing inside conduits where indicated for telecommunications, video or data cables.

W. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces or pass from the interior to exterior of a building.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

X. Install expansion or expansion / deflection joints where raceway crosses building expansion, control, or seismic joints.

Y. Install expansion joints to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.

Z. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

AA. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

BB. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.



EE. Use suitable boxes and flanges for wood, carpet, and tile floor. Allow for movement of wood floors.

FF. Provide flush tile flanges in gym floors.

GG. Provide flush tile flanges in rooms and spaces to receive floor tile. Refer to finish schedule.

HH. Provide carpet flanges to cover the cut carpet edges in rooms and spaces to receive carpeting. Refer to finish schedule.

II. Select floor boxes and flanges for use in wood floors to cover filler material and provide adequate support for devices and plates.

JJ. Install hinged cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

KK. Do not install nonmetallic conduit, boxes, or fittings in plenums or in spaces used for the supply, return, or exhaust of environmental air.

LL. Telecommunications: Where indicated, provide orange electrical flexible tubing (EFT) and / or yellow electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) in telephone and communications raceways. Tubing shall be installed in continuous lengths within the conduits between access points, no connectors, couplings, adapters, or splices of any kind will be permitted within the raceway. Provide sufficient slack tubing in manholes and handholes to allow the ends of the tubing top be trained around the inside and connected together. Provide 3 ft. of slack tubing at the pole top and in the building.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Related Work", Site Construction Specification Sections "Earthwork" and "Excavation Support and Protection" and Earthwork Specification Sections "Earth Moving" and "Excavation Support and Protection" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Related Work", Site Construction Specification Sections "Earthwork" and "Excavation Support and Protection" and Earthwork Specification Sections "Earth Moving" and "Excavation Support and Protection".

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Related Work", Site Construction Specification Sections "Earthwork" and "Excavation Support and Protection" and Earthwork Specification Sections "Earth Moving" and "Excavation Support and Protection".

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.



a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of the ducts. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12 inch (300 mm) increment of the ducts over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Electrical Specification Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" and Thermal and Moisture Protection Specification Sections "Penetration Firestopping", "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems", and "Joint Sealants".

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:



1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Electrical Specification Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Electrical Specification Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Electrical Specification Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.



UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 26 05 43 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried and concrete-encased duct banks and in single duct runs.

2. Handholes and boxes. 3. Manholes.

1.2 DEFINITION

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

B. Duct: The general term for electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, specified for use underground, embedded in earth or concrete.

C. Duct Bank: A group of two or more ducts in a continuous run between two points.

D. Handhole: A below-the-surface enclosure in connection with ducts into which people reach, but do not enter, for the purpose of installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or wiring.

E. Manhole: A below-the-surface enclosure or chamber, large enough for a person to enter, connecting with other ducts, and affording facilities for installing, operating, and maintaining equipment or wiring.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data – for the following:

1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and

solvent cement. 3. Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes and other utility structures. 4. Warning tape. 5. Warning planks.

B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4. Ladder details. 5. Grounding details.



6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 7. Joint details.

C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. 4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.

1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings.

2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Comply with ANSI C2.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming.

B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.

C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.




A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager and Engineer no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Architect.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC and Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES


1. Cantex, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Other “approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Sections




B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with match fittings by the same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

C. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by the same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

D. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPS Methods 24).

E. Accessories:

1. Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches (300 by 600 by 76 mm) in size, manufactured from 6000-psi (41-MPa) concrete.

a. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching. b. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, 3/8-inch- (10-mm-)

deep letters.

2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES


1. Carder Concrete Products. 2. Christy Concrete Products. 3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 4. Oldcastle Precast Group. 5. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile, Inc. 9. Other “approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof cast-iron frame, with cast-iron cover with recessed cover hook eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

2. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 3. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.", "TELEPHONE." or as required to identify

type of service. 4. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless

otherwise indicated.



5. Extensions and Slabs: Designed to mate with bottom of enclosure. Same material as enclosure.

a. Extension shall provide increased depth of 6 inches (150 mm). b. Slab: Same dimensions as bottom of enclosure, and arranged to provide closure.

6. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

7. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near

interior corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color: Gray 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.", "TELEPHONE." or as required to identify

type of service. 6. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or

end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

7. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.




a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. Quazite; a Division of Hubbell. e. Other “Approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass.


a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d. Other “Approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


D. High-Density Plastic Boxes: Injection molded of high-density polyethylene or copolymer-polypropylene. Cover shall be plastic.


a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. c. PenCell Plastics. d. Other “approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


2.5 PRECAST MANHOLES


1. Carder Concrete Products. 2. Christy Concrete Products. 3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 4. Oldcastle Precast Group. 5. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile, Inc. 9. Other “Approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Comply with ASTM C 858[, with structural design loading as specified in Part 3 "Underground Enclosure Application" Article] and with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features.



1. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

2. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near

interior corners of manholes to facilitate racking of cable.

C. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm) thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

D. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

2.6 CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLES

A. Description: Underground utility structures, constructed in place, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

B. Materials: Comply with ASTM C 858 and with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Structural Design Loading: As specified in Part 3 "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

2.7 UTILITY STRUCTURE ACCESSORIES


1. Bilco Company (The). 2. Campbell Foundry Company. 3. Carder Concrete Products. 4. Christy Concrete Products. 5. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. 6. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 7. McKinley Iron Works, Inc. 8. Neenah Foundry Company. 9. NewBasis. 10. Oldcastle Precast Group. 11. Osburn Associates, Inc.



12. Pennsylvania Insert Corporation. 13. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc.. 14. Strongwell Corporation; Lenoir City Division. 15. Underground Devices, Inc. 16. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 17. Utility Vault Co. 18. Wausau Tile, Inc. 19. Other “approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Manhole Frames, Covers, and Chimney Components: Comply with structural design loading specified for manhole.

1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof, [gray cast iron complying with ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B with milled cover-to-frame bearing surfaces; diameter, 29 inches (737 mm).

a. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. b. Special Covers: Recess in face of cover designed to accept finish material in

paved areas.

2. Cover Legend: Cast in. Selected to suit system.

a. Legend: "ELECTRIC-LV" for duct systems with power wires and cables for systems operating at 600 V and less.

b. Legend: "ELECTRIC-HV" for duct systems with medium-voltage cables. c. Legend: "SIGNAL" for communications, data, and telephone duct systems.

3. Manhole Chimney Components: Precast concrete rings with dimensions matched to those of roof opening.

a. Mortar for Chimney Ring and Frame and Cover Joints: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft. (60 L) where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.

C. Manhole Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, gray cast iron.

D. Pulling Eyes in Concrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert, 2-inch-(50-mm-) diameter eye, and 1-by-4-inch (25-by-100-mm) bolt.

1. Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch (150-mm), 4000-psi (27.6-MPa) Concrete: 13,000-lbf (58-kN) minimum tension.

E. Pulling Eyes in Nonconcrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforced fastening, 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) diameter eye, rated 2500-lbf (11-kN) minimum tension.

F. Pulling-In and Lifting Irons in Concrete Floors: 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, bent steel rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforcing rod. Exposed triangular opening.

1. Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf (180-kN) shear and 60,000-lbf (270-kN) tension.

G. Bolting Inserts for Concrete Utility Structure Cable Racks and Other Attachments: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-



inch (13-mm) ID by 2-3/4 inches (69 mm) deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum at base.

1. Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 lbf (53 kN) minimum.

H. Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with 1/2-inch (13-mm) bolt, 5300-lbf (24-kN) rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-lbf (30-kN) rated shear strength.

I. Cable Rack Assembly: Nonmetallic. Components fabricated from nonconductive, fiberglass-reinforced polymer.

1. Stanchions: Nominal 36 inches (900 mm) high by 4 inches (100 mm) wide, with minimum of 9 holes for arm attachment.

2. Arms: Arranged for secure, drop-in attachment in horizontal position at any location on cable stanchions, and capable of being locked in position. Arms shall be available in lengths ranging from 3 inches (75 mm) with 450-lb (204-kg) minimum capacity to 20 inches (508 mm) with 250-lb (114-kg) minimum capacity. Top of arm shall be nominally 4 inches (100 mm) wide, and arm shall have slots along full length for cable ties.

J. Duct-Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (2 deg C). Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (150 deg C) without slump and adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.

K. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arranged for attachment to roof or wall and floor of manhole. Ladder and mounting brackets and braces shall be fabricated from nonconductive, structural-grade, fiberglass-reinforced resin or hot-dip galvanized steel.

L. Cover Hooks: Heavy duty, designed for lifts 60 lbf (270 N) and greater. Two required.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or the manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables Over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, under roadways and parking areas unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, installed in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Underground Ducts Crossing Driveways, Roadways, Parking Areas and Railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.

3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less[,Including Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 or Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-10 or Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin or High-density plastic, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N) vertical loading.

B. Manholes: Precast or cast-in-place concrete.

1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.



3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Earthwork Specification Section "Earth Moving,"and Electrical Specification Section “Electrical Related Work” but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Exterior Improvements Specification Sections "Turf and Grasses" and "Plant" and Electrical Specification Section “Electrical Related Work”.

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to General Requirements Specification Section "Cutting and Patching."

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions.

B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches (1220 mm) both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet (3 m) outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

G. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.



H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts.

7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow.

9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.


b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

I. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:



1. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

2. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers.

3. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

4. Install backfill as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 5. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward

end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand-place backfill to 4 inches (100 mm) over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Earthwork Specification Section "Earth Moving" and Electrical Specification Section “Electrical Related Work”.

6. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts for like services and 6 inches (150 mm) between power and signal ducts.

7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below the frost line. 9. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

10. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.


b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

11. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried ducts and duct banks, placing them 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional planks 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Cast-in-Place Manhole Installation:

1. Finish interior surfaces with a smooth-troweled finish. 2. Windows for Future Duct Connections: Form and pour concrete knockout panels 1-1/2 to

2 inches (38 to 50 mm) thick, arranged as indicated. 3. Cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in Section 03 30 00

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:



1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevations:

1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches (380 mm) below finished grade. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade.

Set other manhole frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 3. Install handholes with bottom below the frost line, 48-inches below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade.

Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

D. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

E. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size.

1. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder.

2. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings to support frame and cover and to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney.

F. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

G. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Dampproofing materials and installation are specified in Section 071113 "Bituminous Dampproofing." After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

H. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

I. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes.

J. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches (98 mm) for manholes and 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

K. Warning Sign: Install "Confined Space Hazard" warning sign on the inside surface of each manhole cover.



3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and similar materials and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth

1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Concrete Specification Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," with a troweled finish.

2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep)

3.7 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Electrical Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Electrical Specifications Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR RACEWAYS 26 05 44 - 1 AND CABLING February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 44 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Electrical Specification Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:



a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc. f. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


2. Sealing Elements: Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.



B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Electrical Specification Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Unless otherwise indicated, cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level or top of curb. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for sufficient annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for sufficient annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.



3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS 26 05 48 - 1 AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 48 – ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators. 4. Channel support systems. 5. Restraint cables. 6. Hanger rod stiffeners. 7. Anchorage bushings and washers.


1. Electrical Specification Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC or Seismic Design Group as defined in ASCE 7: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC and ASCE 7:

a. Component Importance Factor (Ip) as defined in ASCE 7:

1) All Exit and Emergency Lighting and Power Systems in any Occupancy Category: 1.5

2) All Fire Alarm Systems and Equipment in any Occupancy Category: 1.5 3) All other Electrical Systems, Equipment and Devices in Occupancy

Category IV structures: 1.5 4) All other Electrical Systems, Equipment and Devices in Occupancy

Category III structures: 1.25 5) All other Electrical Systems, Equipment and Devices in Occupancy

Category I and II structures: 1.0



b. Component Response Modification Factor (Rp) as defined in ASCE 7

1) Generators, batteries, inverters, motors, transformers, and other electrical components of high deformability materials. 2.5

2) Motor control centers, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, instrumentation cabinets, and other electrical components of sheet metal framing. 6.0

3) Lighting fixtures. 1.5 4) Conduit, bus ducts and rigidly mounted cable trays. 2.5 5) Suspended cable trays. 6.0 6) All other electrical components. 1.5

c. Component Amplification Factor (ap) as defined in ASCE 7.

1) Generators, batteries, inverters, motors, transformers, and other electrical components of high deformability materials. 1.0

2) Motor control centers, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, instrumentation cabinets, and other electrical components of sheet metal framing. 2.5

3) Lighting fixtures. 1.0 4) Conduit, bus ducts and rigidly mounted cable trays. 1.0 5) Suspended cable trays. 2.5 6) All other electrical components. 1.0

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): Select from IBC Seismic Hazard Map

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: Select from IBC Seismic Hazard Map.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other electrical Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.

3. Field-fabricated supports. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent



testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS


B. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick,

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.



2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Mason Industries. 2. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 3. Other “Approved” Manufacturers in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

“Special Conditions”.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.



2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.



B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Architect, Engineer, Construction Manager and Owner, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.



5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.


E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.



IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.



B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field . 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch-(75-mm-) high

letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field.



2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

E. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.



E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE, Inscriptions for

Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,.

2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, 29 CFR 1910.145, and ANSI Z535.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.



2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR”.

3. Arc Flash Warning: "DANGER – ARC FLASH HAZARD” with the Approach Boundary, PPE and Incident Energy Levels indicated based on the short circuit rating of the equipment unless an arc flash study is to be performed. .

2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.10 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.



1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2

MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.



I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. Apply to floors in unfinished spaces and floors that are to receive tile, carpeting, or other similar finish treatment prior to the installation of such treatment. Do not apply to floors that are only to be painted.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. Apply to walls in unfinished spaces and walls that are to receive sheetrock, paneling, or other similar finish treatment prior to the installation of such treatment. Do not apply to walls in finished spaces that are only to be painted.

3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl or Snap-around labels. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl labelor self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in low-voltage switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, enclosed switches, transformer compartments, vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, handholes, etc., use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for service feeder and branch-circuit conductors throughout the electrical system.

2. Color code 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire system secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors throughout the electrical system as follows:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White.



e. Ground: Green. f. Isolated Ground:Green with yellow stripe.

3. Color code 480Y/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire system secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors throughout the electrical system as follows:

a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: White with a colored stripe or gray. e. Ground: Green

4. Color code 240 Delta/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire system secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors throughout the electrical system as follows:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Orange (High Leg). c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e. Ground: Green.

5. Color code 240/120 volt, and 208/120 volt, 1 phase, 3 wire system secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors throughout the electrical system as follows:

a. Line 1: Black. b. Line 2: Red. c. Neutral: White. d. Ground: Green.

6. Color code isolated power system branch circuit conductors throughout the electrical system as follows:

a. Isolated Conductor No. 1: Orange b. Isolated Conductor No. 2: Brown

7. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in switchgear, motor control centers, transformer compartments, vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, handholes, etc., use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

G. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.



1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

K. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

L. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

M. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

N. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

O. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.



d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks. t. Power-generating units. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment.



OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION 26 05 73 - 1 STUDY AND ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 05 73 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY AND ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies and arc flash hazard analysis. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

B. Related Sections include all Sections specifying medium or low voltage switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, enclosed switched and circuit breakers, circuit breakers, fuses, and relaying for ground fault or overcurrent protection.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made prior to submission of and approval process for system protective devices including panel boards and switchboards has been completed. The submission of the following submittal will also be reviewed along with the submission of the protective device submission as part of the switchboard and panel boards. The short circuit and arc flash and coordination studies shall be submitted prior to the equipment fabrication of the emergency distribution.

1. Coordination-study report with commentary, input data sheets and graphs showing device coordination with time for the electrical distribution.

2. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. Submit floor plans with equipment location including clearances and arc flash hazard limits for the entire electrical distribution including normal and emergency distribution.

3. Submit schematic one line diagrams of the system distribution with equipment tag, short circuit current at different locations including at each bus.


A. Qualification Data: For coordination-study and arc flash hazard analysis specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study, fault-current-study, and arc flash hazard analysis, computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.



B. Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

E. Comply with IEEE 1584 for arc flash hazard analysis.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Operation Technology, Inc. 2. Other “approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study and arc flash hazard analysis computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Additional Features:

a. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

2.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design Overcurrent Protective Device Manufacturer: A selective coordination study has been performed for the elements of the Emergency and Legally Required Standby Systems as defined in National Electrical Code Articles 700 and 701, Elevator Overcurrent Protection System as described in National Electrical Code Article 620 “Selective Coordination”. Manufacturer, catalog numbers, trip settings or fuse sizes indicated on the drawings are those



of the products used by the Engineer in order to achieve reasonable coordination and are not intended to restrict or influence the Contractor’s product selection. The coordination study shall be performed by the Contractor for products he proposes even if they are those indicated.

2.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR SELECTIVE COORDINATION

A. Overcurrent Protection

1. All overcurrent protective devices on the Essential Electrical System (Life Safety, Critical and Equipment Branches) as defined in National Electrical Code Article 517, Emergency and Legally Required Standby Systems as defined in National Electrical Code Articles 700 and 701 shall be selectively coordinated.

2. Coordination shall include all OCPDs from the alternate power source to the emergency side of the respective transfer switches except ground fault protection, all OCPDs in the path from the incoming utility or on-site normal power source to the line side of the respective transfer switches, and all OCPDs on the load side of the respective transfer switches except ground fault protection.

3. Overcurrent protective devices shall be selectively coordinated down to 0.10 seconds. 4. Fuses

a. Minimum melting time and total clearing time shall be considered to assure total coordination.

5. Circuit breakers

a. Circuit breakers shall have electronic trip units with adjustable instantaneous, long- and short-time pickup, long- and short-time time delay, and ground fault pickup, time delay and I²t settings.

b. Zone selective interlocking may be utilized to achieve coordination.

B. Ground Fault Protection

1. Ground fault protection of equipment shall be installed on each service and feeder disconnecting means on solidly grounded wye systems more than 150 volts to ground but not exceeding 600 volts phase to phase rated 1000 amps or more on the upstream side on any transfer switch.

2. Circuit breakers

a. Circuit breakers shall have electronic trip units with adjustable instantaneous, long- and short-time pickup, long- and short-time time delay, and ground fault pickup- time delay and I²t settings.


3. Fuses

a. Where fuses are used as the overcurrent protective devices, electronic relays with ground fault pickup, time delay and I²t settings shall be used for ground fault protection.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other electrical Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length. f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.



i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Switchboard bus. 2. Motor-control center. 3. Distribution panelboard. 4. Branch circuit panelboard. 5. Elevator disconnect. 6. Fire pump controller. 7. Equipment disconnects 60 amp and larger.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 141, IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.

1. Transformers:

a. ANSI C57.12.22. b. IEEE C57.12.00. c. IEEE C57.96.

2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 3. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study on elements of the Emergency and Legally Required Standby Systems as defined in National Electrical Code Articles 700 and 701. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.



2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-circuit currents.

3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Perform coordination study on elements of the Elevator Overcurrent Protection System as described in National Electrical Code Article 620 “Selective Coordination”. Include main overcurrent protective devices and feeder overcurrent protective devices in all switchboards, distribution panels and panelboards that supply more than one driving machine. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-

circuit currents. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

C. Comply with IEEE 141, IEEE 241 and IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

D. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup

values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

E. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Perform an arc flash hazard analysis on elements of the electrical distribution system using data gathered for the fault current and coordination studies using the same manufacturer’s computer software program modules.



B. Calculate the incident energy and flash protection boundary at all locations where examination, adjustment, servicing, maintenance or periodic voltage measurements may be performed.

C. Study Report:

1. Provide summary with analysis methodology, findings and recommendations. 2. Provide summary of input data for available fault current, cables and electrical

equipment. 3. Compare available fault current at each location with the equipment rating. 4. Provide “as found” and “as recommended” device ratings. 5. Provide incident energy level and recommended personal protective equipment for each

location.

D. Labels: Based on the results of the incident energy study, the supplier shall produce and install a warning label (orange<40 cal/cm²) or danger label (red>49 cak.cm²) for each piece of equipment as specified in “Section A” in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-2002. The label must be readable in both indoor and outdoor environments for at least 3 years and contain the following information:

1. Arc hazard boundary (inches). 2. Working distance (inches). 3. Arc flash incident energy at the working distance (calories/cm²). 4. PPE category and description including the glove rating. 5. Voltage rating of the equipment. 6. Limited approach distance (inches). 7. Restricted approach distance (inches). 8. Prohibited approach distance (inches). 9. Equipment/bus name. 10. Date prepared. 11. Supplier name and address.

E. Training: Provide four-hours of hands-on arc flash safety training to selected Owner’s maintenance personnel. Include the following:

1. Proper use of the system analysis date. 2. Interpretation of hazard labels. 3. Selection and utilization of personal protective equipment. 4. Safe work practices and procedures.


NJ Schools Development Authority JE-0010-C01 New Public School #20 Revision #4 - June 20, 2013

FIRE ALARM 26 07 21 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 07 21 - FIRE ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal equipment, controls, and devices.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Noncoded, zoned system with manual and automatic alarm initiation; and hard-wired for signal transmission, using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm initiation and notification appliances.

B. General: Noncoded, addressable system with manual and automatic alarm initiation; and multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.

C. General: Noncoded, addressable-analog system with manual and automatic alarm initiation; automatic sensitivity control and alarm verification of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.

D. Zoned, noncoded, analog addressable, microprocessor-based fire detection and alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation, automatic sensitivity control and alarm verification of smoke detectors, and alarm tone generation with live microphone override.

E. Signal transmission using hardwired separate individual circuits for each zone or circuit of alarm indication and combination of hardwired and multiplex signal transmission for alarm, trouble and supervisory initiating, monitoring and control circuits.

F. Minimum of two evacuation circuits. Circuit one shall distribute a temporal code 3 pattern tone alarm signal to the audio amplifiers. Circuit two shall distribute a pre-recorded announcement to the amplifiers after three rounds of a temporal code 3 pattern tone alarm signal. Microphone for live announcements shall override both circuits.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Wiring diagrams, battery sizing calculations and floor plans shall be developed and signed by a technician having NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Certification minimum and the proposed fire alarm system manufacturer’s certification, and shall be submitted by the contractor to the state or local building code reviewing agency as well as to the Architect, Engineer and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Proof of certification shall be included with the submittal.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Show details of graphic annunciator.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Make all diagrams Project Specific and distinguish between existing and new wiring.

E. Battery: Sizing calculations.

F. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations and routings of raceway connections.

G. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.

H. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

I. Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating installation of smoke detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each duct smoke provision of detector installation:

1. Size and location of ducts, including lining. 2. Size and location of piping. 3. Size and arrangement of structural elements. 4. Size and location of duct smoke detector, including air-sampling elements.

J. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the FACP.

K. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

L. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with requirements.

M. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. Comply with NFPA 72.

N. Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in General Requirements Specification Sections. Comply with NFPA 72.



O. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for Submittals specified in General Requirements Specification Sections Section "Submittals," make an identical submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.

P. The following documents shall be submitted to the authority responsible for enforcing the International Building Code for review and approval prior to installation of the fire alarm system.

1. A floor plan. 2. Locations of alarm-initiating and notification appliances. 3. Alarm control and trouble signaling equipment. 4. Annunciation. 5. Power connection. 6. Battery calculations. 7. Conductor type and sizes. 8. Voltage drop calculations. 9. Manufacturers, model numbers and listing information for equipment, devices

and materials. 10. Details of ceiling height and construction. 11. The interface of fire safety control functions.

Q. Certificate of Completion: Comply with NFPA 72.

R. NICET and Manufacturer’s Certification: Indicating the names and technical level of achievement awarded to the personnel responsible for the layout and installation of the system.

S. Provide programming manuals and diskette copies in ASCII or RTF format of the software for microprocessor or computer based systems for the Owner’s use in modifying, upgrading or expanding the system.

T. Before receiving final payment and after the system has been tested, inspected, and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, the Authorized System vendor shall turn over a disc copy and hard copy of the approved program and changes to the program for the specific project directly to the Owner. The information shall be complete in all respects and contain all actions, rules, and other information needed to change, alter, or add to the system at a future date by a licensed Factory Certified vendor of the installed system. This information shall not be distributed to anyone not certified by the Manufacturer and proof of Certification shall be presented to the Owner, in writing, before the information is exchanged.

U. The Owner, as well as the system vendor, shall maintain a copy of the latest database. As changes are made, the Owner shall receive the latest database and the vendor of record shall maintain a copy.

V. The disc copy of the program shall be turned over to the Owner in a sealed envelope with the following or similar verbiage:



1. COMPANY NAME acknowledges that all data included on the enveloped disc is 100% complete. Data enclosed contains all software required to provide a 100% functioning system as required by the contract specifications and as tested and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction on DATE.

2. The Owner shall not distribute the enclosed software disc to any company or individual not Authorized and Certified by the System Manufacturer. The enclosed software is licensed and protected by copyright of the SYSTEM MANUFACTURER.

1.5 FIRE DEPARTMENT APPROVALS

A. FIRE ALARMS:

1. A letter from the Jersey City Fire Department indicating its acceptance of the location of fire alarm remote annunciator panels must be submitted with the required Fire Alarm/Detection System shop drawing submittal, for review and release by the New Jersey Department of Community Affairs, the Authority Having Jurisdiction for this project.

B. SITE ACCESS:

1. A letter from the Jersey City Fire Department indicating its acceptance of the use of knox lock boxes to contain devices to allow Jersey City Fire Department personnel and apparatus to open the gates and gain access to the school site when responding to emergency situations and the locations of these knox lock boxes must be submitted at the time of the required Automatic Fire Sprinkler System or Fire Alarm/Detection System shop drawing submittal, for review and release by the New Jersey Department of Community Affairs, the Authority Having Jurisdiction for this project.


A. Equipment, materials and system engineering shall be provided by a direct Factory Authorized Systems Distributor. The on site management of the fire alarm portion of the project shall be the responsibility of a Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor to ensure proper specification adherence, installation, final connection, test, turnover, warranty compliance, and service.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


F. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL Standards for Safety pertaining to fire alarm systems and provide products that are UL listed and labeled.



G. Comply with the following:

1. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 2. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Application. 3. 464 Audible Signal Appliances. 4. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 5. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 6. 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 7. 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the amount installed, but in no case less than two (2) units or more than ten (10) units.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the amount installed, but in no case less than two (2) units or more than ten (10) units.

3. Manual Pull Stations: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the amount installed, but in no case less than one (1) unit or more than ten (10) units.

4. Area Smoke Detectors, Photoelectric or Ionization Type: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the amount installed, but in no case less than one (1) unit or more than ten (10) units.

5. Heat Detectors, Combination Type: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the amount installed, but in no case less than one (1) unit or more than ten (10) units.

6. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of the amount installed, but in no case less than two (2) units or more than ten (10) units.

7. Combination Audible and Visible Fire Alarm Signals: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed but in no case less than two (2) units or more than ten (10) units.

8. Visible Fire Alarm Signals: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed but in no case less than two (2) units or more than ten (10) units.

9. Addressable Interface devices: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed but in no case less than two (2) units or more than ten (10) units

10. Printer Ribbons: Six (6) spares. 11. Keys and Tools: One (1) extra set for access to locked or tamper-proofed

components.

B. Provide all labor, materials and programming to furnish and install the following additional devices where directed by the Owner, Architect, Engineer or Authority Having Jurisdiction during construction and prior to final acceptance. Include 50 feet of wiring, connection to the addressable loop, and programming. The unused devices shall be turned over to the owner and the owner credited the amount of labor for their installation.

1. Manual Fire Alarm Pull Stations: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units.



2. Combination rate-of-rise and fixed 135 degree F. heat detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units.

3. Photoelectric Area Smoke Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the amount installed, but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units.

5. Combination Audible and Visible Fire Alarm Signals: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units.

6. Visible Fire Alarm Signals: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units.

7. Addressable Interface devices: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units. Include connection to device being monitored or controlled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Faraday; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 2. Federal Signal Corporation. 3. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.; a Honeywell company. 4. Fire Lite Alarms; a Honeywell company. 5. Gamewell; a Honeywell company. 6. GE Infrastructure; a unit of General Electric Company. 7. Gentex Corporation. 8. Harrington Signal, Inc. 9. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. 10. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 11. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company. 12. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company. 13. Or Approved Equal.

B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide a Fire Alarm System and Components as provided by Edwards Systems Technology and obtained through a factory authorized distributor and as indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications complete with all wiring, cutting, patching, supports, etc. as specified.

2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Control of System: By the FACP.

B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits.



C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An alarm signal is the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received.

D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones.

E. System Reset: All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after initiating devices are restored to normal.

F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator transmitter, receiver, and two separate telephone lines.

G. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: Class A. System wiring and circuit arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when a single ground or open circuit occurs in an initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 6. d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

H. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: Class A (enhanced). System wiring and circuit arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wire-to-wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style E. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 7. d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

I. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP. The FACP indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the secondary power supply.

J. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP and the annunciator. An emergency power light is illuminated at both locations when the system is operating on the secondary power supply.



K. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual station, automatic alarm operation of a flame or heat detector, operation of a sprinkler flow device, or verified automatic alarm operation of a smoke detector initiates the following:

L. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual station, automatic alarm operation of a smoke or flame or heat detector, or operation of a sprinkler flow device initiates the following:

1. Notification-appliance operation. 2. Identification at the FACP and the remote annunciator of the zone originating the

alarm. 3. Identification at the FACP and the remote annunciator of the device originating

the alarm. 4. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Unlocking of electric door locks in designated egress paths. 6. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 7. Recall of elevators, chairlifts and stairlifts. 8. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone where alarm

was initiated. 9. Transmit a signal to a local standalone automatic temperature control panel for

fan shutdown. 10. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was

initiated. 11. Recording of the event in the system memory. 12. Recording of the event by the system printer.

M. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP.

N. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP and the remote annunciator.

1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.

2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again.

3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

O. Automatic timed cutout shall silence the audible alarm after three rounds of the temporal code have been sounded. The visible alarm signals shall continue to operate until the FACP is reset.

P. Operation of the City Disconnect / Drill Switch initiates a trouble signal at the FACP and annunciator, records the event in the system memory, and prints a record of the event on the system printer.

Q. Water-flow alarm switch operation initiates the following:

1. Notification-appliance operation. 2. Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated.



R. Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft shuts down elevator power by operating a shunt trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.

S. Water-flow alarm for connection to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shuts down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the fire detector or the FACP closes the shunt trip circuit and operates building notification appliances and annunciator.

T. Smoke detection for zones or detectors with alarm verification initiates the following:

1. Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP. 2. Activation of a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP

and the detector. 3. Recording of the event by the system printer. 4. General alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancellation of the FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

U. Smoke detector operation for a duct mounted smoke detector in a supply or return duct of an air handling unit causes the following:

1. Audible and visible indication of an “alarm verification” signal at the FACP. 2. Activation of a listed and approved “alarm verification” sequence at the FACP

and the detector. 3. Recording of the event on the system printer. 4. General alarm initiation if the alarm is verified. 5. FACP indication cancellation and reset if alarm if the alarm is not verified. 6. Stops the supply and return fan if the alarm is verified.

V. Carbon Monoxide detector operation initiates the following:

1. A supervisory, audible and visible “carbon monoxide” signal indication and device location at the FACP and annunciator.

2. A remote audible and visible supervisory alarm signal at a continuously attended location within the premises.

3. Recording the event on the system printer. 4. Transmission of supervisory and trouble signals to remote alarm receiving

station.

W. Sprinkler valve-tamper switch operation initiates the following:

1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve-tamper" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator.

2. Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated. 3. Recording of the event by the system printer. 4. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station.

X. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase, phase-reversal, or fire pump running condition, initiates the following:

1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "fire-pump power failure" or "fire pump running" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator.



2. Recording of the event by the system printer. 3. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station.

Y. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system initiates the following:

1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "sprinkler trouble" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator.

2. Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated. 3. Recording of the event by the system printer. 4. Transmission of trouble signal to remote central station.

Z. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes are recorded in system memory and are printed out by the system printer.

AA. Removal of an alarm-initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following:

1. A "trouble" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator for the device or zone involved.

2. Recording of the event by the system printer. 3. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station.

BB. Printout of Events: On receipt of the signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including the same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printout of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

CC. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain-English-language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory.

2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS

A. Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color.

1. Single-action mechanism initiates an alarm. 2. Double-action mechanism requires two actions, such as a push and a pull, to

initiate an alarm. 3. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double pole, double throw; switch rated

for the voltage and current at which it operates. 4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at

the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates



an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false alarm operation.

5. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

6. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

2.4 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General: Include the following features:

1. Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation

to restore them to normal operation. 3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are

mounted in a module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring.

4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated. 5. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation. 6. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. 7. Remote Controllability: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors are analog-

addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011

percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. 3. Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed-temperature type with 135 deg F (57 deg C)

setting.

C. Ionization Detector: Include the following features:

1. Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. 2. Self-compensating for changes in environmental conditions.

D. Beam-Type Smoke Detector: Each detector consists of a separate transmitter and receiver with the following features:

1. Adjustable Sensitivity: More than a six-level range, minimum. 2. Linear Range of Coverage: 600 feet (180 m), minimum. 3. Tamper Switch: Initiates trouble signal at the central FACP when either

transmitter or receiver is disturbed. 4. Separate Color-Coded LEDs: Indicate normal, alarm, and trouble status. Any

detector trouble, including power loss, is reported to the central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal.

E. Remote Air-Sampling Detector System: Includes air-sampling pipe network, a laser-based photoelectric detector, a sample transport fan, and a control unit.



1. Pipe Network: Electrical metallic tubing connects control unit with designated sampling holes.

2. Smoke Detector: Particle-counting type with continuous laser beam. Sensitivity adjustable to a minimum of three preset values.

3. Sample Transport Fan: Centrifugal type, creating a minimum static of 0.05 inches (1.3 mm) of water at all sampling ports.

4. Control Unit: Single or multizone unit as indicated. Provides same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for the central FACP plus separate trouble indication for airflow and detector problems.

5. Signals to the Central FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each system zone are individually reported to the central FACP as separately identified zones.

F. Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric Type.

1. Utilizing a light scattering type photoelectric sensor to sense changes in air samples from its surroundings and suitable for direct insertion into ducts up to 36” x 36” with air velocities up to 5000 feet per minute.

2. Provide duct housing assemblies for ducts exceeding 36” x 36”. Provide air sampling inlet tubes and air exhaust tubes. Protect sensing chamber from damage and insects. Support both ends of tubes.

3. Include relay with contacts rated to interrupt fan motor control circuit or smoke damper power circuit.

G. Duct Smoke Detector: Ionization type.

1. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.5 OTHER DETECTORS

A. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) or rate of rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F (8.3 deg C) per minute, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Mounting: Plug-in base for outlet box mounting, interchangeable with smoke

detector bases. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 135 deg F for normal operation or 190 deg F (88 deg C) for high temperature operation.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Mounting: Plug-in base for outlet box mounting, interchangeable with smoke

detector bases. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,


C. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: Consists of detector cable and control unit.



1. Detector Cable: Comply with UL 521. Rated detection temperature 155 deg F (68 deg C). Listed for "regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature.

2. Control Panel: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provides same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for the central FACP.

3. Signals to the Central FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone are individually reported to the central FACP as separately identified zones.

4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

D. Flame Detector: Ultraviolet type with solid-state amplifier-switching circuit set for 10-second delay, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,


E. Remote Addressable Modules: High temperature, waterproof and explosion proof units may be provided with remotely mounted external addressable interface units.

F. Carbon Monoxide Detector: U. L. Listed to Standard 2075 including the following features:

1. Operating Voltage: 24 vdc supervised power supply from the fire alarm system. 2. Mounting: Surface or semi-flush mounting to standard outlet boxes. 3. Features: Test and reset switch; Green LED for normal operation; Red LED for

alarm indication; SPST alarm relay; SPST trouble relay. 4. Activates alarm contacts at multiple levels of exposure to carbon monoxide

based on time-weighted averages of the gas present. 5. Alarm contacts activate a supervisory condition on the fire alarm system and

local audible and visible signal via remote addressable module. 6. Activates trouble contacts upon failure of the detector or loss of operating power. 7. Trouble contacts activate a trouble condition on the fire alarm system via remote

addressable module.

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly.

B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind the bell. When operating, bells provide a sound-pressure level of 94 dB, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the bell. 10-inch (254-mm) size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are weatherproof where indicated.



C. Horns: Electric vibrating polarized type 24 volt d.c. with operating mechanism mounted behind a grille. Horns shall produce a minimum sound pressure level (SPL) of 92 dBA average anechoic @ 10 ft. and 88 dBA reverberant @ 10 ft.

D. High Decibel Horns: Electronic projector polarized type 24 volt d.c. surface mounted with adjustable mounting bracket. Horns shall produce a minimum sound pressure level of 110 dBA at 10 ft. Horns shall be weatherproof and listed for outdoor use where applicable.

E. Chimes: Electronic polarized solid-state 24 volt d. c. mounted behind a grille. Chimes shall produce a sound pressure level (SPL) of 83 dBA average anechoic @ 10 ft. and 52 dBA reverberant @ 10 ft. in vibrating mode.

F. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971 with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens. Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: Generally, 15 candela in corridors; 110 candela elsewhere unless otherwise indicated. Comply with the minimum intensities indicated in the CABO/ANSI A117.1-1998 “Room spacing allocation” and “Corridor spacing allocation” tables for the quantity and locations on devices indicated on the drawings. Where the required intensities cannot be obtained from the indicated devices, provide additional devices evenly distributed to meet the required intensities.

G. Voice/Tone Speakers:

1. Speakers: Low profile, low inrush, UL 1480 or UL 1971 listed, with 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 4 and 8 watt taps producing 96 dBA @ 10 ft. for speakers and 93 dBA @ 10 ft. for combination speaker/strobes.

2. Horn Loudspeakers: Red, surface mounted, adjustable mounting bracket, UL 1480 listed, producing 102 dBA at 15 watts at 10 ft. with minimum of three power taps in 3 dB decreasing increments.

3. Mounting: Flush, semirecessed, surface, or surface-mounted; bidirectional as indicated.

4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker location.

2.7 FIREFIGHTERS' TELEPHONES

A. Comply with NFPA 72 requirements for two-way telephone communication service.

B. Wall Mounted Phone Jacks: Telephone jacks mounted on single gang plate for use with portable phones. Plates shall be engraved "FIRE EMERGENCY PHONE" on the front oft the plate.

C. Pluggable Phones: Provide five (5) emergency telephones constructed of Red Cycolac type T thermal ABS material with five foot coiled line cord and jack attached. Store phones in cabinet in or at the FACP.



D. Telephone Storage Rack: Sufficient to hold the quantity of phones provided. May be included in the FACP or a separate matching cabinet with hinged locking front door with glass vision panel.

1. Exterior Identification: "Firefighters' Telephone." 2. Interior Identification: Station number and location. 3. Size: To accommodate handset and cord.

2.8 REMOTE DEVICE LOCATION-INDICATING LIGHTS AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES

A. Description: LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily visible, and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.

2.9 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf (111-N) holding force.

2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc. 4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.10 CENTRAL FACP

A. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations required for testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field wiring and interconnecting panels.

1. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch (25 mm) high. Identify individual components and modules within cabinets with permanent labels.

2. Mounting: Flush. 3. Mounting: Surface.

B. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the FACP. Alarm-initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is unacceptable.



C. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire alarm systems.

D. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound.

E. Indicating Lights and System Controls: Individual LED devices identify zones transmitting signals. Zone lights distinguish between alarm and trouble signals, and indicate the type of device originating the signal. Manual switches and push-to-test buttons do not require a key to operate. Controls include the following:

1. Alarm acknowledge switch. 2. Alarm silence switch. 3. System reset switch. 4. LED test switch.

F. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC):

1. The audible signal portion of each NAC shall sound the ANSI S3-41 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal three-pulse temporal pattern for a minimum of 180 seconds after which it shall be capable of being selected for continuous sounding with a silencing switch.

2. The audible signal portion of each NAC shall be capable of selecting continuous, temporal 3-3-3, or march time signaling, 60 beats per minute.

3. The visible signal portion of each NAC shall be for use with synchronized strobe lights.

G. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the alarm or trouble condition still exists.

H. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Display: Liquid-crystal type, 40 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and

control commands.

I. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and control. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Display: A minimum of 80 characters; alarm, supervisory, and component status messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands.

J. Voice Alarm: An emergency communication system, includes central voice alarm system components complete with microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators. Features include the following:



1. Digital integrated audio system multiplexing two independent audio channels over a single pair of wires. The system shall include distributed audio amplifiers, one for each speaker circuit, for the ultimate in system survivability.

2. A local temporal code 3 tone at each amplifier to allow evacuation signals to be broadcast in the protected premises.

3. A digital message unit which provides a local temporal code 3 tone followed by up to 24 minutes of pre-recorded emergency messaging. The message contained in the fully digital message unit shall be recordable in the field on a computer.

4. A fully integrated Emergency Communications System including a paging microphone, digital message playback unit, and 2 fully digitized and multiplexed Audio Channels.

5. The system shall have paging control switches and LEDs to support specific zone selection as shown on the plans. A minimum of two zones shall be provided; one interior and one exterior. The zone control / displays shall confirm amplifier selection and annunciate amplifier and amplifier circuit trouble.

6. The system shall automatically deliver a preannounce tone of 1000 Hz for three seconds when the emergency operator presses the microphone talk key. A ready to page LED shall flash during the preannounce and turn steady when the system is ready for the user’s page delivery.

7. The system shall include a page deactivation timer, which activates for 3 seconds when the emergency user releases the microphone talk key. Should the user subsequently press the microphone key during the deactivation period a page can be delivered immediately. Should the timer complete its cycle the system shall automatically restore emergency signalling and any subsequent paging will be preceded by the pre-announce tone. A VU display shall display voice level to the emergency operator.

8. Each audio power amplifier shall have integral audio signal de-multiplexers, allowing the amplifier to select any one of two digitized audio channels. The channel selection shall be directed by the system software.

9. Each amplifier output shall include a dedicated, supervised 25/70 Vrms speaker circuit, which is suitable for connection of emergency speaker appliances. Each amplifier shall also include a notification appliance circuit rated at 24Vdc @ 3.5A for connection of visible (strobe) appliances. This circuit shall be fully programmable and it shall be possible to define the circuit for the support of audible, visible, or ancillary devices.

10. Standby audio amplifiers shall be provided that automatically sense the failure of a primary amplifier, and automatically program themselves to select and de-multiplex the same audio information channel of the failed primary amplifier, and fully replace the function of the failed amplifier.

K. Firefighters' Telephone Control Module: Controls firefighters' two-way telephone communication system. Arrange system to use dedicated, two-way, supervised voice communication links between the FACP and remote firefighters' telephone stations throughout the building. Supervised telephone lines shall be connected to talk circuits by controls in this module. Controls provide the ability to disconnect phones from talk circuits if too many phones are in use simultaneously. The module includes the following:

1. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote telephone is activated, it causes the audible signal to sound and the high-intensity lamp to flash.



2. Selector panel controls simultaneous operation of telephones in selected zones and permits up to six phones to be operated simultaneously. Ground faults and open or shorted telephone lines are indicated on the panel front by individual LEDs. Zone-selector switches with associated LED indicators permit the firefighter to activate selected telephone zones. LED indicators display elevator recall status.

L. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.11 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging, silencing, reset, and test.

1. Mounting: Flush or surface cabinet as indicated, NEMA 250, Class 1 indoors; Class 3R outdoors.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Individual LED for each type of alarm and supervisory device, and LEDs to indicate "normal power" and "trouble."

1. An alarm or supervisory signal causes the illumination of a zone light, floor light, and device light.

2. System trouble causes the illumination of all lights above and also the trouble light.

3. Additional LEDs indicate normal and emergency power modes for the system. 4. A test switch tests LEDs mounted on the panel. Switch does not require key

operation. 5. Graphics: Integrate LED displays with graphic display panel to form a graphic

annunciator.

C. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.

D. Graphic Display Panel for Remote Annunciator: Wall-mounted engraved panel indicating the building floor plan with a "You Are Here" designation. Engrave zone, area, and floor designations on the face of the panel.

1. Materials: Satin-finished stainless steel or brushed aluminum. 2. Floor Plan and Zone Boundary Lines: Engraved in the surface and filled with

colored paint. Floor plan lines are black and 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide; zone boundaries are red and 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide.

3. Engraved Legends: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) high minimum, in letters filled with red paint.

4. Mounting: Integral with lamp-type annunciator. Locate zone lamps in the floor plan zones they represent.

5. Mounting: Adjacent to remote annunciator.



2.12 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

A. General: Components include valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid battery; charger; and an automatic transfer switch.

1. Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 10 years, minimum.

B. General: Components include nickel-cadmium battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch.

1. Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 20 years, minimum.

C. Battery Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.

1. Magnetic door holders are not served by emergency power. Magnetic door holders are released when normal power fails.

D. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within four hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision.

E. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails.

2.13 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate elevator recall or to a circuit breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

2.14 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Listed and labeled under UL 864 and NFPA 72.

B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.



C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.

D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.15 RADIO ALARM TRANSMITTER

A. Listed and labeled under NFPA 72 and NFPA 1221. Comply with 47 CFR 90.

B. Description: Manufacturer's recognized commercial product; factory assembled, wired, and tested; and ready for installation and operation.

1. Packaging: A single, modular, NEMA 250, Type 1 metal enclosure with a tamper-resistant flush tumbler lock.

2. Signal Transmission Mode and Frequency: VHF or UHF 2-W power output, coordinated with operating characteristics of the established remote alarm receiving station designated by Owner.

3. Normal Power Input: 120-V ac. 4. Secondary Power: Integral-sealed, rechargeable, 12-V battery and charger.

Comply with NFPA 72 requirements for battery capacity. 5. Antenna: Omnidirectional, coaxial half-wave, dipole type with driving point

impedance matched to transmitter and antenna cable output impedance. Wind-load strength of antenna and mounting hardware and supports shall withstand 100 mph (160 km/h) with a gust factor of 1.3 without failure.

6. Antenna Cable: Coaxial cable with impedance matched to the transmitter output impedance.

7. Antenna-Cable Connectors: Weatherproof. 8. Alarm Interface Devices: Circuit boards, modules, and other auxiliary devices,

integral to the transmitter, matching fire alarm and other system outputs to message generating inputs of the transmitter that produce required message transmissions.

C. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP, or from its own internal sensors or controls, and automatically transmits signal along with a unique code that identifies the transmitting station to the remote alarm receiving station. The message transmitted corresponds to standard designations for the fire-reporting system to which the signal is being transmitted and includes separately designated messages in response to the following events or conditions:

1. Transmitter Low-Battery Condition: Sent when battery voltage is below 85 percent of rated value.

2. System Test Message: Initiated by a manual test switch within the transmitter cabinet or automatically, at an optionally preselected time, once every 24 hours with transmission time controlled by a programmed timing device integral to transmitter controls.

3. Transmitter Trouble Message: Actuated by failure, in excess of one-minute duration, of the transmitter normal power source or derangement of the wiring of the transmitter or any alarm input interface circuit or device connected to it.

4. Local Fire Alarm System Trouble Message: Initiated by events or conditions that cause a trouble signal to be indicated on the building system.



5. Local Fire Alarm System Alarm Message: Actuated when the building system goes into an alarm state. Identifies zone or device that initiated the alarm.

6. Local Alarm System Supervisory Alarm Message: Actuated when the building alarm system indicates a supervisory alarm.

2.16 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Description: Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.


A. Guards shall be heavy gauge welded wire mesh painted to match the device or clear perforated or slotted ultraviolet stabilized, high impact, injection molded virgin polycarbonate.

B. Guards shall not impair the normal viewing, audibility, physical operation or testing of the equipment.

C. Pull Station Protective Covers shall be Mini Stopper Model STI-6600 Protective Lexan Covers or approved equal. Covers shall contain an integral battery and battery operated horn. The horn shall sound whenever the cover is lifted to access the pull station. Where Stopper covers are indicated as weatherproof, provide a Model SUB-317 weatherproof gasket or provide Models STI-6525 or 6535 outdoor rated covers.

2.18 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cableteq USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire. 6. Or approved equal.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG and also size as recommended by system manufacturer.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with US 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.



2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multi conductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type

TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.

B. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes.

C. Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised.

D. Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from a sidewall to the near edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install not more than 30 feet (9 m) apart in any direction.

E. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 4 inches (100 mm), but not more than 12 inches (300 mm), below the ceiling.

F. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 60 inches (1520 mm).

G. Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors: Securely installed in ductwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in such a manner as to obtain a representative sample of the air stream. Wherever possible locate just after a bend or air inlet to avoid stratification and a minimum of 6 duct widths downstream from the bend or inlet. Smoke detectors in classroom A/C units will be provided by others and shall be wired into the fire alarm system by the electrical contractor [through an interface module].

H. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Where ceiling heights permit, install top of appliance not less than 90 inches above the finished floor and not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a single unit.

J. Voice / Tone Speakers: Generally audible signals shall be flush mounted multi-tap voice/tone speakers.

1. In boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms, etc. and outdoors audible signals shall be surface mounted supervised horn speakers.

K. Horns: Generally audible signals shall be flush mounted electric vibrating horns.



1. In boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms, etc. and outdoors audible signals shall be surface mounted high decibel horns.

L. Chimes: In spaces such as individual classrooms, kindergartens, small group instruction rooms, offices, etc. audible signals shall be electronic chimes.

M. Visual Alarm Indicating Devices: Install with bottom of appliance not less than 80 inches (2030 mm) and no greater than 96 inches (2440 mm) above the finished floor.

N. Combination Audible/Visual Indicating Devices: Install with top of appliance not less than 90 inches (2280 mm) and bottom of appliance not greater than 96 inches (2440 mm) above the finished floor.

O. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

P. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

Q. Annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.

R. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist 100-mph (160-km/h) wind load with a 1.3 gust factor without damage.

S. Elevators: The Electrical Contractor shall engage a licensed elevator contractor to perform the work in the machine room, shafts and cars. Alarm and communications cables to the cars shall be plenum rated cable and shall be fastened to the traveling cables with approved fasteners. Audible and visual alarm signals and firefighter intercommunication jacks shall be flush mounted in the front panels or designated side panels of each car. Panels shall be removed for cutting. Cars shall be taken out of service one at a time while the work is being done. Audible signals shall be provided with concealed attenuating device to mute the sound level.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Install line voltage wiring in metal raceway according to Electrical Specification Sections Sections. Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.

B. Install low voltage fire alarm cables concealed within building spaces; run cables in metal raceway where run exposed less than eight feet from finished floor.

C. Do not install conductors, wires or cables of any other system in the same raceway or cable with fire alarm power supply circuits, non-power limited fire alarm circuits or power limited fire alarm circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to



terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Make splices and connections in low voltage fire alarm cables in metal boxes with covers.

F. Make cable connections to fire alarm devices using metal boxes and cable connectors so there is no strain on the wiring termination.

G. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

H. Do not make taps or splices in supervised, hard-wired nonaddressable circuits.

I. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

J. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones.

K. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch (25-mm) conduit between the FACP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.


A. Provide protective guards on all fire alarm devices in cafeterias, multipurpose rooms, gymnasiums, weight rooms, locker rooms, boiler rooms, mechanical rooms, loading docks, receiving areas, pipe spaces, pipe tunnels, stages, storage rooms, shops and shafts, on the building exterior, and other spaces and areas where [devices are] subject to damage or accidental operation from sports, physical activities, general housekeeping, maintenance, or the movement of supplies, materials, furniture and equipment.

B. Provide pull station protective covers on all fire alarm pull stations that are located in common areas or otherwise subject to false alarm.

C. Guards are not required where the physical construction of the equipment provides adequate protection against damage.

D. Install guards after finish painting is completed.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Electrical Specification Sections Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Electrical Specification Sections Section "Electrical Identification."

C. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

D. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Electrical Specification Sections Section "Grounding."

D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.

E. Ground radio alarm transmitter system and equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and connections and to supervise pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing.

B. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the compliance of the system with requirements of Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.

C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.



D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.

E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Test the fire alarm control panels, annunciators, and each new or relocated alarm initiating, indicating or interfacing device in the presence of the Contractor, Owner's Architect's and Engineer's Representative, and the Local Fire Subcode Official. Minimum required tests are as follows:

1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device. 3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the

circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record drawings.

4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.

5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used.

6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.

7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level.

8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.

F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and complies with applicable standards.

G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests.

H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed.

3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.



3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment and schedules. Provide a minimum of 8 hours' training.

2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a training aid.

3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

3.9 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three requested visits to Project site for this purpose.



LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches. 2. Indoor Outdoor and indoor photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor occupancy sensors. 4. Outdoor motion sensors. 5. Lighting contactors. 6. Emergency shunt relays. 7. Switchbox Sensors and Timers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES


1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 2. Cooper Controls. 3. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 4. Intermatic, Inc. 5. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 6. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company. 7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 8. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 9. Square D; Schneider Electric. 10. TORK. 11. Touch-Plate, Inc. 12. Watt Stopper (The). 13. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: DPST or DPDT as indicated on the Drawings or required for the application.

2. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 2. Cooper Controls. 3. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 4. Intermatic, Inc. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 6. Novitas, Inc. 7. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 8. Square D; Schneider Electric. 9. TORK. 10. Touch-Plate, Inc. 11. Watt Stopper (The). 12. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts as indicated on the Drawings or required for the application rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lx), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range , and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.



2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2,

and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

2.3 INDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 3. Cooper Controls. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc; Cutler-Hammer Products. 5. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 6. Intermatic, Inc. 7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 8. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems. 9. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 10. Square D; Schneider Electric. 11. TORK. 12. Touch-Plate, Inc. 13. Watt Stopper (The). 14. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Ceiling-Mounted Photoelectric Switch: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate relay unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. Cadmium sulfide photo resistors are not acceptable.

1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for loads and voltages. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

3. Light-Level Monitoring Range with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with dead band adjustment.

5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.4 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Cooper Controls. 2. Hubbell Lighting. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. RAB Lighting, Inc. 6. Sensor Switch, Inc. 7. TORK.



8. Watt Stopper (The). 9. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lx); keep lighting

off when selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet (4.3 m).

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of



technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. 3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 4. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control. 5. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 6. Hubbell Lighting. 7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 8. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems. 9. Square D; Schneider Electric. 10. TORK. 11. Touch-Plate, Inc. 12. Watt Stopper (The). 13. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings or required for the

application, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure.

C. BAS Interface: Provide hardware interface to enable the BAS to monitor and control lighting contactors.

1. Monitoring: On-off status. 2. Control: On-off operation.



2.6 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY


1. Cooper Controls. 2. Lighting Control and Design, Inc. 3. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.

1. Coil Rating: 120 or 277 volt to suit application.

2.7 SWITCHBOX SENSORS AND TIMERS


1. Cooper Controls. 2. Hubbell Lighting. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 4. Watt Stopper (The). 5. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Single-Technology Switchbox Occupancy Sensors.

1. Description: PIR or ultrasonic type with integral power-switching contacts rated for 600 W at 120-V ac, 1000 W at 277-V ac, suitable for incandescent light fixtures or fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts.

a. Include ground wire. b. Vandal-resistant hard lens. c. Minimum 180-degree coverage; 300 sq. ft. at floor level; 150 sq. ft. at desk height. d. Selectable Automatic ON or Manual ON, field set for Manual ON unless otherwise

indicated. e. Automatic Delayed OFF, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 - 30 minutes, field

set for 10 minutes unless otherwise indicated; and Manual OFF. f. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (215 to 2150 lx); keeps

lighting off when selected lighting level is present (not activated unless indicated).

C. Dual-Technology Switchbox Occupancy Sensors.

1. Description: Combination PIR and ultrasonic type with integral power-switching contacts rated for 600 W at 120-V ac, 1000 W at 277-V ac, suitable for incandescent light fixtures or fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts.

a. Include ground wire. b. Vandal-resistant hard lens. c. Minimum 180-degree coverage; 300 sq. ft. at floor level; 150 sq. ft. at desk height.



d. Selectable Automatic ON or Manual ON, field set for Manual ON unless otherwise indicated.

e. Automatic Delayed OFF, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 - 30 minutes, field set for 10 minutes unless otherwise indicated; and Manual OFF.

f. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (215 to 2150 lx); keeps lighting off when selected lighting level is present (not activated unless indicated).

D. Switchbox Timers

1. Description: Integral power-switching contacts rated for 600 W at 120-V ac, 1000 W at 277-V ac, suitable for incandescent light fixtures or fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts.

a. Include ground wire. b. Manual ON. c. Automatic Delayed OFF, adjustable over a minimum range of 5 - 30 minutes, field

set for 10 minutes unless otherwise indicated; and Manual OFF.


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Electrical Specification Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Electrical Specification Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Electrical Specification Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.


A. Wiring Method: Comply with Electrical Specification Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch (21 mm).



B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified in Electrical Specification Section "Network Lighting Controls."

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to General Requirements Specification Section "Demonstration and Training."



LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 24 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 09 24 – LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes manually operated, microprocessor based, digital, lighting controls with external signal source, relays and control module.


1. “Lighting Control Devices” for photoelectric switches and occupancy sensors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

B. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, me-tered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabu-lated reports, and event logs.

C. RS-485: A serial network protocol, similar to RS-232, complying with TIA/EIA-485-A.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For control modules, power distribution components, manual switches and plates, and conductors and cables.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific ap-plication on this Project.

1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and clearance and access requirements.

2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram.



C. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that lighting controls are compatible with connected monitoring and control devices and systems specified in other Sections.

1. Show interconnecting signal and control wiring and interfacing devices that prove compatibility of inputs and outputs.

2. For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements from manufacturers that input and output devices meet interoperability requirements of the network protocol.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control module and power distribution components through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in-tended use.

C. Comply with 47 CFR, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components.

1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting control functions.

2. Coordinate lighting controls with that in Sections specifying distribution components that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.

B. Coordinate lighting control components specified in this Section with components specified in Section "Panelboards."

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or re-place components of lighting controls that fail in materials or workmanship or from transient voltage surges within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Failure of modular relays to operate under manual or software commands.

b. Damage of electronic components due to transient voltage surges.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Extended Warranty Period Failure Due to Transient Voltage Surges: Eight years:

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Electrically Held Relays: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: The lighting control system is design based on Hubbell Building Auto-mation subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Watt Stopper (The). 2. Synergy Lighting Control, Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc. 4. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems. 5. Or Approved Equal.

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Expandability: System shall be capable of increasing the number of control functions in the fu-ture by 25 percent of current capacity; to include equipment ratings, housing capacities, spare relays, terminals, number of conductors in control cables, and control software.

B. Provide 25 percent spare capacity as indicated, to include equipment ratings, housing capaci-ties, spare relays, terminals, number of conductors in control cables, and control software.

C. Performance Requirements: Manual switch operation sends a signal to programmable-system control module that processes the signal according to its programming and routes an open or close command to one or more relays in the power-supply circuits to groups of lighting fixtures or other loads.

D. The system control panel shall be provided with TCP-IP and RS-485 network modules for fu-ture.

E. Exterior Lighting: Exterior building and site lighting shall be controlled by master photocell/time of day, as director by owner, as indicated on the electrical drawings.



F. Interior Lighting: All lighting in corridors, restrooms and main office reception area shall be con-trolled by time of day with an all on/off digital override button switch located at main entrance as indicated on the electrical drawings.

G. Interior Lighting: All life safety night lighting in corridors, restrooms and stairwell shall only be controlled by digital all on/off key override switch located at main entrance as indicated on the electrical drawings.

H. Interior Lighting: Classroom lighting shall be controlled by stand-alone digital lighting control panels per classroom. Panels shall have inputs for teacher control station switch, occupancy sensors, and daylight sensors as indicated on the electrical drawings.

I. Interior Lighting: Stand-alone rooms and offices shall be controlled by occupancy sensors and wall switches as indicated on the electrical drawings.

2.3 CONTROL MODULE

A. Control Module Description: Comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205); microprocessor-based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit. Output circuits shall be switched on or off by internally programmed time signals or by program-controlled analog or digital signals from ex-ternal sources. Output circuits shall be pilot-duty relays compatible with power switching devic-es. An integral keypad shall provide local programming and control capability. A key-locked cover and a programmed security access code shall protect keypad use. An integral alphanu-meric LCD or LED shall display menu-assisted programming and control.

2.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS

A. Modular Relay Panel: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14) and UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205); factory assembled with modular single-pole relays, power supplies, and accessory components required for specified performance.

1. Cabinet: Steel with hinged, locking door.

a. Barriers separate low-voltage and line-voltage components. b. Directory: Mounted on back of door. Identifies each relay as to load

groups controlled and each programmed pilot device if any. c. Control Power Supply: Transformer and full-wave rectifier with filtered dc

output.

2. Single-Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil, momentary-pulsed type.

a. Low-Voltage Leads: Plug connector to the connector strip in cabinet and pilot light power where indicated.

b. Rated Capacity (Mounted in Relay Panel): 20 A, 125-V ac for tungsten filaments; 20 A, 277-V ac for ballasts.

c. Endurance: 50,000 cycles at rated capacity. d. Mounting: Provision for easy removal and installation in relay cabinet.

B. Line-Voltage Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of 120-V ac, solid-state control panels.



2.5 MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES

A. Push-Button Switches: Modular, momentary-contact, low-voltage type.

1. Match color specified in Section "Wiring Devices." 2. Integral green LED pilot light to indicate when circuit is on. 3. Internal white LED locator light to illuminate when circuit is off.

B. Manual, Maintained Contact, Full- or Low-Voltage Switch: Comply with Section "Wiring Devic-es."

C. Wall Plates: Single and multigang plates as specified in Section "Wiring Devices."

D. Legend: Engraved or permanently silk-screened on wall plate where indicated. Use designa-tions indicated on Drawings


A. All wiring shall be provided per manufacturer’s recommendations and shall meet manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, comply-ing with Section "Conductors and Cables."

C. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cables: Multi-conductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Section "Conductors and Cables."

D. Class 1 Control Cables: Multi-conductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG, complying with Section "Conductors and Cables."

E. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Cables: Unshielded, twisted-pair cable with copper conductors, complying with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6 for horizontal copper cable or manufacturer’s rec-ommended cables. Cabling."

F. All wiring shall be installed in conduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install electrical work as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instruc-tions and complying with applicable portions of NEC, the American Electricians Handbook; the National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2; and National Electrical Contractors Association’s Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction NECA 1-2000.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways. Comply with Section "Wiring Systems." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm).



D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate pow-er-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written in-structions.

E. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Category A lo-cations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.

F. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in termi-nal cabinets, equipment enclosures, and in junction, pull, and outlet boxes.

H. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section "Electrical Identifica-tion."

I. Outdoor photoelectric switch shall be integrated into panel. It shall be used for control of lights that are scheduled to turn on at dusk, to turn off at dawn, or both.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to in-spect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including con-nections, and assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test for circuit continuity. 2. Verify that the control module features are operational. 3. Check operation of local override controls. 4. Test system diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components

selected by Architect.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors and to assist Owner's personnel in making pro-gram changes to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting controls. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."



THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEM 26 09 33 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 09 33 – THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Electrical Contractor, as part of the work of this section, shall provide, install and test a complete lighting control system as specified herein for areas indicated on the drawings and circuit schedules.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wire, connectors, hardware and other incidental items necessary for the complete and proper operation of the lighting control system.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to:

1. General Conditions 2. Electrical Section General Provisions 3. Conduit 4. Wire and Cable


A. The system shall be designed for the control of architectural and theatrical lighting and shall consist of factory pre-wired dimming and processing rack enclosures containing dimmers, relays, power supplies, breakers, terminals and/or control electronics.

B. System shall work in conjunction with specified low-voltage control stations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer shall provide 6 sets of full system submittals. Submittals shall include:

1. Full system riser diagram(s) illustrating interconnection of system components, wiring requirements, back box sizes and any special installation considerations.

2. Full set of printed technical data sheets.

3. Detailed set of dimmer schedules

4. Detailed set of circuit and control schedules, including a complete list of all deviations from specifications.

B. Manufacturer shall provide any additional information, including equipment demonstrations, as required by the engineer or specifier to verify compliance with specifications.


A. Manufacturer shall be one who has been continuously engaged in the manufacturer of lighting control equipment for a minimum of ten years. All dimmer and cabinet fabrication must take place in a U.S.manufacturing plant.

B. The manufacturer shall have a factory authorized stocking service center with at least one full time service technician on staff located within 150 miles of the job site. In addition, the manufacturer shall have a toll free 24-hour hotline with a maximum response time of 20 minutes,



24 hours a day and 365 days a year.

C. All equipment, where applicable standards have been established, shall be built to the standards of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., the National Electric Code and the United States Institute for Theater Technology. Permanently installed power distribution equipment such as dimmer racks and distribution shall be UL and C-UL Listed, and/or CE marked (where applicable) and bear the appropriate labels. Portable equipment such as consoles and fixtures shall be UL and C-UL Listed, ETL Listed and/or CE marked (where applicable) and bear the appropriate labels.

1.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The basis-of-design for the equipment herein specified is by Electronic Theatre Controls

B. Other “approved” manufacturer in accordance with electrical specification section “Special Requirements”.

1. Leviton.

2. Cooper Controls.

3. Or Approved Equal.

C. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for controls systems that meet or exceed the specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 ELECTRONIC LOW VOLTAGE DIMMER MODULES

A. General

1. The Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Dimmer Module as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. (ETC) shall provide Reverse Phase Control dimming for electronic low-voltage transformers.

2. The ELV module shall be a dual density, fully rated dimmer

a. ELV10 modules shall provide two 10A dimmers, with each dimmer rated for 1.2kW at 120V

b. HEL5V modules shall provide two 5A dimmers, with each dimmer rated for 1.2kW at 240V

c. AELV5 modules shall be dual 5A modules, with each dimmer rated for 1.4kW at 277V

3. The module shall be UL and cUL Listed for continuous duty at 100% of rated load.

B. Mechanical

1. ETC dimmer modules shall be designed for use with Unison or Sensor dimming racks.

2. Dimmer modules shall consist of a heavy-duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with an integral faceplate. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine-texture, scratch-resistant gray epoxy powder coat.

3. With the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts.

4. Each module shall be labeled with the manufacturers name, catalog number and rating.

5. All electronic components (current/voltage sensors and indicators) shall be contained in a single field-replaceable housing.

C. Electrical

1. Each dimmer shall consist of the following components:



a. Two single-pole circuit breakers

1. Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic to eliminate nuisance tripping and so the trip current shall not be affected by ambient temperature.

2. Circuit breakers shall be rated for tungsten loads having an inrush rating of no less than 20 times normal current.

3. Circuit breakers shall have a 125%, 10-120 seconds, must-trip rating. 4. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent switching duty

applications.

b. A solid-state switching module

1. Each dimmer module shall use a solid-state relay (SSR) consisting of two MOSFET semi-conductors, and all required gating circuitry on the high-voltage side of an integral, opto-coupled control voltage isolator. Dimmers employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or other isolating devices not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation shall not be acceptable.

2. The SSR shall also contain a control LED, an output LED, an error LED, and silver-plated control and load contacts.

3. The entire SSR shall be sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a screwdriver to replace.

4. Dimmer modules requiring disassembly, heat sink grease, or additional tools for repair shall not be acceptable.

c. Power and control connectors

1. Modules shall not have any protruding pins subject to physical damage when the module is not installed.

2. Power efficiency for ELV dimmers shall be at least 99 percent at full load with a no-load loss of 3V RMS.

3. Standard fault current protection shall be 100,000A at 120V, 65,000A at 240 or 277V [Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)]

2.2 DIMMER MODULES

A. Mechanical

1. ETC dimmer modules shall be designed for use with Unison or Sensor dimming racks.





B. Electrical


a. One or two single-pole circuit breakers

1. Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic so the trip current is not affected by ambient temperature.




3. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent switching duty applications.

b. A solid-state switching module

1. Each dimmer module shall use a solid-state relay (SSR) consisting of two silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) in an inverse parallel configuration, and all required gating circuitry on the high-voltage side of an integral, opto-coupled control voltage isolator. Rectifiers, copper leads and a ceramic substrate shall be reflow soldered to an integral heat sink for maximum heat dissipation. Dimmers employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or other isolating devices not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation shall not be acceptable.

2. The SSR shall also contain a control LED, a thermistor for temperature sensing, and silver-plated control and load contacts.

3. The entire SSR shall be sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a screwdriver to replace.

4. Dimmer modules requiring disassembly, heat sink grease, or additional tools for repair shall not be acceptable.

c. Toroidal filters

1. Dimmer modules shall include toroidal filters to reduce the rate of current rise time resulting from switching the SCRs. The filter shall limit objectionable harmonics, reduce lamp filament sing and limit radio frequency interference on line and load conductors.

2. Modules shall be available in models offering 200-500 microsecond filter rise times depending upon model. Rise time shall be measured at the worst case slew rate (about 50 percent) from 10 to 90 percent of the output waveform with the dimmer operating at full load.

d. Power and control connectors.


2. Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load with a no-load loss of 3V RMS.

3. The dimmer shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer.

4. Standard AIC fault current protection shall be 10,000 at 120V and 14,000 at 230V/277V.

2.3 RELAY MODULES

A. Mechanical

1. ETC relay modules shall be designed for use with Unison or Sensor dimming racks.


3. Modules constructed of molded plastic for structural support are not equivalent and are not acceptable.






B. Electrical


a. One or two single-pole circuit breakers




b. Power and control connectors.


2. Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load with a no-load loss of 3V RMS.

3. The relay shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer.

4. Relay modules shall be UL and cUL(120V, 240V and 277V listed) or CE marked (230V) power control devices with Standard SCCR fault current protection shall be 100,000 Amps at 120V and 24,000 Amps at 230V, 240V and 277V.

2.4 CONSTANT MODULES

A. Mechanical

1. ETC constant modules shall be designed for use with Unison or Sensor dimming racks.

2. Constant modules shall consist of a heavy-duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with an integral faceplate. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine-texture, scratch-resistant gray epoxy powder coat.



B. Electrical

1. Each module shall consist of the following components:

a. Two single-pole circuit breakers




b. Power and control connectors.




2. The module shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load up to the full rated capacity.

3. Standard SCCR fault current protection shall be 100,000 at 120V and 24,000 at 230V, 240V and 277V.

2.5 Unison DRd Series Rack Enclosures

A. The rack enclosure shall be the Unison DRd Series Control Enclosure as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

B. Mechanical

1. The Rack Enclosure shall be a surface mounted, deadfront switchboard, constructed of 18-guage formed steel panels with a hinged, lockable full-height door containing an integral electrostatic air filter.

a. Filter shall be removable for easy cleaning.

b. The enclosure shall support one control processor and one station power module plus accessories

c. The enclosure door shall have an opening to allow limited access to the control module face panel.

d. The enclosure door shall be lockable.

2. All rack components shall be properly treated and finished.

a. Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine textured, scratch-resistant, epoxy paint.

3. The fully digital rack enclosure shall be available with six or twelve dimmer module spaces, one processor and a single station power supply, Rack dimensions and weights (without modules) shall not exceed:

a. DRd6 21.9" H x 17" W x 9.6" D 38 lb.

b. DRd12 31.0" H x 17" W x 9.6" D 51 lb.

4. A single low-noise fan shall be located at the top of each rack. The fan shall draw all intake air through the integral electrostatic air filter, over the surfaces of the module housing and out the top of the rack.

a. The fan shall maintain the temperature of all components at proper operating levels with dimmers under full load, provided the ambient temperature of the dimmer room does not exceed 40°C/104°F.

b. In the event of an over-temperature condition, only the affected dimmer module(s) shall shut down. A red indicator LED will flash and an error message shall appear on the Control Processor.

5. Rack Enclosures shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of dimmer and control modules without the use of tools. (230 volt racks with CE certification shall require a screwdriver.)

a. Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of modules into power and signal connector blocks.

b. With modules removed, racks shall provide clear front access to all load, neutral and control wire terminations.

6. Rack Enclosures shall support use of any combination of rack option cards designed to provide additional rack features. Rack option cards shall include:

a. FLO - The Fluorescent Option Board shall provide termination for 4 wire low voltage electronic fluorescent dimming ballasts. FLO shall provide 24, 0-10Vdc



outputs.

b. DALI - The DALI Option Board shall provide termination for DALI fluorescent dimming ballasts. DRd shall provide 24, DALI outputs for up to 63 ballasts each in a broadcast mode.

7. Optional floor mounting pedestal shall be available for the 12-module rack.

8. Racks enclosures shall be designed for use with AX series auxiliary racks for Main Circuit Breaker, Main Lug, and cross bussing applications.

9. Accessories

a. RideThru Option (RTO)

1. The Rack Enclosure shall support an optional, short-term back-up power source for the control electronics.

2. The short-term back-up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself.

3. The short-term back-up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power.

4. The short-term back-up power source shall support the control electronics for at least 10 seconds.

b. BatteryPack Option (BPO)

1. The Rack Enclosure shall support an optional, long-term back-up power source for the control electronics.

2. The long-term back-up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself.

3. The long-term back-up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power.

4. A test switch/indicator shall be available without opening the rack door or removal of any modules/components.

5. The long-term back-up power source shall supply power to the control electronics for at least 90 minutes.

C. Electrical

1. Rack enclosures shall be available in 100, 120, 230, 240 and 277 volt, three-phase, main lug configurations.

a. 120 volt rack enclosures shall be field configurable for single phase operation without the need for additional components

2. Rack enclosures shall be completely pre-wired by the manufacturer. The contractor shall provide input feed, load, and control wiring.

3. Standard Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR) shall be 22,000 at 100-277 Volt

a. Higher SCCR ratings, up to 100,000 amps SCCR at 120V, shall be possible when used with an AX series Auxiliary Rack Enclosure.

b. Higher SCCR ratings, up to 65,000 amps SCCR at 240V and 277V, shall be possible when used with an AX series Auxiliary Rack Enclosure.

4. All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors.

5. Rack enclosures shall support dimming for incandescent, fluorescent, neon, cold



cathode, electronic low voltage and magnetic low voltage transformer load types.

6. The rack enclosure shall support 16-bit DMX input

7. The rack enclosure shall support 65,000 steps of dimming.

8. The rack enclosure dimming engine shall support multiple dimmer curves including modified square law, linear, switched, fluorescent, pre-heat and electronic low voltage.

9. The rack enclosure shall support voltage regulation including, minimum and maximum scale voltages with offsets

10. Rack enclosure shall support a UL924 listed contact input for emergency lighting control bypass

a. Emergency lighting input shall support load shedding

11. Rack enclosures shall be designed to support the following wire terminations:

a. AC

b. Echelon link power (Belden 8471 or equivalent)

c. 24Vdc (2- 16AWG Wire)

d. DMX512A Port A (In or Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent)

e. DMX512A Port B (Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent)

f. RS232 Serial In/Out (Belden 9729 or equivalent)

g. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5/5e Ethernet

h. Contact Closure In (14AWG to 26AWG Wire)

i. Contact Closure Out (14AWG to 26AWG Wire)

1. Contact Closure Out shall provide 1A @ 30vDC

12. Station Power Modules

a. Station power modules shall provide LinkPower for up to 32 stations and 1.5A@24VDC of Auxiliary (AUX) power.

b. Station power repeater modules shall provide LinkPower for 30 stations and1.5A@24VDC of Auxiliary (AUX) power.

c. Station power module shall support over-current/short protection for LinkPower and Auxiliary (AUX) power. LinkPower shall support fault detection on each leg of the balanced data bus.

13. All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors.

14. Main feed lugs shall accept a maximum of 350 MCM wire.

15. Load terminals shall accept a maximum of #6 AWG wire.

D. Thermal

1. Ambient room temperature: 0-40°C / 32-104°F

2. Ambient humidity: 10-90% non-condensing

2.6 Button, Button/Fader and Interface Stations

A. Button Stations

1. The Lighting Control Stations shall be the Unison Heritage UH Series Control Stations as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

2. Mechanical



a. Unison Heritage Button stations shall operate using up to ten programmable buttons.

b. All button stations shall be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black faceplates, and buttons.

1. Manufacturer's standard colors shall conform to the RAL CLASSIC Standard.

c. Stations shall have indicators lights at each button or fader.

1. Indicators shall be comprised of red, green and blue LED's

2. Indicator color and state (steady On, Blink, Off) shall be configured in software, and shall operate relative to the button or fader it is associated with.

d. All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting.

e. Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment.

f. Station faceplates shall be indelibly marked for each button or fader function.

g. The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for flush mounted half gang stations and for all surface mounted stations.

h. All Button and Button/Fader stations shall be shall be designed to accept the infrared signal from a remote hand held IR transmitter.

1. The stations shall have a 60° reception angle and shall operate reliably within a 45' distance.

i. IR Transmitters shall be available in seven or twelve button configurations. Custom transmitters may have up to 10 programmable buttons.

1. IR transmitters shall be mounted in a hand-held black plastic controller. Transmitter dimensions shall be 1.875" wide, 6.625" long and 0.60" deep.

3. Electrical

a. Unison control station wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network.

1. Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit).

2. Touchscreen and Interface stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free.

3. Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.

4. Network insulation displacement connectors shall be provided with all stations.

4. Functional

a. The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Button, Button/Fader, and Interface or Astronomical time clock controls. System shall allow the programming of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events.



1. System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader, Touchscreen, or LightDesigner software.

a. Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 1,000 hours with a resolution of one millisecond.

b. Presets shall be selectable via button, fader, IR transmitter, time clock event, macro activation or switch interface stations.

2. System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software.

a. Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow the application of conditional logic.

b. Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or LightDesigner software.

3. System time clock events shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server.

a. Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types.

b. Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time.

b. Station Button, Button/Fader, and Interface) control components shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program.

1. Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, cue light, or room join/separate.

2. Optional fader functions include manual master control, individual zone control, fade rate control or preset master control.

c. Stations (Button and Button/Fader) shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner.

B. Button/Fader Stations


2. Mechanical

a. Unison Heritage Button/Fader Stations shall operate using up to sixteen programmable faders and twelve programmable buttons.

b. All button/fader stations shall be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black faceplates, fader knobs, and buttons.




c. Fader stations shall utilize standard 45-millimeter slide potentiometers.

d. Stations shall have indicators lights at each button or fader.

1. Indicators shall be comprised of red, green and blue LED's

2. Indicator color and state (steady On, Blink, Off) shall be configured in software, and shall operate relative to the button or fader it is associated with.

e. All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting.

f. Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment.

g. Station faceplates shall be indelibly marked for each button or fader function.

h. The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for flush mounted half gang stations and for all surface mounted stations.

i. All Button and Button/Fader stations shall be shall be designed to accept the infrared signal from a remote hand held IR transmitter.

1. The stations shall have a 60° reception angle and shall operate reliably within a 45' distance.

j. IR Transmitters shall be available in seven or twelve button configurations. Custom transmitters may have up to 10 programmable buttons.

1. IR transmitters shall be mounted in a hand-held black plastic controller. Transmitter dimensions shall be 1.875" wide, 6.625" long and 0.60" deep.

3. Electrical






4. Functional

a. The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Button, Button/Fader, and Interface, or Astronomical time clock controls. System shall allow the programming of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events.












b. Station Button, Button/Fader, and Interface) control components shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program.




C. Connector Stations


2. Mechanical

a. Unison connector stations shall provide an interface to portable Unison stations.

b. All connector stations shall be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black faceplates, fader knobs, and buttons.


c. All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting.

d. Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment.

e. Station faceplates shall be indelibly marked for each function.



f. The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for flush mounted half gang stations and for all surface mounted stations.

3. Electrical






4. Functional

a. The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Button, Button/Fader, and Interface or Astronomical time clock controls. System shall allow the programming of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events.










b. Station Button, Button/Fader, and Interface) control components shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions.



Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program.




D. Contact Interface Station


2. General

a. Unison Contact Interface shall provide direct interface (in and out) to external devices via contact closure. Interface enclosure shall consist of 16 input connections and 16 output connections.

3. Mechanical

a. The surface mount enclosure and cover shall be constructed of 16- gauge (.08) steel and are finished in black smooth matte powder coat paint. The enclosure shall be 14" W x 10.5" H x 3" D.

b. Conduit access points shall be provided on the top and bottom of the unit.

c. The assembly shall consist of up to 16 connections; 8 inputs functionally coupled with 8 normally open relay contact outputs. Inputs and outputs may be configured as either maintained or momentary.

4. Electrical

d. Unison control station wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network.





e. Ratings:

1. The Input Rating shall be 5V@10mA (unit requires dry contact closure)

2. Dry contact outputs shall consist of:

a. Normally-Open 2-pole contact closure outputs;

a. 1A@30Vdc.

b. .5A@120V



2.7 DATA PLUG-IN STATIONS

A. General

1. The Plug-in Stations shall consist of the appropriate connectors required for the functional intent of the system. These stations shall be available with DMX input or output, Remote Focus Unit, Network, or architectural control connectors. Custom control connectors shall be available.

B. Connector Options

1. The following standard components shall be available for Plug-in Stations:

a. 5-Pin male XLR connectors for DMX input

b. 5-Pin female XLR connectors for DMX output

c. 6-Pin female XLR connectors for RFU and ETCLink connections

d. RJ45 connectors for Network connections - Twisted Pair

e. 6-Pin female DIN connectors for Unison connections

f. DB9 female serial connector for architectural control from a computer

2. Custom combinations and custom control connections shall be available.

C. Physical

1. Station faceplates shall be .80" aluminum, finished in fine texture, scratch-resistant black powder coat. Silk-screened graphics shall be white.

2. The station panel shall mount into an industry standard back box, depending on size and quantity of connectors. A terminal block shall be supplied for contractor terminations.

2.8 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL PROCESSOR MODULES

A. The Architectural Control Processor shall be the Unison Paradigm P-ACP Series Control Processor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

B. Mechanical

1. The Architectural Control Processor (ACP) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures.

2. The processor shall utilize microprocessor based, solid state technology to provide multi-scene lighting and building control.

3. ACP module electronics shall be contained in a plug-in assembly.

a. The module shall be housed in a formed steel body and contain no discrete wire connections.

1. No tools shall be required for module removal or insertion.

4. The ACP shall be convection cooled.

5. User Interface

a. The ACP shall utilize a backlit liquid crystal display capable of graphics and eight lines of text.

b. The ACP shall provide an alpha-numeric keypad for data entry and navigation

c. The ACP shall provide a touch-sensitive control wheel for navigation.



d. The ACP shall provide shortcut buttons to assist in navigation, selection, and data entry.

e. The ACP keypad, buttons, and wheel shall be backlit for use in low-light conditions.

1. The backlight shall have a user selectable time out, including no time out.

6. The ACP shall provide a front-panel RJ45 jack for Ethernet connection to the processor for configuration, live control, and web-browser-based system access.

a. The Ethernet port shall be secured behind the locking door.

7. The ACP shall provide a Secure Digital (SD) Removable Media slot on the front panel for transfer of configuration data.

a. The SD slot shall be secured behind the locking door.

8. The ACP shall provide a Universal Serial Bus (USB) port on the front panel for transfer of configuration data.

a. The USB port shall be secured behind the locking door.

9. Architectural Lighting System configuration and program information shall be stored in flash memory, which does not require battery backup.

a. The ACP shall provide a Compact Flash (CF) Card as backup flash memory and storage.

b. The CF Card is stored in the back of the ACP, and can be accessed only by removing the ACP.

c. The ACP data can be exchanged by inserting the CF card into another ACP.

C. Electrical

1. The ACP shall require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be terminated into Dimming or Control Enclosure.

2. The ACP shall require low-voltage power supplied by the Dimming or Control enclosure.

3. The ACP shall be hot-swap capable.

4. The ACP shall support Echelon LinkPower communications with remote devices, including button stations, button/fader stations, Touchscreen stations, sensors, and third party LonMARK compliant products.

a. The LinkPower network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class II twisted pair wiring, type Belden 8471 (unshielded) or Belden 8719 (shielded) or equivalent. One # 14 AWG drain wire will be required for system not using grounded metal conduit. Touchscreen stations, interface stations and portable stations connectors will also require (2) #16 AWG wires.

b. The LinkPower network shall be topology free. Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.

c. Link power wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) without a repeater. Repeater option modules shall be available to increase wiring maximums in increments of 1640 ft. (500m)

d. Link power wiring between stations shall not exceed 1313 ft. (400m).

5. The ACP shall support 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af compliant



Ethernet networking using TCP/IP, ESTA BSR E1.17 Advanced Control Networks (ACN) and ESTA BSR E1.31 (sACN) Protocols for internal communication and integration with third-party equipment.

6. The ACP shall support EIA-RS232 serial protocol for bi-directional command and communication with third-party equipment.

7. The ACP shall support two discrete ESTA DMX512A ports, configurable as input or output ports.*

a. *When used in a Dimming Enclosure, the second port is always an output port.

8. The ACP shall provide four onboard dry contact closure inputs for integration with third-party products.

9. The ACP shall provide four onboard contact closure outputs, rated at 1A@30VDC, for integration with third-party equipment.

D. Functional

1. Capacity

a. Shall support 1024 channels of control

b. Shall support 2 physical DMX ports, each of which may be configured as an input or output

2. System

a. Runtime application shall utilize support Net3 system interoperability

b. System shall support the use of Network Time Protocol for real time clock synchronization

c. System shall support remote firmware upload an over Ethernet connection from a connected PC running the Light Designer software or another connected processor.

d. System shall support local firmware upload from removable media (SD Card, USB Flash Drive)

3. Diagnostics

a. Shall output an Event log

b. Standard log shall store a fixed-length history of recent activity

c. Separate critical log shall only store important messages (such as boot-up settings)

4. Configuration Data

a. Configuration Data can be uploaded over an Ethernet connection from a PC running Light Designer application

b. Configuration Data can be retrieved from another Paradigm Processor

c. A Paradigm Processor shall make its configuration data available for retrieval by another Processor as a backup/recovery mechanism

d. Configuration Data shall be stored on solid-state media that can be removed to facilitate transfer between Processor units

e. Configuration Data may be loaded to and from removable media access provided on front panel

f. Configuration Data for the entire System shall be available for download from any single Processor



g. Shall store configuration data for Dimming enclosure processors and shall make available for download

5. Scalability

a. Adding additional Processors to a System shall proportionately increase its overall capabilities up to a maximum System size

b. The maximum number of Processors configured as a System shall be at least 12

c. Multiple Processors shall utilize the Ethernet network to remain time synchronized and share control information

d. Multiple Processors shall utilize the Ethernet network to maintain configuration data synchronization as modifications are made

e. Failure of a single Processor shall not prohibit continuing operation of the remaining Processors

f. It shall be possible for multiple Systems to coexist on the same physical network with logical isolation between Systems

6. Local User Interface

a. Shall provide access to Processor setup (IP address)

b. Shall provide access to Processor status and diagnostics

c. Where the Processor is installed within a Dimming enclosure, shall provide access to Dimming enclosure setup, status and diagnostics

d. Shall provide control functionality for Control Channels, Zones, Fixtures, Groups, Presets, Macros, Walls and Sequences within the current configuration.

e. Shall provide functionality to schedule astronomical and real time events (add/edit/delete)

f. Shall allow for display of local DMX information

g. Shall allow for transfer of log files to local removable media

h. Shall allow to perform firmware upgrades for connected Dimming enclosures

i. Shall allow for transfer of configuration to and from Dimming enclosures using removable media

j. Shall allow for transfer of configuration to and from LCD Stations using removable media

k. Shall allow for binding of Stations

7. Access Controls

a. There shall be 2 user accounts - Administrator, and User with separate password protection

b. Account and password settings shall be local to each Processor

c. Access Controls shall be applied to certain areas of the Paradigm Local User Interface and Web Interface

8. Web User Interface

a. Shall be an internal web server accessible via Ethernet port

b. Shall support common web browsers on Windows and Mac platforms



c. Shall provide functionality to Activate and Deactivate Presets

d. Shall provide functionality to schedule timed events (add/delete)

e. Shall display status information

f. Shall display log files

g. Shall allow for configuration of Processor settings (date, time)

h. Shall allow for upload and download of configuration data

i. There shall be links to other web-enabled devices in the System, including other Paradigm Processors

9. Stations

a. Stations shall be connected to a Paradigm Processor via a LinkPower network or Ethernet

b. Station discovery and binding shall be accomplished from the Local User Interface or Light Designer

10. Net3 and ACN Devices

a. Net3 Devices shall be connected to and controlled from Paradigm Processors via Ethernet

b. Paradigm Processors shall provide DMX-Net3 gateway functionality

c. It shall be possible to send and receive Macro triggers defined within the System configuration via Net3

d. There shall be support for Streaming ACN on up to 24 universes per Processor

11. Operation

a. When contained in an dimming enclosure, a snapshot of the dimming enclosure output data shall be stored in persistent memory so that hardware can access it for immediate output on boot

b. DMX output refresh rate shall be configurable

c. There shall be support for 16-bit DMX Attributes

d. DMX inputs may be patched to DMX and Streaming ACN outputs as external sources

e. Streaming ACN inputs shall be patched to DMX outputs (gateway) as external sources

f. Where there are multiple external sources then priority and HTP shall be used to perform arbitration

g. External and internal sources shall be arbitrated based on user-selection of standard or custom rules

h. On Preset Record, the values of Attributes within the Preset shall be updated to reflect the current output

i. The total output may be the combination of many different Presets running concurrently

j. There shall be no hard limit on number of concurrent cross fades

k. Multiple Presets controlling the same Attribute shall first interact based on priority and second based on Latest Takes Precedence(LTP) or Highest Takes Precedence (HTP)



l. LTP and HTP operation shall be supported simultaneously and interact (at the same priority) using HTP

m. Settings due to LTP Presets may be automatically discarded from operation when overridden

n. It shall be possible to specify that a Preset or Attribute Control will persist when overridden

o. A Preset may be designated as an HTP Override and shall cause HTP values to be discarded

p. It shall be possible to modify the rate of a Preset (Cross fades, Effects) from a Control within the System

q. Each Preset shall have a status that can be Activated, Deactivated or Altered

r. Preset status may be set based on matching levels in the current output as an option

s. On startup the System shall be capable of automatically executing timed events within the previous 24 hours to synchronize its initial output state with the current time of day

12. Serial Input/Output

a. RS232 shall support 8-bit word length, parity selection and 1 or 2 stop bits

b. RS232 shall support baud rates from 4800 to 115,200 bps

c. Serial input and output messages are fully customizable

d. Serial output messages can be generated by any Control or Event

2.9 Lighting Control System Configuration and Control Software

A. System Configuration

1. The Architectural Control System Configuration software shall be the Unison Paradigm LightDesigner as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

2. Definitions

a. A System is the configuration of one or more Paradigm Processors

b. A Fixture is a controllable entity with one or more Attributes

c. An Attribute is a parameter of control such as Intensity, Pan or Gobo select

d. A Group is a selection of Fixtures that can be stored and recalled

e. A Space is defined area where other System objects reside. A Space defines the scope of Control for other objects.

f. Room Combine is functionality enabling the scope of control to vary in a pre-defined way based on the current status of a moveable Wall or Walls

g. A Control is a single point of input to the System (e.g. Button, Fader, SerialPort

h. An Indicator is a single point of feedback from the System (e.g. LED, Label on LCD)

i. A Station has an arrangement of Controls and Indicators



j. A Page stores the assignment of function to Controls and Indicators of a particular Station and their properties (e.g. lockout threshold)

k. Actions are items of functionality that can occur within a running Paradigm system in response to events (e.g. button presses, timed events)

l. Preset is a container of Attribute settings (levels) and timings that can stored and recalled

m. A Sequence is a series of connected steps referencing Presets along with additional timing information

n. Effects are Attribute settings that result in continually varying levels following a specified curve and using additional timing parameters (e.g. period, offset)

o. Palette is a container of Attribute settings (levels) that can be referenced from Presets, allowing a change in the Palette to globally modify referenced Presets.

p. Macros are user-defined operations built up as a sequence of Actions that can be recalled

q. Binding is the process of associating a logical instance of a device within the configuration with a physical device discovered at runtime

3. Environment

a. Shall be possible to work with multiple System configurations simultaneously

b. There shall be clipboard functionality (cut, copy, paste) for entire objects (e.g. Presets, Stations), settings (e.g. Attribute levels) and text

c. There shall be undo and redo functionality where persistent changes are made to the System configuration (but not application settings or playback state)

d. There shall be a auto-backup feature

e. The application interface shall be based around (i) a tree-view; (ii) a workspace area; (iii) a properties inspector; (iv) item selector.

f. It shall be possible to represent data about the workspace area graphically (plan) or in tabular form

g. Plan views shall support zoom

h. Plan views shall support a layout grid with user-defined spacing and color with associated snap-to-grid functionality

i. The properties inspector shall be used to view and modify the properties of one or multiple objects

j. There shall be 2 modes of operation that expose progressively more in-depth functionality (NormalAdvanced)

k. It shall be possible to enter User-configurable names in any language supported by their operating system (e.g. encoded as UTF8)

l. User-configurable names shall be limited to 64 display characters each

m. There shall be provision for help functionality to be accessed from within the application

4. System Configuration



a. It shall be possible to create Spaces

b. It shall be possible to add Fixtures by selecting a Fixture Template from the provided library and create custom Fixtures

c. It shall be possible to add Stations by selecting a Station Definition from the provided library and create custom Stations

d. It shall be possible to create a System based on data imported from a defined documentation format (e.g. CSV, XML)

e. It shall be possible to export System configuration data to a defined documentation format (e.g. CSV, XML)

f. There shall be a wizard to assist with the initial setup of a System including Project data entry, Space creation, network configuration, and zone creation.

g. There shall be a straightforward process for the assignment of Fixtures and Stations to particular Processors

h. There shall be a 2-dimensional plan view that displays the layout of Spaces

i. A Space shall be displayed as a user-configurable polygon with straight edges

j. The plan shall display Fixtures and Stations located within Spaces

k. The plan shall display Walls between Spaces and their current state (open, closed)

l. Items displayed on the plan may be arranged using standard graphical interaction methods (e.g. drag-and-drop)

m. It shall be possible to import images JPEG, BMP and GIF formats as a background image to the plan view

n. It shall be possible to create Walls that accomplish Room Combine between Spaces

5. Fixture Configuration

a. There shall be functionality to patch Fixtures to DMX and Streaming ACN

b. There shall be support for Fixtures with split patches (e.g. VL5)

c. There shall be support for multiply-patching a Fixture

d. It shall be possible to swap pan and tilt axes for a moving-light Fixture

e. It shall be possible to specify a minimum and maximum value for an Attribute

f. It shall be possible to specify a minimum fade time for an Attribute

g. It shall be possible to invert the range of values for an Attribute

h. It shall be possible to specify a default value for an Attribute

i. It shall be possible to specify a dimmer curve for an intensity Attribute

6. Design and Simulation

a. There shall be a tabular view of Fixture Attributes within Spaces

b. There shall be control of Zones (as a type of Fixture)

c. There shall be control of LED arrays (as a type of Fixture)

d. There shall be control of moving lights (as a type of Fixture)



e. There shall be independent control of every Attribute of a Fixture

f. Appropriate graphical controls shall be provided for non-intensity Attributes (e.g. color picker)

g. It shall be possible to create Groups as a selection shortcut

h. The plan shall show the current status of Room Combine

i. The plan shall show simulation feedback for Fixtures in a graphical form

j. Feedback values for Attributes shall be displayed in terms of real-world units where an appropriate real-world unit and mapping is available (e.g. pan in degrees)

k. Control events may be simulated by clicking on a representation of the Station in at least the plan view

l. The simulation may be linked to the actual online System to synchronize playback and inject control events (live control)

7. Presets

a. There shall be provision to record a Preset based on current Attribute settings

b. There shall be a display of Presets that affect Fixtures in the Space being worked with and their activation status

c. A Preset may store a reference to a Palette as an Attribute setting

d. Presets may be displayed and modified in tabular form (spreadsheet)

e. Timing in Presets may be set on an individual Attribute basis

f. Timing settings shall include a fade time, a delay time and a fade profile

g. All Presets may include split timing

h. Presets may be applied in an Latest Takes Precedence (LTP) or Highest Takes Precedence (HTP) manner

i. It shall be possible for all Presets to include Effects

j. Each Effect shall have a Curve and parameters (to include size, period, offset and repeat count)

k. There shall be support for a flicker effect

l. There shall be a provision to create Sequences from Presets

m. It shall be possible for a Sequence to be displayed and modified as a timeline display

n. It shall be possible for any step of a Sequence to trigger a defined Action

o. The end state of a Sequence shall be user configurable (e.g. release, loop, hold at end)

8. Stations and Events

a. Can assign functionality (Actions) to Controls and Indicators on a Page for a particular Station

b. Stations may have multiple Pages that can be switched between at runtime

c. Controls shall have a configurable event handler (Script) that determines the nature of the control (e.g. momentary vs. maintained button)

d. Actions initiated from a Station shall, by default, be restricted to affecting



the Space containing the Station

e. A Control may be configured so that the Actions it triggers behave as if initiated from a specified Space anywhere in the System

f. Controls shall have a priority that is used when performing operations (e.g. preset activation, fader attribute control)

g. It shall be possible to specify timed events (including repeat intervals hourly, daily, weekly, etc.)

h. It shall be possible to specify astronomical timed events

i. Serial (e.g. RS232, Ethernet) input data shall be treated as a Control event and shall be handled through use of Script (standard or custom)

j. There shall be support for Occupancy functions using proximity sensors connected via Echelon LonTalk or a Contact Interface

k. There shall be support for Daylight Harvesting functions using photo sensors connected via Echelon LonTalk or a Fader Interface.

l. There shall be Override functionality that can be applied to any Control or Event

m. There shall be Lock Out functionality for Controls using 3 distinct lockout variables

n. Direct control of Attributes can be assigned to Controls (e.g. buttons, faders)

o. Mastering of Intensity for Fixtures, Groups or Presets can be assigned to Controls

p. There shall be extensible support for third-party LonMark devices

q. A physical Lon native Station that is portable may automatically bind to different logical Stations within the configuration based on an established physical LON connection

r. There shall be an option to assign default functionality to Controls and Indicators of a Station automatically when it is added to the configuration and update it as the configuration changes

s. There shall be an option to generate a graphical configuration for an Touchscreen automatically based on the current configuration and update it as the configuration changes

t. It shall be possible to import .ics files for display of holidays or other notable dates

9. Actions

a. There shall be a standard Action for toggling the Intensity Attribute of a Fixture or Group (Fixture Toggle)

b. There shall be standard Actions for recalling Presets (Preset Recall)

c. There shall be a standard Action for recording a Preset (Preset Record)

d. There shall be standard Actions for controlling Sequences (Timeline Control)

e. There shall be standard Actions for changing Wall state (Wall Toggle)

f. There shall be a standard Action for raising or lowering the intensity setting of a Fixture or Group



g. There shall be a standard Action for raising or lowering the intensity setting of a Preset

h. There shall be a standard Action that activates Faders within its scope (Manual)

i. There shall be a standard Action that activates Faders on a target station and locks out other Stations within its scope (Take Control)

j. There shall be a standard Action for setting lock out variables for a Station, within a Space or System-wide (Lock Out)

k. There shall be a standard Action for enabling and disabling Overrides

l. There shall be a standard Action for recalling a Macro (Call Macro, Macro Toggle)

m. There shall be a standard Action for turning Off a particular Fixture, Group or Fixtures within a Space (Off)

n. There shall be a standard Action for controlling Fixture or Group Intensity levels from a Fader

o. There shall be a standard Action for controlling Preset Intensity levels from a Fader

p. There shall be a standard Action for mastering Fixture or Group Intensity levels from a Fader

q. There shall be a standard Action for modifying Preset fade times from a Fader

r. There shall be a standard Action for modifying Preset rate from a Fader

s. There shall be an equivalent standard Indicator behavior for every standard Action

t. Qualified users may create custom Actions

10. Macros

a. Users can create, store and recall Macros that are sequences of Actions (standard or custom)

b. Macros may define separate sequences to occur when turned on and off (toggle)

c. Macros may incorporate conditional statements based on current status of the System (e.g. comparisons such as x > y)

d. Conditional statements may be combinations of several simpler statements using logical operators (AND, OR)

11. Script

a. There shall be a mechanism for defining custom functionality using a scripting language

b. The behaviors of Controls and Indicators may be customized through the use of Script

c. Script may be used to define custom functionality (Actions) within the System

d. Script shall allow new functionality to be defined in a manner that is reusable in different Systems

e. Script shall support logical and arithmetic operations



f. Script shall support direct access to System data using names

g. Script shall support creating, reading and writing to persistent System-wide variables (registered variables)

h. Script shall support timer functionality including the capability to cancel a running timer

i. Script shall support logging functionality

j. Standard functionality may be implemented as Scripts that will not be user modifiable

k. A Custom Script may be copied from a suitable Standard Script to provide a starting point

l. Script shall support reading data directly from connected interfaces (e.g. LON NVs, ACN properties, DMX inputs)

m. Script shall support writing data directly to connected interfaces (e.g. LON NVs, ACN properties, DMX outputs, Serial ports)

n. Script shall allow parsing of data (e.g. reading 8 contact inputs as individual bits from a byte of data)

12. Network

a. Shall display a topological view of Paradigm Processors and connected Stations

b. Can associate a particular Station with a Paradigm Processor

c. Shall report online status of Paradigm Processors and Stations

d. Shall allow for configuration of network properties (IP) of Paradigm Processors

e. Shall allow for upload of configuration data to all or individual Paradigm Processors

f. Shall allow for download of configuration data from Paradigm Processors

g. Shall allow for download of logging data from Paradigm Processors

h. Shall provide for performing firmware upgrades to Paradigm Processors

i. Shall allow to perform firmware upgrades for Dimming enclosures using Paradigm Processors as proxies

j. Shall allow for transfer of configuration to and from LCD Stations using Paradigm Processors as proxies

k. Shall allow for discovery and binding of Stations

l. There shall be a mode in which configuration changes are propagated to Processors as they occur without interrupting operation (live edit)

13. Reports

a. It shall be possible to generate tabular reports and customize their layout and appearance

b. It shall be possible to print reports

c. It shall be possible to export reports to file (e.g. CSV)

d. There shall be reports for Presets

e. There shall be reports for Fixtures

f. There shall be reports for Stations



g. There shall be reports for Processors

h. There shall be reports for Macros

14. Resources

a. The installed package shall include a set of LCD Design Themes

b. Effect Curves, Fade Profiles and Dimmer Curves shall use a common format and allow custom variants to be generated by the user

c. Additional Fixture Templates may be defined by the user (custom Fixtures)

d. Additional Station Definitions may be defined by the user (custom Stations)

15. Pharos

a. It shall be possible to add Pharos systems to the configuration for triggering and status monitoring

b. There shall be standard Actions and Indicator behaviors for Pharos integration via Ethernet

B. Touchscreen Station Configuration

1. The Architectural Control System Touchscreen Configuration software shall be the Unison Paradigm ControlDesigner as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

2. The Unison Paradigm ControlDesigner software program shall be an application software package that facilitates off-line Unison Paradigm Touchscreen station configuration.

a. Software setup shall include Configuration and Design Wizards, to create a graphical representation of a control environment.

b. The software program shall be downloadable from the manufacturer's website free of charge.

3. Functions

a. Provides functionality to create and modify Pages for display on a specific type of LCD Station

b. There shall be a wizard to assist with the creation of Pages

c. A single configuration for an LCD Station shall be defined as a set of one or more Pages

d. Each Page shall have a background that may incorporate multiple images or animations

e. Pop-ups can be shown/hidden over any Page in a Configuration and more than one Popup can be shown at once

f. Pages may have multiple design elements that may be Controls, Indicators or both

g. Design elements shall have a user-defined size, position and z-order that cannot be changed from within the System

h. Each design element shall have between 1 and 256 states, each of which can have a distinct appearance

i. The appearance of a state can be taken from a Theme or imported image file



j. There shall be support for import of at least JPG, PNG and GIF image formats

k. Transparency shall be supported

l. Animated images shall be supported

m. Transitions between states of design elements can be animated

n. Page transitions can be animated

o. Design elements shall have a visibility group and threshold

p. Design elements that are Controls shall have a lockout group and threshold

q. All text shall have a user-definable font family, size, color and alignment

r. There shall be at least the following types of design elements

1. Label

2. Level Indicator

3. Button

4. Fader (straight and curved)

5. Clock (analogue and digital)

6. Numeric Keypad

7. Tab widget

s. Themes shall define a collection of consistent appearances and sounds for design elements

t. It shall be possible to change the Theme used for a particular Station without modifying the underlying design elements

u. There shall be tools to assist with the creation of new Themes

v. Shall allow sounds to be associated with a particular Page

w. Shall allow sounds to be associated with state transitions of particular design elements

x. Sounds may be used to provide Touchscreen interaction feedback

y. A Page can be designated as the Stations inactivity Page

z. A Page can have a lockout group and threshold

aa. A Tab can have a visibility group and threshold

bb. There shall be a visualization interface for Page creation and editing

cc. Standard graphical interaction methods (drag-and-drop) shall be used to arrange design elements on Pages

dd. There shall be a layout grid with user-defined spacing and color with associated snap-to-grid functionality

ee. It shall be possible to reuse the graphical layout of a configuration independent of any assigned functionality

ff. The LCD Design functionality shall be part of a separate application that can be used alongside Light Designer

gg. Pop-ups can be any fixed size up to the Page size

hh. Pop-ups will have a fixed position on screen (but may move when being



shown/hidden)

C. Minimum Computer Requirements

1. The software shall require the Windows XP SP2 (Home or Pro) operating system running on a x86-Windows-compatible computer (2 GHz Pentium 4 or better) with a minimum of 1 GB of hard drive space and 1 GB RAM, OpenGL graphics acceleration, a monitor capable of displaying at least 1024 x 768 screen resolution, a CD-ROM optical drive, Ethernet port, USB port or SD card slot, keyboard and mouse.

2.10 STATION POWER MODULES

A. The Station Power Module shall be the Unison Paradigm P-SPM Series Station Power Module as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

B. Mechanical

1. The Station Power Module (SPM) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series or ERn Rack Enclosures

2. The SPM shall convert input power into low-voltage (Class II) power with data line and a secondary auxiliary low-voltage line to energize button, button/fader, touchscreen, and interface devices for multi-scene lighting and building control.

3. SPM module shall be contained in a plug-in assembly.

a. The module shall be housed in a formed steel body and contain no discrete wire connections.

1. No tools shall be required for module removal or insertion.

4. The SPM shall be convection cooled.

5. User Interface

a. The SPM shall utilize light emitting diodes (LEDs) to indication function, status and fault.

6. The SPM shall be secured behind the locking door.

7. Wall-mounted, direct wire and 19" rack-mount, connectorized repeater and dual-repeater variants shall be available from the same manufacturer where required on the project.

C. Electrical

1. The SPM shall require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be terminated into the dimming enclosure, unless required by a variant

2. The SPM shall require line-voltage power supplied by the contractor, terminated inside the dimming or control enclosure.

3. The SPM shall be hot-swap capable.

4. The SPM, in conjunction with a matching Architectural Control Processor (ACP), shall support Echelon LinkPower communications with remote devices, including button, button/fader, touchscreen and interface stations, and shall interoperate with LonMARK-approved third-party devices.

a. The LinkPower network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class II twisted pair wiring, type Belden 8471 (unshielded) or Belden 8719 (shielded) or equivalent. One # 14 AWG drain wire will be required for system not using grounded metal conduit.

b. The LinkPower network shall be topology free. Network wiring may be



bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.

c. Link power wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)

1. Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)

2. Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m)

d. Link power wiring between stations shall not exceed 1313 ft. (400m).

5. The SPM shall support auxiliary power for certain remote devices, including touchscreen and interface stations, as required by the device.

a. The auxiliary power network shall utilize polarity-dependent, low-voltage Class II wiring, consisting of two # 16 AWG wires.

b. Auxiliary wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)

1. Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)

2. Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m)

c. The SPM shall supply 1.25 amps at 24v DC continuously.

D. Functional

1. Capacity

a. Each SPM shall

1. Supply power for up to 32 button and button/fader stations.

a. Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow 30 additional stations, 62 total

2. Supply auxiliary power for a similar number of interface stations.

3. Shall supply auxiliary power for up to four Touchscreen stations, when a like number of other stations are deducted from the total.

a. Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow two additional Touchscreens (six total) when a like number of other stations are deducted from the total.

2. Operation

a. The SPM shall not require configuration or programming.

b. The SPM shall automatically detect faults in the wiring, indicate the fault, including the fault polarity, and shut down the output power.

1. The SPM shall automatically reset when the fault is clear, and can be manually reset by removing and re-inserting the module.

2.11 LIGHTING CONSOLE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General

1. The lighting control console shall be a microprocessor-based system specifically designed to provide complete control of stage, studio, and entertainment lighting systems. The console shall be the SmartFade 2496 as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.

2. The system shall provide control of 512 DMX512 controlled dimmers or devices on a maximum of 96 control channels. Any or all of the DMX512 outputs may be controlled by a channel.

3. A maximum of 576 memories (cues), may be contained in non-volatile electronic memory.



4. A playback fader pair shall be provided, with highest level operation between pair and last action operation within pair. Dynamic rate control shall be provided for playback within the memory stack.

5. 48 overlapping additive channel sliders shall provide access to individual channels. The console shall provide three modes of operation: two-preset mode, Normal mode and DMX Backup mode. In two-preset mode, the console shall provide two scenes of 24 control channels each. In Normal mode, the console shall combine the two-scene channel fader controls into one scene of 48 control channels with access to the second half of the available channel sliders via a page button. In DMX Backup mode, 48 memory locations are available for recording and playing back the state of the entire DMX universe (512 levels). Selection of the operating mode shall be a menu option in the LCD display.

6. Console software upgrades shall be made by the user via USB connection to a PC. Changing internal components shall not be required.

7. The console shall provide an SD memory card socket allowing show data to be saved for archival or transfer to other consoles or a personal computer.

B. Controls and Playback

1. Programming Section

a. The console shall provide an LCD with button and dial controls for navigation. The LCD shall provide system configuration, show data and channel level information.

b. The console shall provide dedicated buttons for recording and editing memories, recording sequences and snapshots, copying memories and sequences, and creating random chases.

2. Playback Section

a. Two-Preset Operation

1. Fading between scenes shall be accomplished with the crossfader pair. Each crossfader may be operated manually in real time or may be assigned a time. Timed crossfades are assigned using the LCD and dial for proportional modification of cue timing. The actual modified time value for the cue shall be dynamically displayed as the rate is altered.

b. Normal Operation

1. Normal mode shall provide manual single scene operation via channel faders, two scene operation using a combination of the channel faders, the [Next] key and the [Go] key, and memory operation via pages of recordable memories and cue stack playback. Switching among these playback options shall be provided through direct keys.

c. DMX Backup operation

1. DMX Backup mode shall provide one memory location per channel fader. Each memory location shall store the static state of the full DMX universe (512 channels) at the time of recording.

3. Channel Faders

a. 48 proportional, fully overlapping faders shall be provided with 45mm potentiometers and bump buttons.

b. The 48 faders shall provide direct manual control of the first 24 or 48 channels, depending on console model and mode of operation. Channel levels may be



affected at any time by the individual channel sliders.

4. Master faders and Blackout key

a. A 60mm Master potentiometer shall be provided that shall master output levels of all channel faders and the crossfader. An alternate action Blackout key shall be located near the Master fader.

b. A 60mm Bumps potentiometer shall be provided that shall master the maximum output level of the channel bump buttons.

C. Operating Modes

1. Two Preset Mode

a. Two Preset mode shall provide two banks of 24 channel faders and a manual/timed crossfader.

b. The mode shall provide both 1-to-1 and custom DMX patches. All 512 DMX addresses may be patched to the 24 available channels.

c. Channel faders shall have bump buttons that illuminate to mimic the output level. Bumps shall operate in pile-on and solo modes.

d. A bump level master shall be provided.

e. A grand master fader and black out button shall be provided.

f. Two independent channels shall be provided with on/off functionality. Independents may be patched like any other channel.

g. Output levels shall be displayed in the LCD menu.

h. DMX merge functionality shall be provided.

2. Normal Mode

a. Normal mode shall provide 96 channels in two blocks of 48 faders. Channel faders shall have bump buttons that illuminate to mimic the output level. Bumps shall operate in pile-on and solo modes.

b. The mode shall provide both 1-to-1 and custom DMX patches. All 512 DMX addresses may be patched to the 96 available channels.

c. The Next function shall allow manual, preset -style playback of all 96 channels using the two blocks of channel faders and the crossfader GO button.

d. Faders shall also control up to 576 (12 pages of 48) recordable memories. Memories shall record user-selected channel levels or console-generated random levels.

e. Four faders shall provide control of up to 48 sequences (12 pages of 4 faders). Sequences shall include up to 24 steps containing channel levels and/or recorded memories, or console-generated random chases. Steps shall be editable and steps shall be able to be individually deleted and inserted.

f. A cue stack of up to 199 steps shall be provided. Steps shall be editable and steps shall be able to be individually deleted and inserted.

g. The cue stack and sequences shall be able to be played back using manual fades, timed fades, or overridden timed fades using the Rate function.

h. Preview of recorded memories and sequences shall be provided in the LCD display.

i. Snapshot memories shall provide temporary storage of up to 10 looks.

j. An Undo command shall undo the last record command executed.



k. A bump level master shall be provided.

l. A grand master fader and black out button shall be provided.

m. Two independent channels shall be provided with on/off functionality. Independents may be patched like any other channel.

n. Output levels shall be displayed in the LCD menu.

o. DMX Input functionality shall be provided. DMX Input may either be merged with DMX output from the console, or mapped to a fader for control.

3. DMX Backup Mode

a. DMX Backup mode shall provide 48 memories of 512 channels each.

b. Memories shall be available for manual playback on the memory faders and for crossfader playback in a pre-formatted 48 step sequence. Crossfader playback shall be adjusted using the Rate button and the dial.

c. Memories shall record the DMX output of the console. DMX output shall be generated by DMX input to the console.

d. The console shall be able to pile-on its levels with the DMX input levels or to automatically take control if the DMX input fails.

4. MIDI Operation

a. In DMX Backup mode, multiple consoles shall be able to connect via MIDI to provide DMX Backup for multiple universes. Critical playback operations performed on the master console shall be followed by the slave consoles.

b. The console shall be able to receive MIDI data from a time-based sequencer or show control system.

c. Two consoles shall be able to be connected via MIDI to double the available channel count. One unit is set to master and the other to slave. DMX Input on the master console shall provide merge functionality.

D. Interface Options

1. The console shall provide connectors for the following:

a. AC or 12V DC input for external power supply

b. DMX512/1990 outputs (one connector)

c. DMX512/1990 input (one connector)

d. MIDI In

e. MIDI Out

f. USB input (Series B device connector)

g. SD Memory Card socket

E. Displays

1. The console shall support connection via USB to the SmartSoft software application. SmartSoft shall run on either a PC with Windows XP or Windows 7 OS, or on a Macintosh computer with OS X. SmartSoft shall provide live display of show data and on screen data editing. The show file may be stored directly to and opened from the hard disk of the computer as well as to/from the SD card on the SmartFade console.

F. Physical

1. All operator controls and console electronics for a standard system shall be housed in a single desktop console



2. SmartFade 2496 console shall be 27" nom. wide x 10" x nom. deep x 2.5" nom. high (including controls). Weight APPROX 3.6kg ~ 8lbs.

3. Console power shall be 12V AC or DC via an external power unit. The power unit shall operate with 90-265VAC line voltage, 50 or 60Hz.

2.12 STRIPLIGHT

A. General

1. The instrument shall be a Source Four MultiPAR borderlight as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or approved equal.

B. Lamp

1. The instrument shall utilize an HPL lamp, which shall consist of a compact tungsten filament contained in a krypton-filled quartz envelope.

2. The lamp shall mount axially within the reflector and shall be pre-focused within the reflector.

3. The lamp base shall have an integral die cast aluminum heat sink that reduces seal temperature and ensures proper lamp alignment.

4. The lamp socket shall be ATP 220 nickel gold plated.

5. All versions of the instrument shall use only one lamp type, the HPL lamp. Fixtures that require the purchasing of multiple lamp types to achieve different field angles shall not be acceptable.

C. Physical

1. The borderlights are constructed of die cast aluminum, extruded aluminum, and steel sheet metal, free of burrs and pits, finished in black, high temperature epoxy paint. Tools shall not be required for cleaning the reflector or lens

2. The spotlight shall provide, but not be limited to:

a. Sealed reflector housing shall prevent light leaks. Temperature control of reflector is obtained through 17 heat sink fins cast into the housing and into the casting.

b. Interior of unit shall contain baffles to eliminate beam scattering and spill light.

c. Lamp socket shall be held into place by a brass self-retaining screw.

d. Lens shall be secured with two high temperature bronze spring releases. No tools shall be required to change lenses.

e. Sturdy gel frame holders and a spring loaded, quick release gel frame retainer.

f. A choice of rugged steel hanging irons or floor trunions shall be supplied with the unit.

g. Each unit shall be provided standard with color frame and bare leads.

h. Weight shall nominally be 11 lbs per foot.

i. The spotlight shall be UL and cUL listed and so labeled

D. Lenses

1. It shall be possible to change field type of the borderlight through interchangeable lenses. No tools shall be necessary for lens changing. 360° Beam rotation shall be possible. No tools shall be necessary for lens rotation. Fixtures that require user to touch the lamp or lamp socket to orientate the beam shall not be acceptable.

a. Interchangeable lens sets shall consist of very narrow spot, narrow spot, medium



flood, and wide flood. Lenses shall be heat resistant, borosilicate glass.

b. Beam orientation of MFL and WFL lenses shall be possible through rotation of lenses within the aluminum casting.

E. Optical

1. The optical train shall combine a compact filament lamp with modified parabolic and multifaceted reflector. Reflector efficiency shall be a minimum of 93%. Reflector shall be cast into a heat sink assembly. Reflector finish shall be an enhanced aluminum deposition. Reflectors of pressed aluminum sheet construction shall not be acceptable.

2.13 ELLIPSOIDAL ZOOM SPOTLIGHTS

A. General

1. The instrument shall be a Source Four Zoom ellipsoidal spotlight as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or approved equal.

B. Physical

1. The unit shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum and extruded aluminum, free of burrs and pits, finished in black, high temperature epoxy paint. Tools shall not be required for either lamp alignment. A Phillips head screwdriver shall be required for cleaning the reflector.

2. The following shall be provided:

a. 25° - 50° field angle range

b. Bind free one hand zoom angle/focus adjustment and locking dial with field angle indicators

c. Scale markings on lens tube

d. Insulated rear handle

e. Double clutch fixture body

f. Integral cable clamp for power leads

g. Positive locking of lamp focus and independent lamp alignment controls unaffected by relamping

h. High impact, thermally insulated knobs and shutter handles

i. Reflector secured with shock mounts

j. Rotating shutter assembly - 50° rotation

k. 20 gauge stainless steel shutters

l. Interchangeable / retrofitable rotating lens tube

m. Lens tube door for easy access to lenses

n. Sturdy gel frame holders with two accessory slots, and a top mounted, quick release electroplated black gel frame retainer

o. Rugged 3/16" x 1-1/4" (4.8mm x 31.8mm) steel yoke with two mounting positions allowing 300°+ rotation of the fixture within the yoke for 25° - 50° version

p. Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch

q. Slot with sliding cover for motorized pattern devices or optional iris

C. Optical

1. The optical train shall combine a compact filament lamp with a precision molded



borosilicate ellipsoidal reflector and dual Anti-reflection coated precision aspheric lens system to produce a highly efficient optimum cosine field and sharp pattern projection.

2. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:

a. Molded borosilicate reflector with multiple dichroic layers

b. 95% of visible light shall be reflected while 90% of infrared light as heat shall be transmitted through the reflector and removed from the projected beam.

c. Low gate and beam temperature

d. Sharp imaging through a three plane shutter design

e. For the 25° - 50° Zoom - a plano-convex aspheric front lens with an anti-reflective coating and a Bi-convex aspheric rear lens with an anti-reflective coating to increase lens transmission

D. Performance

1. The unit shall be precision engineered to use an HPL lamp to deliver an even, intense field with cosine distribution. Nominal field angle cosine field lumen output shall be at least 9060 lumens for 25° - 50° version.

2. The unit shall be capable of utilizing ETC Dimmer Doubling technology.

3. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:

a. 25° - 50° field angle range

b. Smooth, easy lens movement and single hand adjustment for simultaneous field angle and focus setting.

c. Projector-quality pattern imaging (stainless steel, glass, and rotating patterns)

d. Sharp shutter cuts without halation

e. Shutter warping and burnout in normal use shall be unacceptable

f. Adjustable hard and soft beam edges

4. The unit shall be UL/cUL listed and so labeled.

E. Lamps

1. The high efficiency lamps shall be an HPL lamp with at least 2000 hour lamp life, which shall consist of a compact tungsten filament contained in a krypton-filled quartz envelope. The lamp shall mount axially within the reflector. The lamp base shall have an integral die cast aluminum heat sink that reduces seal temperature and ensures proper lamp alignment. The lamp socket shall be ATP 220 nickel gold plated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to receive and store the necessary materials and equipment for installation of the dimmer system. It is the intent of these specifications and plans to include everything required for proper and complete installation and operation of the dimming system, even though every item may not be specifically mentioned. The contractor shall deliver on a timely basis to other trades any equipment that must be installed during construction.

B. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for field measurements and coordinating physical size of all equipment with the architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed.



C. The electrical contractor shall install all lighting control and dimming equipment in accordance with manufacturers approved shop drawings.

D. All branch load circuits shall be live tested before connecting the loads to the dimmer system load terminals.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

A. Upon completion of the installation, including testing of load circuits, the contractor shall notify the dimming system manufacturer that the system is available for formal checkout.

B. Notification shall be provided in writing, two weeks prior to the time that factory-trained personnel are needed on the job site.

C. No power is to be applied to the dimming system unless specifically authorized by written instructions from the manufacturer.

D. The purchaser shall be liable for any return visits by the factory engineer as a result of incomplete or incorrect wiring.

E. Upon completion of the formal check-out, the factory engineer shall demonstrate operation and maintenance of the system to the owners representatives. Training shall not exceed four working hours. Additional training shall be available upon request.

3.3 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warrant products under normal use and service to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years from date of delivery.

B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of such parts determined defective upon inspection.

C. Warranty does not cover any product or part of a product subject to accident, negligence, alteration, abuse or misuse. Warranty does not cover any accessories or parts not supplied by the manufacturer.

D. Warranty shall not cover any labor expended or materials used to repair any equipment without manufacturers prior written authorization.



LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers. 2. Buck-boost transformers.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints".

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and units that are part of an emergency or standby power system will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:




D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

F. Field quality-control test reports.



G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

H. Output Settings Report: Record of tap adjustments specified in Part 3.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing transformers with a minimum of 10 years documented experience

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Concrete Division Specification Sections.

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp. 3. Controlled Power Company. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 5. General Electric Company. 6. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc. 7. Magnetek Power Electronics Group.



8. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 9. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 10. Square D; Schneider Electric. 11. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Aluminum.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: One 5 percent tap above normal full capacity.

F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for non-sinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.



2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

K. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

2.4 BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561.

B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Finish Color: Gray ANSI 49 gray ANSI 61 gray Manufacturer's standard color.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Electrical Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.



1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints.

B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Electrical Specification Section " Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Electrical Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Electrical Specification Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.



B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.

C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Transient voltage suppression devices. 3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Instrumentation. 5. Control power. 6. Accessory components and features. 7. Identification.


A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7, IEEE 344 and Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints".


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:






D. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in General Requirements Specification Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

F. Trip Settings: Submit manufacturer’s literature covering the following information, as applicable, for each circuit breaker for which adjustable trip settings are required.

1. Switchboard or panelboard identification. 2. Circuit number or circuit breaker identification. 3. Size of circuit beaker – frame amps. 4. Size of rating plug – trip amps.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings may indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 2.


G. Comply with UL 891.




A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboard.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Concrete Specification Sections.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.



2. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Fuses and Fusible Devices for Fused Circuit Breakers: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

5. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

6. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than one of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Panel Fixed, individually mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: As indicated on the Drawings.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: As indicated on the Drawings.

E. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray custom color finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

H. Cubical Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.

1. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above expected dew point, manual switching of branch-circuit protective device.

2. Space-Heater Power Source: Transformer, factory installed in switchboard 120-V external branch circuit.



I. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements; hinged sealed door; buses provisioned for mounting utility company's current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features.

J. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

K. Removable, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers: Secured by captive thumb screws standard bolts, for access to rear interior of switchboard.

L. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.

2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily

removable for drilling and cutting. 4. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into

switchboard. 5. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables

indicated, including those for future installation.

M. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated, with tin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker position.

3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) 1/4-by-1-inch- (6-by-25-mm-) Minimum-size required by UL 891, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment. Spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Components to have continuous current rating.

2.2 SWITCHBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A. Switchboards, circuit breakers, switches and fuses shall be rated to withstand and interrupt the full value of the short-circuit current indicated. Series-connected ratings are not acceptable.



B. Unless otherwise indicated the minimum RMS symmetrical short circuit ratings shall be as follows:

1. 480Y/277 volt systems; 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

2.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

B. Generally, all molded-case circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic unless indicated otherwise.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2.4 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-power transformer.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.

C. Portable Circuit-Breaker Lifting Device: Floor-supported, roller-based, elevating carriage arranged for movement of circuit breakers in and out of compartments for present and future circuit breakers.

D. Overhead Circuit-Breaker Lifting Device: Mounted at top front of switchboard, with hoist and lifting yokes matching each drawout circuit breaker.

E. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor: Provide switchboard with integral TVSS. The TVSS shall meet latest edition of UL 1449, standard for safety UL 1283 and shall have electromagnetic interference filters. TVSS to have life expectancy of at least 5000 transients without failure or degradation in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category C3 transients.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.



B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Concrete Division Specification Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete and Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Electrical Specification Section "Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties.



B. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Electrical Specification Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings, and specialties.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections.


B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.



2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.



4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports; including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories and to use and reprogram any microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units.


NJ Schools Development Authority JE-0010-C01 New Public School #20

Revision #11 – April 4, 2014

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Panelboards. 3. Loadcenters.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7, IEEE 344 and Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints".


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.




C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:




D. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.

E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in General Requirements Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

G. Trip Settings: Submit manufacturer’s literature covering the following information, as applicable, for each circuit breaker for which adjustable trip settings are required.

1. Switchboard or panelboard identification. 2. Circuit number or circuit breaker identification. 3. Size of circuit beaker – frame amps. 4. Size of rating plug – trip amps.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings may indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.






A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. Standard hinged and locked door within front cover. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Where indicated, same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Where indicated, same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

5. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel where flush-mounted or surface-mounted in unfinished spaces; Same finish as panels and trim where surface-mounted in finished spaces.

6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Where indicated, adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground

conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Where indicated, neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase

bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Where indicated, vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.




4. Feed-Through Lugs: Where indicated, mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Where indicated, mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Where indicated, mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Where indicated, rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Arc Flash Warning Label: Labeled "DANGER – ARC FLASH HAZARD” with the Approach Boundary, PPE and Incident Energy Levels indicated based on the short circuit rating of the equipment.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

2.2 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Series-connected ratings are not acceptable.

B. Unless otherwise indicated the minimum RMS symmetrical short circuit ratings shall be as follows:

1. Main Distribution Panels.

a. 480Y/277 volt systems; 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

2. All other panelboards.

a. 480Y/277 volt systems.

1) Up to 225 amps; 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. 2) Over 225 amps; 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

b. 208Y/120 volt systems.

1) Up to 400 amps; 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. 2) Over 400 amps; 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

c. 208Y/120 volt systems derived from dry type step down transformers.

1) Any ampacity.

a) 6 kva - 45 kva; 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. b) 75 kva - 150 kva; 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. c) 225 kva - 300 kva; 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. d) Above 500 kva; 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.




3. Loadcenters – Commercial

a. Same as "panelboards".

2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS




B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, "Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less".

C. Doors: All distribution panel boards shall have door–in-door construction. Doors shall be secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. Provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as indicated.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.4 PANELBOARDS




B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, "Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less".

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as indicated.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.




F. Double Width and Multiple Section Panelboards: Where more than 42 poles are indicated, or where otherwise indicated, provide two or more panelboards butted together side by side. Boxes shall be same size and shall be chase nippled or close nippled together. Fronts to be same height and shall not overlap.

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES




B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents as indicated.

C. Generally, all molded-case circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic unless indicated otherwise.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Where indicated, Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install floor-mounted panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in other Sections."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

E. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated or required to maintain a maximum of 78 inches maximum to top of operating handle in any position.

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.




I. Recessed Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.

J. Surface Mounted Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

K. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

L. Do not use gutter space as pull or splice boxes for foreign circuits or circuits controlled by devices external to the panelboard.

M. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Arc Flash Warning Label: Labeled "DANGER – ARC FLASH HAZARD” with the Approach Boundary, PPE and Incident Energy Levels indicated based on the short circuit rating of the equipment unless an arc flash study is to be performed.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage the testing agency.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.





D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


E. Tests and Inspections:



3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.




3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.



WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, integral surge suppression units, and isolated-ground receptacles.

2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches. 3. Device wall plates. 4. Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles. 5. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multi-outlet

assemblies.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified for evaluation of technical features and construction of proposed substitutions.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer.



B. Wiring devices - switches, dimmers and receptacles etc - shall comply with the latest editions of NECA 1, NECA WE 6 and NFPA 70 as applicable. Provide products listed and classified by UL, Inc, as suitable for the purpose specified.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing wiring devices with a minimum of 10 years documented experience.

D. Supplier Qualification: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum five years documented experience

E. Comply with NECA 130-2010 Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices.

F. All wiring devices shall be Heavy Duty specification grade type.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Floor Service Outlet and Poke-Through Assemblies: One for every 50, but no fewer than one.

2. Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five poke through assemblies installed, but no fewer than two.

3. TVSS Receptacles: One for every 50, 100 of each type installed, but no fewer than two of each type.

B. For all spaces provide receptacles types and quantities as required in accordance with the NJ School Development Authority Model school program- Materials and Systems Standards requirements described in section D5030.50 (C), (D), (E), (F) and (G).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Wiring Devices:

a. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories.



e. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section "Special Requirements".

2. Multioutlet Assemblies:

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. b. Wiremold Company (The). c. Other “Approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

“Special Requirements.”

3. Poke-Through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles:

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. b. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. c. Raceway Components, Inc. d. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Wiremold Company (The). g. Other “Approved” manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

“Special Requirements.”

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-596G, and UL 498.

B. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles.

C. GFCI Receptacles: Straight-blade, non-feed-through type, Hospital, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter.

D. TVSS Receptacles: Straight blade, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp level rating of 500 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 140 J line to neutral, and 70 J line to ground and neutral to ground.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual only with light visible in face of device to indicate device is “active” or “no longer in service.”

3. Receptacle Type: Heavy-Duty General-Duty grade. 4. Identification: Distinctive marking on face of device to denote TVSS-type unit.

E. Weather-Resistant Receptacles: Comply with specific U.L. requirements and bear the letters “WR” on the face of the device to as to be visible when installed.

2.3 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.



1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.4 SWITCHES

A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.

B. Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished Type 302

stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Wet Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

2.6 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units unless otherwise indicated; suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular for multi-gang outlets, round for single-gang outlets, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5 jacks for UTP cable.

F. Subject to compliance with requirements, and unless otherwise indicated, the following floor service boxes and fittings may be submitted for use on this project:

1. Raceway Components RC-CFB Stamped steel, concrete tight, fully adjustable floor box. 2. Raceway Components RC-768-20 Amp -AL, die-cast aluminum carpet flange with 20

amp duplex receptacle. 3. Raceway Components RC-768-20 Amp- -AL, die-cast aluminum carpet flange with 20

amp duplex isolated ground receptacle. 4. Raceway Components RC-968 -AL, die-cast aluminum carpet flange with 15-amp

quadruplex receptacle. 5. Raceway Components RC-968-15 AMP- -AL, die-cast aluminum carpet flange with 15-

amp quadruplex isolated ground receptacle. 6. Raceway Components RC-768-M -AL, die-cast aluminum carpet flange with one or two

RJ-45 Category 5 openings, LAN cable openings, or as indicated.



2.7 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated and –wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multi-channeled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly.

1. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with four simplex receptacles and space for four RJ-45 jacks unless indicated otherwise.

2. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.

3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch (100-mm) cored openings and reestablish

fire rating of floor. 5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors;

and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5 voice and data communication cables.

2.8 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

B. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer’s standard enamel finish.

C. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.

B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under a single, multi-gang wall plate.



E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.

F. Adjust locations of poke through assemblies, floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

G. All 125-volt, single phase, 15- and 20-ampere single and duplex receptacles which do not serve a dedicated appliance and are within a 6 foot radius of a sink, are installed in wet locations, are installed in bathrooms, on roofs, in kitchens, or outdoors with direct grade access, shall be ground fault circuit interrupting type where available or shall be protected by ground fault circuit interrupting circuit breakers.

H. All 125- and 250-volt, 15- and 20-ampere non-locking type receptacles installed outdoors in damp or weather-protected locations as defined in the National Electrical Code shall be listed weather-resistant type.

I. All receptacles installed in a wet location as defined in the National Electrical Code shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof with the attachment plug cap installed or removed.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use embossed machine printing with white-filled lettering on black or gray tape or electronically stamped machine printing with black lettering on clear or white tape on face of device plate and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Electrical Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Electrical Specification Section "Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following used as disconnect switches for electric services, feeders, equipment, appliances, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Fusible switches. 2. Non-fusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Molded-case switches. 5. Single-phase motor, equipment, or appliance disconnects. 6. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and Electrical Specifications Section “Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints".


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.



6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




E. Field quality-control reports.


requirements.

F. Manufacturer's field service report.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in General Requirements Specification Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

H. Trip Settings: Submit manufacturer’s literature covering the following information, as applicable, for each circuit breaker for which adjustable trip settings are required.

1. Circuit breaker identification. 2. Size of circuit breaker – frame amps. 3. Size of rating plug – trip amps.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.



B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings may indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.




A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type provided, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type of fuse provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES




B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses,



lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Where indicated or required, Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Where indicated or required, One Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Where indicated or required, Labeled for use as service

equipment.

2.2 NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Where indicated or required, Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Where indicated or required, Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Where indicated or required, One Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.



5. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section "Special Requirements".

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Where indicated or required, Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES




B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Where indicated or required, Comply with UL 1053; remote-

mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions of installed location and as follows.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.



2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

2.6 SINGLE PHASE DISCONNECTS

A. Horsepower rated non-fusible wiring devices used as disconnect switches for 120 volt line to neutral loads.

B. Device plate suitable for padlocking.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

B. Arc Flash Warning Label: Labeled "DANGER – ARC FLASH HAZARD” with the Approach Boundary, PPE and Incident Energy Levels indicated based on the short circuit rating of the equipment unless an arc flash study is to be performed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Provide disconnecting means for each appliance, heating or ventilating equipment, motor and controller, air-conditioning or refrigeration equipment, as indicated, and where required by applicable codes.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.



E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Perform tests and inspections.


B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.





3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Electrical Specification Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study".





TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 36 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 36 00 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Remote annunciation systems. 3. Remote annunciation and control systems.


1. Electrical Specification Section "Engine Generators".

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."




E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in General Requirements Specifications Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.



F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing Automatic Transfer Switches with a minimum of 10 years documented experience. Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches bypass/isolation switches nonautomatic transfer switches remote annunciators and remote annunciator and control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.


D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.



G. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

H. ATS Supplier Qualification: Authorized distributor of proposed and specified manufacturer with minimum ten years documented experience.

I. Environmental Conditions: ATS shall be rated for temperature of 120degrees F at an altitude of 3,300ft.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repqir or replace components of transfer switches and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. Caterpillar; Engine Div. b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. c. Generac Power Systems, Inc. d. GE Zenith Controls. e. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. f. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. g. Russelectric, Inc. h. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section

"Special Conditions".

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008. Automatic Transfer Switches shall withstand three-phase RMS faults for 3-cycles without the use of additional series current limiting fuses.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched simultaneously with phase poles.



H. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.

J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

K. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1 complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

E. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator and control panel.

F. Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and characteristics:

1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation. 2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power

sources not exceeding 100 ms. 3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and sensors

confirming both sources are present and acceptable.

a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator. b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only when the 2

sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus 5 percent maximum voltage difference.

4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer.



G. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

H. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

2.4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM

A. Functional Description: Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions for indicated transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following:

1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch controls.

2. Switch position. 3. Switch in test mode. 4. Failure of communication link.



B. Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch.

1. Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored. 2. Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and identity of

load it serves. 3. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lamp Test: Push-to-test or lamp-test switch on front panel.

2.5 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Functional Description: Include the following functions for indicated transfer switches:

1. Indication of sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch controls.

2. Indication of switch position. 3. Indication of switch in test mode. 4. Indication of failure of digital communication link. 5. Key-switch or user-code access to control functions of panel. 6. Control of switch-test initiation. 7. Control of switch operation in either direction. 8. Control of time-delay bypass for transfer to normal source.

B. Malfunction of annunciator, annunciation and control panel, or communication link shall not affect functions of automatic transfer switch. In the event of failure of communication link, automatic transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained operation. Automatic transfer-switch sensing, controlling, or operating function shall not depend on remote panel for proper operation.

C. Remote Annunciation and Control Panel: Solid-state components. Include the following features:

1. Controls and indicating lights grouped together for each transfer switch. 2. Label each indicating light control group. Indicate transfer switch it controls, location of

switch, and load it serves. 3. Digital Communication Capability: Matched to that of transfer switches supervised. 4. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.

D. For each automatic transfer switch and manual transfer switch, contractor must provide annunciator for transfer switch status, type of power available etc. as listed above in 2.6 A. Wire and Install this annuniciator in Security Desk Area on Ground Floor. All wiring shall run in suitable metal conduit. Label each indication with load serves. The annunciator label for the elevator transfer switch shall have label per elevator safety code requirements.

2.6 ELEVATOR PANEL AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

A. Provide 8#14 in 2” conduit from automatic transfer switch supplying power to Panel-ELEV for elevators to the elevator machine room for connection to elevator controllers for emergency and or normal supply available to elevator panel/loads. Coordinate all work with elevator contractor or vendor. Coordinate exact wiring termination in elevator machine room. Provide slack wiring/cable as required. This work may not have been indicated on the drawings and shall be provided by the electrical contractor.



2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for transfer switches used as service equipment.

B. Arc Flash Warning Label: Labeled "DANGER – ARC FLASH HAZARD” with the Approach Boundary, PPE and Incident Energy Levels indicated based on the short circuit rating of the equipment unless an arc flash study is to be performed.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints".

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Electrical Specification Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints".

C. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Identify components according to Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays and relays.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Electrical Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Electrical Specification Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."




A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values

exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.




E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to General Requirements Specifications Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.



LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 26 41 13 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 41 13 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for structures.



B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or certification by UL.

B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing material.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

E. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features, including the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Ground loop conductor.


A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL or LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label. 2. LPI System Certificate.



C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer.

C. Coordinate lightning protection system components with building materials to ensure there are no dissimilar materials that can react with one another.

D. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Coordinate selection of lightning protection system materials with building elements to avoid corrosion from dissimilar metals. Refer to Architect's plans and details.

B. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

C. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I Class II, aluminum copper unless otherwise indicated.


a. Harger. b. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. c. Independent Protection Co. d. Preferred Lightning Protection. e. Robbins Lightning, Inc. f. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. g. Other "Approved" manufacturer in accordance with Electrical Specification Section


2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches (600 mm) Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.

3. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in roofing Sections.

D. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper.

E. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

F. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter by 10 feet (3 m) long.



G. Heavy-Duty, Stack-Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: Stainless steel or Lead sheathed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors. 2. Down conductors. 3. Interior conductors. 4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of

building.

D. Cable Connections, Above Grade: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

E. Cable Connections, Below Grade: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components.

1. Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections may be used only below the roof level.

F. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot (18-m) intervals.

3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Electrical Specification Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Raceways and Cabling."

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.




A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.




INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces and canopies.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture, including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units, including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data

required in "Submittals" Article in HVAC Specification Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in HVAC Specification Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

7. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 8. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type.




The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Samples: For each lighting fixture in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule for which samples are indicated. Each Sample shall include the following:

1. Lamps and ballasts, installed. 2. Cords and plugs. 3. Pendant support system.

D. Installation instructions.

E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. Coordinate with Electrical Specification Section "Special Requirements".

1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches (305 mm)

of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Ceiling-mounted projectors. 5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 6. Other items in finished ceiling may include the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels.

7. Perimeter moldings.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

G. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.




H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

J. Submit power consumption and efficiency per ASHRAE 90.1 Table 9.6 for space by space and provide LPD for the entire school. These calculations shall be based on actual lighting fixtures proposed. The Lighting Power Density calculations shall meet NJ uniform construction code, latest NJ School Development Authority Model Schools Program-Material and Systems Standards and ASHRAE 90.1 requirements.


A. Lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of NFPA70, ANSI, and NECA/IESNA 500.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

C. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


F. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

G. Manufacturers Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing interior lighting products that meet the requirements of these standards with minimum of 10 years’ experience.

H. Ballasts shall carry a five year full replacement warranty from date of manufacture.

I. Ballasts shall comply with ANCI C6.441, C82.11,FCC rules, title 47CFR pt.18 for EMI/RFI and be manufactured in a factory certified to ISO 9002 quality standards.

J. All lighting levels shall be based on current presiding codes and in accordance with recommendations of NJAC.6A:26-6.3, 6.4, ANSI/IES-RP3 and ASHRAE 90.1.

K. All Luminaries shall meet IESNA Category 1, 2, or 5 for minimum dirt accumulation and Luminaries Dirt Depreciation (LLD) factors as applicable. Provide luminaries that do not collect dirt rapidly and are readily cleanable.




L. The Lighting levels shall meet latest NJ School Development Authority Model Schools Program-Material and Systems Standards requirements.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide all labor, materials and programming to furnish and install the following additional lighting fixtures where directed by the Owner, Architect, Engineer or Authority Having Jurisdiction during construction and prior to final acceptance. Include 50 feet of wiring and connection to the nearest available exit lighting circuit or area lighting circuit. The unused lighting fixtures shall be turned over to the owner and the owner credited the amount of labor for their installation.

1. Universal single- double-face exit lights: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the amount installed but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units.

2. Emergency battery packs with two heads: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the amount installed but in no case less than five (5) units or more than ten (10) units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Lighting Fixtures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Drawings or indicated elsewhere on the drawings or in the specifications. Where one manufacturer is listed for standard products substitutions will be considered. Where one manufacturer is listed for specialty products provide products of that manufacturer. Where two or more manufacturers are listed for a product, provide products of one of those manufacturers.

B. Lamps: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lamps by General Electric, Phillips, Osram or other approved equal manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. HID Fixtures (Metal Halide only): Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.




D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

G. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

b. UV stabilized. c. Diffuser shall be prismatic K12.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

H. Fixture Types number of different fixture types shall be limited to as few as possible.

I. Custom fixtures are not acceptable.

J. All lighting fixture must be of a design that permits re-lamping by the custodian without the use of special tools or equipment with the exception of vandal proof fixtures

K. Mercury Vapor, Low and High Pressure sodium lamps are not acceptable.

L. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.




2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A unless otherwise indicated. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher unless otherwise indicated. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less unless otherwise indicated. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall

be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Ballasts shall carry a five year full replacement warranty from date of manufacture.

C. Ballasts shall comply with ANCI C6.441, C82.11,FCC rules, title 47CFR pt.18 for EMI/RFI and be manufactured in a factory certified to ISO 9002 quality standards.

D. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

E. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5, T8 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

F. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

G. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) to 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C): Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.




2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp

ballasts. 3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to

minimize audible fixture noise.

B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) for single-lamp ballasts.

2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F (54 deg C). 3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent unless indicated otherwise. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.

2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2950 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 30,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 2950 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 30,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.




C. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches (1150 mm), 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches (1150 mm), 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 35,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). 7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.7 TUBE GUARDS

A. Tube guards shall be clear impact resistant plastic designed to contain the fragments of broken lamps.

B. Tube guards shall not interfere with the proper seating of the lamps into their sockets.

C. Select guards that are compatible with the lamps and are pliable enough to grip the lamp when turning them.

D. Avoid overly rigid guards that require excessive force to turn the lamp because of slippage on the lamp surface.

2.8 HID LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K unless otherwise indicated.

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 SAFETY COATED LAMPS

A. Where lamps are indicated to have a safety coating, the coating shall be applied to the lamps as follows:




1. Coatings shall ne plastic or Teflon. 2. Coatings shall be factory applied. 3. Coatings shall extend onto the lamp base(s) and shall form itself to the shape of the

lamp. 4. Coatings shall not interfere with the installation of the lamps into their sockets nor shall in

interfere with the electrical contact between the base and socket. 5. Coatings shall not reduce the lamp lumen output by more than 2 percent. 6. Coatings shall contain all of the glass fragments, phosphors, metal parts, and chemical

compounds within the coating form to prevent them from falling. 7. Coated lamps shall meet FDA Food Code and USDA Food Safety and Inspection Service

requirements.

2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Electrical Specification Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm) unless otherwise indicated .

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.




C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

F. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.

G. Tube Guards:

1. Provide slip-on clear plastic tube guards on unprotected fluorescent lamps. 2. Install tube guards according to manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Check that guards do not extend over the contact pins or screw shell. 4. Verify that socket pins and screw shells are properly seated. Do not rely on the guards to

turn or insert the lamp; visually inspect each installation to verify proper lamp installation.

H. Connect wiring according to Electrical Specification Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Electrical Specification Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.




B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.




EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.

B. Related Sections:

1. Electrical Specification Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. HID: High-intensity discharge.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays.




7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based.


C. Samples: For products designated for sample submission in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include lamps and ballasts.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaries to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.


D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Lighting Fixtures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Drawings or indicated elsewhere on the drawings or in the specifications. Where one manufacturer is listed for standard products substitutions will be considered. Where one manufacturer is listed for




specialty products provide products of that manufacturer. Where two or more manufacturers are listed for a product provide products of one of those manufacturers.

B. Lamps: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lamps by General Electric, Phillips, Osram or other approved equal manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

2. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

3. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.




L. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple),

base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS

A. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures Minus 10 Deg F (Minus 23 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for Minus 10 Deg F (minus 23 Deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 10 Deg F (Minus 23 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types.

B. Ballast Characteristics:

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: Class A unless otherwise indicated. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,

Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. 5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,

Category A or better.

C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C) and higher.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C). 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current

ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.




B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light output.

2.5 HID LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K unless otherwise indicated.

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and CCT color temperature 4000 K unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.

3.2 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches (100 mm) above finished grade or surface at bollard location unless otherwise indicated. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Concrete Division Specification Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES

A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches (100 mm) above finished grade or surface at luminaire location unless otherwise indicated. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Concrete Division Specification Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."




3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Electrical Specification Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

a. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations." b. IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations." c. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." d. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.


NJ Schools Development Authority New Public School #20 JE-0010-C01

Revision #1 - March 6, 2013

TELECOM PATHWAYS AND SPACES 27 05 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 27 05 00 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND SPACES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Telecommunications Room Build out

Pathways for Telecommunications Systems

Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications

1.2 REFERENCES

Industry Codes, Standards and Methods shall be observed, including the following:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1 – General Requirements

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2 – Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-570-A: Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard

9. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), 12TH Edition

10. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70): National Electrical Code (NEC)

Comply with all local, state and federal codes for telecommunications installations.


Design Requirements

1. Contractor shall outfit all telecom rooms according to T Drawings. Racks and other termination and distribution fields shall be installed according to manufacturer’s guidelines and industry standards.

2. TR and TER layouts shall be approved by Technology personnel prior to installation of cabling, pathways or termination hardware.

Performance Requirements




1. Materials and equipment will be installed in an orderly and precise manner. Clearances between equipment will prevent incidental damage or unsafe conditions.

2. Equipment shall provide proper support and housing of all intended active and non-active components.

3. Refer to Telecom Room Details for precise location of equipment and termination fields.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Product Data

1. Provide product data for all equipment listed in Part 2 and items shown on the T drawings.

2. Equipment data must be submitted in a single package and clearly indicated for efficient review. (by specifications section) Equipment submittals not clearly indicating what will be installed shall be rejected without question at the contractor’s expense for resubmittal.

3. Product data must be approved by designer and owner prior to purchase and installation of equipment.

Shop Drawings

1. Provide scaled drawings to show proposed equipment locations, clearances and administrative labeling of Telecom Rooms and equipment. All fields, racks and cabinets shall be methodically documented and permanently labeled agreed upon by school district.

2. Shop drawings must be approved by the designer and owner prior to purchase and installation of any equipment.

As-Built Drawings

1. Contractor shall upon completion of the project, provide a complete set of As-Built drawings. These drawings shall identify room numbers and outlet identification numbers for all low voltage cabling systems. Drawings should also include all IDF and MDF locations with a detailed layout of all racks, patch panels, trays, and wall fields.

2. Additional project information shall include details of all horizontal and backbone cable routes and pathways.

3. As-builts shall be submitted by the installing contractor in electronic CAD format and in hardcopy at the end of the project for review and approval by the designer and owner.


Regulatory Requirements

1. All equipment shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the school district. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacturer indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where “approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval.

Substitutions




1. Conditions for consideration of “Or Equal” Products: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term “or equal”, the proposed “or equal” product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied.

a. If all the following conditions are not satisfied, Design Consultant will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements

b. Proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. With the exception of the product name or number and manufacturer’s name, proposed product conforms with requirements indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications in every respect and will produce indicated results.

d. Proposed product is fully documented and properly submitted.

e. Proposed product has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Proposed product is compatible with and has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

g. Proposed product provides specified warranty.

2. If proposed product involves more than one contractor, proposed product has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

3. Submission is accompanied with detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

4. Submission is accompanied with a list of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of design consultants and authorities, if requested.

5. Submission is accompanied with proposed product’s Manufacturer signed written statement on Manufacturer’s letterhead, certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

1.6 WARRANTY

Warranty: Installer must provide manufacturer’s warranty without cost to the owner during that time period, including materials, hourly costs, etc,.

Installer’s warranty shall guarantee workmanship for a period of one year, during which time any deficiency in installation shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the school district. Contractor must respond within 2 business days of written notification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Distribution Racks and Cabinets

1. Floor Mounted Free Standing 2 Post Racks

a. Hubbell HPW84RR19




b. Hubbell HC219CE3N

c. Hubbell XS1010

d. Or approved equal from

i. Cooper B-Line

ii. Ortronics

iii. Systimax

iv. Or approved equal.

2. Floor Mounted Free Standing 4 Post Racks

a. Four post aluminum frame with EIA rails

b. 45 Rack Units

c. Black

d. Similar to Ortronics OR-MM67SVR or approved equivalent.

3. Floor Mounted Equipment Cabinet

a. The cabinet frame shall be constructed of four cold rolled steel components – top, bottom, left and right welded to form a self supporting framework. The side members shall be fabricated from 16ga cold rolled steel. The top and bottom shall be fabricated from 14ga cold rolled steel. The vertical uprights shall have integral cable management channels with provisions for hook and loop or traditional cable ties. The frame shall be bolted to the floor, and side by side to other frames.

b. The side covers shall be constructed of 19ga cold rolled steel with double bent flanges along the entire perimeter. The side covers shall lift off easily via grip handles assembled to the covers. The side cover shall have clusters of rectangular perforation to accommodate ventilation for equipment providing greater than 100 sq. in. of ventilation.

c. The front door shall be a window door assembled to the frame via spring-loaded hinges at the top and bottom. The door shall be locking with a unique operator’s key. The operator’s key shall operate the front door only. The latch shall be flush to the door. The window shall be a .125” acrylic panel secured to a reinforced steel frame.

d. The rear door shall be a steel door assembled to the frame via spring-loaded hinges at the top and bottom. The door shall be locking with a unique service personnel key. The service personnel key shall operate both the rear and front doors. The latch shall be push button operated. The rear door shall be reinforced and have a cluster of rectangular perforations for ventilation.

e. The top shall have a removable panel in the center, designed to be replaced with a cooling fan, and six 3” diameter cable entry knockouts; three along each side to route cables directly into vertical cable organizers minimizing the number of bends to the cables.

f. The bottom panel shall be similarly configured with 6 knockout locations. The cabinet bottom shall also be provided with holes for securing the cabinet to the floor.




g. The top cover shall accept the mounting of a 250 CFM cooling fan.

h. The cabinet shall be pre-configured for 19” mounting with universal hole spacing per EIA 310 D. The cabinet shall feature three sets of rails, front, center, and rear. The front set of rails shall be 20 rack positions high, from the bottom of the cabinet. The rear and center rails shall be the full internal height. The recess of all three sets of rails shall be adjustable forward and back. The rails shall be tapped for a #10-32 screw. The center rails shall be formed in a ‘C’ profile, 3” deep tapped on both the front and rear flanges so as to provide the functionality of an open frame rack. The front and rear rails shall be an L shape.

i. The entire enclosure shall be finished with a durable polyurethane powder coat – medium texture, and shall be available in black.

4. All racks and cabinets shall be capable of supporting the weight and space of existing and proposed equipment. 30% growth capacity shall be provided in addition to detailed requirements.

5. Racks, cabinets and other termination equipment shall be properly secured to floor with appropriate anchors and bonded to Telecommunications Grounding System.

6. Unit shall be similar to Ortronics OR-DCC422846-00002 or approved equivalent.

7. Provide (1) 8-port transient surge protection strip for each TR and per rack/cabinet in the TER and TRs.

Cable Management

1. Horizontal Cable Management

a. Horizontal wire management panels are required for patch panels in certain racks. (See drawings for rack diagrams.)

b. Horizontal cable management shall occupy 1 or 2 rack units, as shown on T Drawings.

c. Similar to OR-MM6HMF1RU or approved equivalent

2. Vertical Cable Management

a. Vertical Cable management shall be provided for all racks. Provide 2 for each rack or cabinet.

b. Cable management shall be – Ortronics OR-60400510, or approved equivalent.

Ladder-Type Aluminum Cable Tray (Ladder Rack)

1. All TR and TER locations shall receive ladder-rack style cable tray as shown in T-series drawings for cable distribution.

2. Class 5160 or Chatsworth “TELCO-Style Cable Runway,” or approved equal 12 inch ladder rack from racks/cabinets from corridor or other wire routing space where indicated on drawings.

3. Or approved equal 12” ladder rack from racks/cabinets from corridor or other wire routing space where indicated on the drawings.

J-Hooks




1. Cooper B-Line BCM-21, 23 or 64.

2. Mono Systems Hook

3. Erico J-Hook

4. Or approved equal

Basket Cable Tray:

1. 12” X 2” with associated mounting hardware.

2. Provide runs of cable tray as shown on T Drawings. Cable tray must be coordinated in the field among trades.

3. Cablofil EZTray CF 54/300 EZ,

4. Cooper Flex Tray,

5. Hoffman Quick Tray,

6. Or approved equivalent.

Conduit

1. In-wall conduit shall be provided for work in new areas. Refer to T Drawings for conduit details.

2. Conduit bend radii shall follow current TIA/EIA standards for telecommunications.

3. Refer to T drawings for locations and sizes of all sleeves for telecommunications.

Gang Boxes

1. In-wall Gang Boxes for low voltage

a. Single Gang Box: Minimum 2.75” wide X 3.75” high X 1.7” deep with ¾” and 1” knockouts.

b. In-wall Double Gang Box for low voltage: 4 Inch Back Knockout, 4 Inch Side Knockout, 4 Inch End Knockout, Length 3 3/4 Inches, Width 3 25/32 Inches, Depth 3 1/2 Inches or comparable.

2. Extra Deep in-wall gang boxes

a. 3 3/4" Deep, 2 3/16" Wide, 3 7/8" High

b. 4 Knockouts, 2 Per End

Surface Mounted Raceway (SMR)

1. Surface mounted split channel raceway for power and data – similar to Wiremold 4000 or approved equal.

a. Coordinate all surface mounted raceway for telecom equipment with electrical installer.

b. Coordinate color and finish with architect prior to purchase and installation

Floor Boxes and Poke-through Device




1. Small Capacity In-floor box

a. Floor box cover shall be installed flush with surrounding flooring.

b. Coordinate all floor boxes and poke-through devices for telecom equipment with electrical installer.

c. Floor box shall meet latest UL standards for scrub water resistance

d. Four-Compartment Combination Box similar to Wiremold RBF4 or approved equal.

e. Top of box shall allow for matching floor finish insert and be constructed of metal

f. Provide all brackets and accessories for proper telecommunications installation.

2. Large Capacity In-floor box

a. Unit similar to multi-compartment FSR FL-500R with flush mounted cover or approved equal.

b. Floor box cover shall be installed flush with surrounding flooring.

3. Poke through

a. Unit shall be similar to Wiremold Evolution Series or approved equal with 5 gangs.

b. Unit shall contain low voltage equipment and associated electrical receptacles.

c. Coordinate installation amongst trades prior to purchase and installation.

Distribution Backboard

1. Plywood

a. ¾” AC-grade plywood shall be provided as shown on T drawing details to line the walls within the TR. The plywood should be provided in 4’ x 8’ sheets.

b. Plywood shall be void free and painted on all sides with two coats of fire-resistant paint.

Electrical Protection for Telecommunications

1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) and Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB)

a. Provide one TMGB in the Telecommunications Equipment Room as shown on T Drawings.

b. Provide a TGB in every Telecommunications Room and distribution cabinet location as shown on T Drawings.

c. The telecom grounding and bonding system shall be bonded to the main electrical ground for the facility.

Rack mounted power strip

1. Provide one 8 port transient, surge protection strip (UL Listed) for each rack or cabinet.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Site Verification of Conditions

1. Contractor shall ensure that sufficient space has been allocated for the installation of all equipment per T Drawings prior to Installation. Clearances and existing equipment should be taken into consideration. If insufficient space exists, the Design consultant should be notified in writing, before proceeding with Installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Distribution Racks and Cabinets

1. Racks shall be assembled such that mounting rails are exactly perpendicular to the base.

2. Racks shall be secured to the floor using appropriate anchors.

3. Racks shall be grounded to the TGB or appropriate building ground using a minimum #6 grounding wire.

Distribution Backboard

1. Securely fasten backboard to wall-framing members to ensure it can support attached equipment.

2. Mount plywood on all available areas where telecommunications equipment may be located.

3. Refer to T Drawings for minimum coverage.

Ladder Rack and Cable Tray

1. Ladder rack and cable tray shall be properly secured using manufacturer recommended anchors and connectors.

2. Ladder rack and cable tray shall be routed according to T Drawing floor plans.

3. Ladder rack and cable tray shall be bonded to ground according to TIA/EIA 607.

Firestop

1. Provide re-enterable, non-hardening, intumescent putty, rated for floors or wall, UL approved assembly, with approved packing material for fire stopping inside building cable penetrations thru conduits sleeves.

2. The material used for sealing all openings shall have a fire rating equal to or greater than the floor ceiling, wall or partition material.

Sleeves and openings

1. The telecommunications contractor shall provide sleeves through all walls and floors to protect cabling and or raceways installed as part of the telecommunications system. All sleeves shall extend through the respective wall or partition and finish with a connector protective bushing.

2. Sleeves through all fire rated structures shall have appropriate fire stop system.







STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 27 10 00 - STRUCTURED CABLING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Local Area Network (LAN) Cabling

B. Telephone Cabling

C. Termination Equipment for Telecommunications

D. Faceplates and Outlets

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. “Backbone Cabling” refers to telecommunications cabling that provides interconnections between telecommunications rooms, equipment rooms, and entrance facilities.

B. “Communications Network Outlet (CNO)” refers to a collection of one or more mechanical cable termination device for horizontal cable in the work area.

C. “Drop” refers to the vertical transition to a location of one or more CNOs.

D. “Horizontal Cabling” refers to the cabling between and including the work area communications network outlet and the horizontal cross-connect in the telecommunications room.

E. “Jack” refers to a female-style telecommunication receptacle.

F. “Telecom Room (TR)” refers to an enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect between the backbone or trunk cabling and horizontal cabling.

G. “Telecom Equipment Room (TER)” refers to a centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of the building, usually containing the headend equipment for the distribution systems found in the building.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Industry Codes, Standards and Methods shall be observed, including the following:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1 – General Requirements

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2 – Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-570-A: Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications




8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard

9. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), Twelfth Edition

10. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70): National Electrical Code (NEC)

B. Comply with all local, state and federal codes for telecommunications installations.


A. Design Requirements

1. LAN and Telephone Distribution:

Provide labor, materials, equipment, services and operations required for complete installation of LAN compatible with Ethernet 10Base-T (10Mbs), Fast Ethernet 100Base-T (100Mbs), 155Mbs ATM and Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base-T (1000Mbs) with single mode/multimode hybrid fiber optic backbone cable and Category 6 copper horizontal (station) wiring.

All wiring including copper and fiber optic employs a star topology.

i. Category 6 UTP wiring terminates on Category 6 RJ-45 jack at workstation and on Category 6 rack-mounted patch panel in telecommunications room. Connections wired per TIA/EIA-568A.

ii. Multi-strand composite fiber optic cable connects distribution racks between telecommunications rooms, and terminates on rack-mounted fiber optic patch panel.

Network cables routed from distribution racks throughout building as shown on T-Drawings. Drop to outlet installed in conduit and wall box, or dual-channel surface mounted raceway to communications outlet in classrooms, offices, or other locations indicated on T-Drawings.

i. Refer to notes on each drawing to determine exact installation methods.

ii. Note and record all cable lengths to the nearest foot.

iii. Replace any cable exceeding 90 meters (295 feet) and route to reduce length to a minimum of 90 meters. Complete all cable rerouting for compliance at no additional cost to School district.

iv. Identify to Design consultant prior to installation of any cables that cannot be reduced to 90 meters or less in total length (rise and run).

v. Strictly adhere to most current version of TIA/EIA Telecommunications cabling standards.

vi. Unless otherwise noted on T-Drawings, provide ladder-type cable tray from corridor to distribution racks and termination fields in telecommunication rooms.

vii. Install “waterfall” device providing sweep from cable tray to data rack/cabinet and other vertical transitions.

Data and Telephone outlets: Category 6 rated RJ-45 type connectors with all four copper pairs terminated and tested in accordance with EIA 568B wiring standard.




Fiber Optic Horizontal and Backbone Cables: Terminate on panels in each rack and connectors with ceramic sleeves. Terminate and test all strands unless otherwise noted.

Permanently identify and label all cables and termination devices, at distribution rack and workstation in accordance with ANSI TIA/EIA-606 Standard or as agreed by Design consultant and school district.

Remove and replace any cables failing to meet end-to-end testing requirements; do not abandon cable in place. All cable shall be terminated at both ends, unless noted in T-Drawings.

B. Performance Requirements

1. Comply with applicable requirements in Local, State and Federal Codes, TIA/EIA Standards, and BICSI methodology.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 0 and Division 1 - Submittals and as modified below.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications and similar information for the following items demonstrating compliance with the specified requirements.

1. Communications outlets, faceplates, and accessories.

2. Fiber optic cable, patch cables and terminations.

3. Copper cable, patch cables and termination devices.

4. Inner duct and accessories.

5. Rack configurations and wiring diagrams.

6. Network cabling test equipment and process (routines).

7. Outlets

C. Samples: Provide samples of outlets and assemblies as described below, prior to installation, for approval by designer.

1. Telecommunications outlets – Submit samples of telecommunications outlets to be provided including following components and characteristics:

Flush mounted and Raceway outlets – Completely assembled faceplate and wall box with each type of outlet to be mounted in faceplate, including blank covers, dust covers, labeling field, cabling, and adapter plates and bezels required.

Sample characteristics:

i. Provide all components in colors selected by Design consultant.

ii. Provide multiple outlet samples where required to accurately represent range of outlets to be provided.

D. The Contractor shall submit line drawings of all systems showing major components of the systems. Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all systems and equipment.

E. Quality Control Submittal

1. Test Reports: Submit complete sample test data and reports with exact labels used on cables, patch panels and faceplates.




2. Certificates

Manufacturer Certification: Submit certification from manufacturer of products to be installed under this contract certifying that Installer is authorized by manufacturer to install specified products.

Installer Experience Listing: Submit list of at least 5 completed projects as specified below in “Quality Assurance – Qualifications – Installer.”

F. Contract Closeout Submittal: Comply with requirements of Division 0, including submission of operating and maintenance instructions as item in “Operation and Maintenance Data” manual described in that Section.


A. All Work shall be installed in a first class, neat and workmanlike manner by skilled Technicians. The quality of the workmanship shall be subject to inspection and approval by authorized school district personnel. Any work found to be of inferior quality and/or workmanship shall be replaced and/or reworked until the approval of school district is obtained.

B. Installer Qualifications: Qualified to cable, terminate and test data network cabling system specified in this Section, certified by manufacturer of products to be installed, and completed at least 5 computer network installations of similar size, nature and complexity as specified for this project.

C. Conditions for Consideration of "Or Equal" Products: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal”, the proposed "or equal" product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If all the following conditions are not satisfied, Design Consultant will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

2. With the exception of the product name or number and manufacturer's name, proposed product conforms with requirements indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications in every respect and will produce indicated results.

3. Proposed product is fully documented and properly submitted.

4. Proposed product has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

5. Proposed product is compatible with AND has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

6. Proposed product provides specified warranty.







10. Submission is accompanied with proposed product's Manufacturer signed written statement on Manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Installer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s system warranty against electrical or mechanical defects for 1 year from date of final acceptance.

B. A fifteen (15) year Extended Product Warranty and Systems Assurance Warranty for this wiring system shall be provided by the Manufacturer as follows:

1. Extended Product Warranty: The Extended Product Warranty shall ensure against product and workmanship defects, that all approved cabling components exceed the specifications of TIA/EIA 568B and Addenda for fiber link/channels and copper components, for a fifteen (15) year period. The warranty shall apply to all passive components, including both cable and connecting hardware as a combined system. Any claims cover replacement costs on any defective product, both material and labor. Extended warranties beyond fifteen (15) years will be considered.

2. System Assurance: The System Assurance shall cover the failure of the wiring system to support the application which it was designed to support as well as additional application(s) introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums that use the TIA/EIA 568B component and link/channel specifications for cabling, for a fifteen (15) year period.

3. System Certification: Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the School district shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the manufacturing company, registering the installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.4 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be new and unused except as noted in T-series Drawings.

B. All cables shall be plenum rated

C. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good engineering practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet all state and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from all grounds and shorts.

D. Velcro straps shall be used for bundling wires. Wires shall be bundled loosely. Permanent cable ties are not acceptable.

E. Wiring system shall consist of the following:

1. Accessories and Appurtenances

2. Cable Management Devices

3. Fiber Optic Cable and Terminators (as indicated on drawings)

4. Copper and Fiber Patch cables

5. Remote Jacks

6. Termination/Patch Panels

7. Twisted Pair Data Cables




8. The work includes the provision for a complete and operable Local Area Network Building Data System consisting of active and non-active components. The cabling system and all wiring components shall meet and comprise an EIA/TIA Category 6 Wiring System. With master and remote data equipment the completed system shall provide 1Gbs Fiber Optic Fast Ethernet communications backbone support to the edge switches and Ethernet 1000 BASE-T to the workstation data jacks. The system shall provide such services as computer networking, data transmission, graphics and other multi-media offerings.

9. Provide one home run cable from each data/voice jack to appropriate wiring closet.

10. Cable length of home run cable shall not exceed 90 meters.

11. All Modular jack panels shall be wired to EIA/TIA 568B

2.5 HORIZONTAL CABLES

A. Category 6 100 ohm UTP Voice and Data cable

1. Hubbell C6SPxx

2. Hubbell C6RPxx

3. Hitachi 30025-8

4. Hitachi 30024-8

5. Belden

6. Berk-Tek

7. Systimax

8. Or approved equal.

2.6 BACKBONE CABLES

A. Multi-pair Cat 5e Riser Cables

1. Hitachi 30093-50

2. Hitachi 30172-100

3. Belden

4. Berk-Tek


B. Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cables

1. Hubbell HFC1012P3

2. Hitachi 60522-12

3. Corning

4. Berk-Tek


2.7 TERMINATION FIELDS




A. Category 6 48-Port Patch Panels

1. Provide 15% spare capacity

2. Hubbell P6E48U

3. Hubbell PCBLMGT Rear Cable Manager

4. Ortronics

5. Panduit

6. Systimax


B. Fiber Enclosure

1. Hubbell 2U FCR350SP36R

2. Hubbell 2U FCR350SP54R

3. Hubbell 3U FCR525SPR

4. Hubbell 4U FCR700SP

5. Ortronics

6. Panduit

7. Systimax


C. Fiber Adaptor Panels

1. Hubbell FSPLCDM6AQ

2. Hubbell FSPLCQM6AQ

3. Hubbell FSPLCDS6

4. Hubbell FSPLCQS3

5. Ortronics

6. Panduit

7. Systimax


D. Fiber Connector

1. Hubbell FCLC900K50GM12 50/125um OM3 Aqua

2. Hubbell FCLC900K50GM12 9/125 UPC

3. Ortronics

4. Panduit

5. Systimax





E. 110 Blocks

1. Hubbell 110BLK50FTK5



4. Ortronics

5. Panduit

6. Systimax


2.8 OUTLETS

A. Category 6 Voice and Data Jacks

1. Hubbell HXJ6xx (replace xx with specified colors)

2. Ortronics

3. Panduit

4. Systimax


B. Faceplates

1. Hubbell IFP11xx

2. Hubbell IFP12xx

3. Hubbell IFP13xx

4. Hubbell IFP14xx

5. Hubbell IFP16xx

6. Hubbell IFP26xx

7. Hubbell IFP29xx

8. Hubbell IFP212xx

9. Ortronics

10. Panduit

11. Systimax


2.9 PATCH CORDS

A. Copper Patch Cords

1. Hubbell HC6xx03




2. Hubbell HC6xx05

3. Hubbell HC6xx07

4. Hubbell HC6xx010

5. Hubbell HC6xx15

6. Hubbell HC6xx20

7. Hubbell HC6xx25

8. Ortronics

9. Panduit

10. Systimax


B. Fiber Patch Cords

1. Hubbell DFPCSCSCExMM

2. Ortronics

3. Panduit

4. Systimax


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which telecommunications cabling and equipment and related components are to be installed in coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify affected Prime Contractors and Design consultant in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to ensure a safe and timely installation.

1. When Installer confirms conditions as acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation and to ensure requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied, submit to Design consultant written confirmation from applicable Installer. Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will be assumed to indicate conditions are acceptable to Installer.

2. Visit Site to identify and become familiar with existing field conditions and specific requirements of each Site.

3. Verify all dimensions in field and confirm condition of existing hardware to be utilized.

4. Confirm space requirements and physical confines of all work areas to ensure that all materials can be installed in indicated spaces.

5. Confirm all outlet locations and cable pathways and advise Design consultant in writing of any discrepancies or issues in Design described in Contract Documents.

3.2 PREPARATION




A. Protection: Provide adequate protection of equipment and hardware before and after installation.

B. Existing Communications Services: Ensure all telecommunications systems (voice, video and data) remain operational throughout the project.

1. Identify any additional telecommunications outlets, circuits, and wiring at the site not shown on T-Drawings and interfering with installation of specified equipment.

2. Contact local telephone, network and CATV company to identify all circuits providing existing services.

3. Remove all accessible portions of abandoned communications cabling per NEC 800.52. Tag all communications cabling not terminated at both ends but retained for future use.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide and install all components necessary to install complete telecommunications cabling and equipment systems, including (but is not limited to) connectors, patch cables, terminators, etc…

1. Cable runs shall be continuous and unbroken from end to end. Splicing of any Telephone, LAN, or coaxial video distribution cable is prohibited. Horizontal cabling for LAN and telephone shall end in rack-mounted patch panels.

2. Secure all horizontal cables within ceiling cavities to building structure.

3. Loosely bundle all cables and support from structure at unequal intervals from 5 to 6 feet with spring steel fasteners and cable clip rated for use with high performance cables where cable tray or other support structure has not been provided as indicated on Drawings. All mounting clips shall be seismic type as per BOCA.

4. Do not violate manufacturer’s recommended loadings. Leave 30% capacity for future use of pathway.

5. Verify all horizontal cable run lengths prior to installation. Re-distribute horizontal cabling to maintain distance requirements and maintain pathway route accessibility.

6. Do not support cables from ceiling grid T-Bars, grid wire supports or bridle rings. Do not allow cables to touch ceiling grid.

7. Do not secure cables with permanent cable ties. Do not tighten cable bundles in such a way as to cause jacket deformation or damage.

8. Provide a 10-foot service loop in all fiber optical cables to permit future cable splice and repair at all building entrance points and termination points.

9. Place cables in compliance with TIA/EIA-568.B standards and BICSI recommended methods.

10. Tight 90-degree bends are unacceptable, and use of plastic “cinch-type” tie-wraps are not permitted, in order to prevent damage to cable jacket and compromise the cable’s electrical or optical characteristics.

11. Cable bundles shall be neatly routed with a service loop to provide 10 feet of slack at the cross-connect end and as noted in the T-drawings. Cable bundles shall be secured using only black Velcro cable wraps.

12. 10 feet of service loop shall be provided in the ceiling at each workstation. Contractor shall not secure service loop in coils, but route in such a manner as to minimize EMI.




13. Wireless outlet locations

Wireless locations shown on T-series drawings shall be installed outside of a faceplate.

Ceiling shall be marked and as-builts shall reflect the location of all terminated ends and service loops as directed by SCHOOL DISTRICT personnel.

Cable shall be terminated in a female RJ-45 female jack, and left with a service loop as described in T-series drawings. Cable shall be tested and documented per previous requirements.

After completion of wireless site survey, outlet shall be re-terminated for connection to Wireless Access Point.

B. Determine allowable cable proximity to other electrical power sources of 480 Volts or less using TIA/EIA-569A “Cabling Pathway Standard” for UTP cable separations from sources of EMI:

1. Minimum separation distance from Power Source at 480 V or less:

CONDITION < 2kVA 2-5 kV > 5 kVA

Unshielded power lines or electrical 6 in. 12 in. 24 in.

equipment in proximity to open or

non-metal pathways

Unshielded power lines or electrical 3 in. 6 in. 12 in.


non-metal pathways

Power lines enclosed in a grounded 3 in. 6 in. 12 in.

metal conduit (or equivalent shielding)

in proximity to grounded metal conduit

pathway

Transformers & Elec. Motors 40 in. 40 in. 40 in.

Fluorescent Lighting 12 in. 12 in. 12 in.

C. Interior Fiber Optical Cable Installation Requirements

1. Install all interior fiber optic backbone cables in 1-inch plenum-rated inner duct, similar to Pyramid Industries #PLM100(T) where fiber optical cable placed in cable tray or otherwise fully supported in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

2. Install all outdoor rated communications cables not rated for plenum placement in interior environments in metallic conduit, according to NEC Articles 770 and 800.

3. Install inner duct for fiber optic cabling in all conduits, as necessary for proper support of cables, or where required to assure pull-in tension not exceeding manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Provide pull strings or ropes in all conduit and inner duct used for communications cables.

D. Cabling System

1. Where not provided as part of the electrical work or the data/voice work, the Contractor shall furnish and install necessary conduit, raceways, pull boxes, outlet boxes and cable




to provide a complete system as herein specified. All wiring shall be tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short-circuits. All outlet boxes shall be as specified for other wiring devices; size as required by equipment manufacturer.

2. Cables shall be installed in raceways or EMT, as detailed on the drawings and/or as specified, above non-accessible ceilings, where exposed, and wherever it may be subject to physical damage. Where not provided as part of the electrical work or the data/voice work, the Contractor shall provide a raceway (conduit) from each outlet to above the accessible ceiling. Otherwise, cable shall be installed above accessible suspended tile ceilings and attached to building structure with approved bridle rings or J-hooks, cable is not permitted to rest on ceiling. The cable routes used shall avoid steam lines, power wiring and other utilities that may adversely affect the system's performance or result in damage to the cable. If the routes required place the cable in proximity to these utilities, the cable shall be suitably protected. Under no circumstances shall cable be run in hangers used for pipes or electric conduits nor shall the cable be supported in any way by attachment to these pipes, conduits or ceiling hangers.

3. During the installation work, improper bending, stretching, twisting, kinking, pinching or any other improper handling must not deform the cable. All cable runs shall contain "S" loops or other means to accommodate expansion and contraction. Coaxial cables shall not bend at any point of installation to a radius of less than ten times the diameter of the cable or less than the value recommended by the cable manufacturer. Cable connected to electronic equipment in the system shall be tagged to show its function and the location of its other end. All labels shall be of durable material and securely fastened to the cable.

4. All cables shall be fastened securely with suitable hardware so as to avoid sharp bends and to prevent rubbing against sharp corners and in a manner to prevent injury or physical distortion.

5. Wiring for all wall-mounted equipment shall be concealed in raceway (conduit) from outlet to above removable ceilings, unless noted otherwise.

6. Wiring installed above removable ceilings shall be installed on bridle rings. No cables shall be installed on roof or exterior of building.

7. Infrastructure properly terminated on backboard, neatly arranged in orderly fashion and accurately identified.

8. Equipment cabinet(s) anchored to wall or floor utilizing an approved method.

9. Install all exposed cabling in surface raceway by Wiremold, Hubbell or Panduit where in-wall conduit has not been provided. Follow all manufacturers’ guidelines requirements regarding bending radius and slack. All bends, offsets and fittings shall be appropriately sized to provide 30% capacity after installation.

E. Install all cable in accordance with National, state and local codes and TIA/EIA Standards, and BICSI methods.

1. Follow manufacturer’s guidelines and requirements for all cable termination.

2. Install and connect #6 AWG to bond all equipment racks, conduits and cable trays to busbar in each telecom room. Each telecom room shall be interconnected to TER with #3 AWG bonding backbone to TMGB per Telecommunications Grounding Diagram. It shall be left to licensed electrician to interconnect TMGB with lowest point of building ground. Contractor shall verify TMGB has been bonded to building ground before declaring completion.




F. Permanently identify all system components following TIA/EIA-606A “Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure” with identification format:

1. Identification: Provide permanent identification labels for outlets, faceplates, patch panels, access panels and entrance facilities.

2. Each individual cable shall be labeled on both ends of cable terminations regardless of cable intended use. Labels must be machine printed with permanent black ink on laminated white label material. Contractors must check with appropriate school district personnel for appropriate labeling scheme. The intended format and labeling material must be approved by school district Technology Department before labeling begins.

3.4 TESTING

A. LAN and Telephone

1. Upon completion of work, all parts of the telecommunications installation shall be tested by the Telecommunications Contractor and demonstrated free of any defects. Preliminary testing will be permitted but shall not be accepted in lieu of obtaining final test results. Final test results shall be accomplished by the use of proper test equipment for the system being tested.

2. Re-terminate and re-test any cables or pairs of cables failing end-to-end testing requirements. Replace any faulty cables/pairs or termination devices. Remove all defective cables completely from pathways.

B. As-Builts

1. Accurate as-built drawings shall be provided in electronic and hard copy format.

Drawings shall accurately show and describe all cable routing and equipment location in redline format.

3 copies of electronic (CAD) drawings shall be distributed on appropriate media: 1 to construction management, 1 to designers and 1 to the school district.

3 hard copies of CAD drawings shall be plotted on full size sheets and test results of every installed cable have been given to the construction management for appropriate distribution.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE

A. Contractors work shall be considered complete after the following conditions have been met:

1. Cable installation is complete and all cable runs have been tested and documented to be installed according to specifications and drawings.

2. A school district Technology representative has successfully tested the “LIVE” system.

3. All punch list items have been reconciled.

4. All disturbed ceiling panels, firestopping materials, covers, etc. have been properly reinstalled.

5. All materials and trash have been removed from the site.

6. A 1-Year Installers warranty has been given to a school district Technology representative.

7. Submit Manufacturers Extended Warranty Application.







VIDEO DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 27 40 00 - 1

February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 27 40 00 - VIDEO DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Digital Video Distribution

B. Digital Video Storage

C. Digital Video Servers

D. Digital Video Encoders and Decoders


A. Design Requirements:

1. Furnish and install all equipment for digital video capture, storage and streaming

2. Include all labor, materials, equipment and services required for complete installation and related work as specified in this Section including (but not limited to) connection of all circuits, apparatus, and equipment required to deliver completely operable system to School District, ready for use.

3. Coordinate installation with local cable service provider; including securing services of local cable service provider for providing complete and operational system as described below.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide fully integrated and operational television system capable of forward and reverse operations.

a. Provide outlets to allow for reception of forward channels as well as for insertion of remote origination information and/or remote control of head-end.

b. Provide each part of system complete in detail and operable in unison with all other sections, providing a completely installed television distribution system and connections, as described in this Section.

c. Provide all work, materials, and manner of placement in strict accordance with requirements of latest edition of National Electrical Code.

d. Provide all materials listed as complying with available standards of Underwriter's laboratories or other similarly established standards and carry their label. Apply all materials in strict accordance with Underwriter's laboratories listing.

e. All work described in this Section performed by Contractor or approved qualified subcontractor.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data





1. Submit manufacturer's latest publication, part numbers and quantity listings of all supplied components:

a. Severs

b. Storage Units

c. Encoders and Decoders

d. Software Applications

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Contractor shall submit original specification sheets or clear copies of the same on all items. Manufacturer’s name, make and model number shall appear on each sheet. Submittals shall be indexed and presented in a neat and logical order in a binder. Submittals shall contain installation, operation and programming manuals of the proposed equipment and systems to provide the Authority and Design consultant complete information as to system features, functions and capabilities.

2. The Contractor shall submit line drawings of all systems showing major components of the systems. Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all systems and equipment.

3. The Contractor shall submit to the Design consultant for approval, prior to the installation of any part of the video distribution system, design consultant drawings of the system showing the interconnections of all equipment with the designed video distribution system with calculated signal levels. Specification sheets covering all component parts of the system shall be submitted along with the design consultant drawings. The system and equipment as shown on the design consultant drawings and specification sheets shall meet all items of the specifications.

C. As-Built Drawings

1. Provide riser drawings of complete system including all device locations and cabling.

2. Provide 1/8” scale drawings in hardcopy and electronic CAD format for review and acceptance by the architect and owner.

1.4 QUALITY CRITERIA

A. Qualifications

1. All work in conjunction with this installation shall be in accordance with good design consultant practices. The installation shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code, State and local codes, ordinances and regulations of any other governing body having jurisdiction.

2. The Contractor shall submit a list to include at least five of the Contractor’s installations of the proposed Video Distribution systems, which have been in satisfactory operation for a minimum period of three years.

3. All system equipment shall be limited to the products regularly produced and recommended for service ratings in accordance with design consultant data or other comprehensive literature made available and in effect at the time of bidding.

4. The Contractor shall have been in the video distribution system integration installation business not less than 5 years prior to the bid date.





5. The Contractor shall be an authorized distributor for the proposed equipment and system with full manufacturer’s warranty privileges.

6. The Contractor shall maintain a complete inventory of all parts necessary for satisfactory service and maintenance of the proposed system.

7. The Contractor shall provide equipment of one manufacturer for the system and bulletin board components of the video distribution system unless specifically approved in writing by the Design consultant.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Regulations, Standards and Publications:

a. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code 2002” Articles 810 and 820

b. ANSI - TIA/EIA – 568B “Telecommunications Standard for Pathways”

c. IEEE Standard No: 205-2001

d. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), 12th Edition

2. System wiring shall be in accordance with good design consultant practices as established by the EIA and NEC. Wiring shall meet all established State and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from grounds and shorts.


A. Conditions for Consideration of "Or Equal" Products: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal”, the proposed "or equal" product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If all the following conditions are not satisfied, Design Consultant will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:



3. Proposed product t is fully documented and properly submitted.












1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver all materials in good condition, store in a dry place, off ground, and keep dry at all times.

B. Materials should be clearly marked with project name, number and Contractor’s name.

C. If equipment is dropped and damaged, it is to be replaced at the contractor’s expense.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall warrant the equipment to be new and free from defects in materials and workmanship and will, within two years from the date of acceptance, repair or replace all or any part of the equipment found to be defective. Warranty maintenance, shall be provided by the Contractor during normal working hours at no expense to the Authority.

B. At the completion of the job and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall guarantee in writing that the systems are properly adjusted and shall warrant the systems free from defects for a period of two (2) years from the date of Final Acceptance by the Authority. In addition, the Contractor shall provide a guaranteed service response time of not more than 48 hours from the time of receipt of a trouble call. Service and maintenance during the two-year warranty period shall include all parts and labor and shall be at no additional cost to the Authority.

1.8 AUTHORITY’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. A comprehensive installation, operation, programming and instruction manual shall be supplied as part of the system. The manual shall provide complete service information, including schematics, layout drawings, and interconnecting diagrams showing the location of all the outlets, cable taps, cable routes, and other installed components. Include final "as built" one line system drawings. Include for this particular project parts lists to permit quick and efficient maintenance and repair of the equipment by qualified technicians. Manuals shall include 8-1/2" x 11" device location/cabling route drawings provided in CAD format (AutoDesk - AutoCad 2004 or later). Manuals shall include a copy of the operations manuals. Manuals shall be indexed and neatly bound in a hardcover three ring binder. Three (3) copies of this manual shall be provided to the Authority upon project completion. Contractor shall retain a minimum of one (1) copy for their permanent records.

1.9 COMMISIONING

A. Authority reserves the right to determine the final approval of the system at the time of scheduled job completion. Failure to meet the installation schedule or provide the "precise functional equivalent" shall result in the removal of the system at the Contractor's expense

B. The Contractor shall furnish 3 - four (4) hour sessions of in service training with the system. Operating manuals and user guides shall be provided at the time of the training. Provide a minimum of three operating manuals.

1.10 MAINTENANCE





A. The Contractor or his subcontractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that he maintains a fully equipped service organization, capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system, including standard replacement parts. He or his agent shall be prepared to offer a service contract for the maintenance of the system after the guarantee period

B. Diagrams: The Contractor shall furnish three complete sets of operating instructions, including cable diagrams, and other information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance of the system components. As-built drawings of the system shall be supplied. These drawings shall include signal levels measured throughout the TV/video system as they were at the acceptance date of the system.

C. Service Calls: Provide 8 hours of service calls on system in school after final acceptance to make any adjustments necessary to keep system at peak operating condition. Service calls performed as requested by the School District. Warranty work is not included in the service call time.

D. Service Contract: Equipment Supplier: Accredited by proposed equipment manufacturers and prepared to offer service contract for system maintenance on completion of guarantee period and provide names, locations, and size of 10 recent successful installations in area; 24 hours per day service, with 24 hour non-emergency service response time provided, and including 1 hour emergency call response time on 365-day-per-year, 24 hours per day basis.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Video Distribution equipment basis of design: VBrick

1. Media Master

2. Haivision


B. Digital Signage equipment basis of design: Aavelin

1. VBrick

2. Or Approved Equal

C. Any products submitted as equals must be approved by the designer prior to approval and purchase and must provide equal or greater performance.

2.2 EXISTING PRODUCTS

A. The Contractor shall coordinate all interface requirements with new and existing equipment to insure seamless operation. Existing equipment is not to impede the usage of the new equipment.

B. Existing Products must be handled and cared for properly to prevent any damage during installation.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Video Head End and Distribution Equipment

1. Vbrick VEMS Mystro Standard Edition Portal (Software and Hardware) (8000-0171E06)





a. Haivision

b. Media Master

c. Or approved equivalent.

2. Vbrick Rack Mount Chassis (8570-1000E)

a. Haivision

b. Media Master


3. Vbrick 9000 Series Blades (9304-0000E000)

a. Haivision

b. Media Master


4. VBrick XPS 9000 Encoding A/V modules Standard Definition (9300-4312E000)

a. Haivision

b. Media Master


5. Vbrick H.264 Distributed Media Engine Model 7550 (8000-0223)

a. Haivision

b. Media Master


6. Vbrick Technical support (W1-UP-Gold Plus)

a. Haivision

b. Media Master


7. Vbrick Technical Servies Travel and Expenses (Techsupp_Travel_Day)

a. Haivision

b. Media Master


8. Vbrick Implementation Service (Techs_Implementation)

a. Haivision

b. Media Master






9. Blu Ray DVD Player

a. Panasonic

b. Samsung

c. Toshiba

d. Or approved equivalent.

10. Electronic Bulletin Board

a. Aavelin 1080P

b. VBrick

c. Media Master

d. Haivision

e. Or approved equivalent.

11. UPS Equipment

a. APC 3000 VAC 208/120 UPS

b. Tripplite

c. Minuteman

d. Or approved equivalent

12. VBrick Software

a. Haivision

b. Media Master


B. Video Cart Equipment

1. Luxor Video Cart (VPC40B with doors)

a. Spectrum

b. Anthro


2. Cart Television

a. Samsung LN32B650

b. Toshiba

c. Panasonic






3. HD Camera

a. Canon XA10

b. Panasonic

c. Sony


4. Microphone

a. Shure Hand Held Mic

b. VocoPro

c. AKG


5. Vbrick Encoder

a. 7000 H.264 Encoder

b. Haivision

c. Media Master


6. Gigabit Switch

a. Netgear Pro Safe 8 Port POE switch

b. Cisco

c. Alcatel


C. Coaxial Equipment

1. RG-11 Quad Shield Coaxial Cable

2. RG-6 Quad Shield Coaxial Cable

3. SRT Series Taps

4. SXRS Series Splitters

5. BIDA 55A-30 Amps

6. Pads

7. Equalizers

8. Blonder Tongue





9. Belden

10. Drake

11. Pico Macom

12. Or approved equivalent.

D. Accessories

1. Vbrick Set Top Box (HD H.264 Set Top Box)

a. Haivision

b. Media Master


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS

A. Contractor must be a licensed installer for the county or district for which the contract is registered. Contractor is responsible for the necessary permit to do the job. The contractor must have a minimum of three years of video digital installation with a school district and provide references for said work.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verifications of Conditions

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Distribution:

1. Where not provided as part of the electrical work or the data/voice work, the Contractor shall furnish and install necessary conduit, raceways, pull boxes, outlet boxes and cable to provide a complete system as herein specified. All wiring shall be tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short-circuits. All outlet boxes shall be as specified for other wiring devices; size as required by equipment manufacturer.

2. Cables shall be installed in pathways, as detailed on the drawings and/or as specified, above non-accessible ceilings, where exposed, and wherever it may be subject to physical damage. Where not provided as part of the electrical work or the data/voice work, the Contractor shall provide a raceway (conduit) from each outlet to above the accessible ceiling. Otherwise, cable shall be installed above accessible suspended tile ceilings and attached to building structure with approved bridle rings or J hooks, cable is not permitted to rest on ceiling. The cable routes used shall avoid steam lines, power wiring and other utilities that may adversely affect the system's performance or result in damage to the cable. If the routes required place the cable in proximity to these utilities, the cable shall be suitably protected. Under no circumstances shall cable be run in hangers used for pipes or electric conduits nor shall the cable be supported in any way by attachment to these pipes, conduits or ceiling hangers.

3. During the installation work, improper bending, stretching, twisting, kinking, pinching or any other improper handling must not deform the cable. All cable runs shall contain "S" loops or other means to accommodate expansion and contraction. Coaxial cables shall not bend at any point of installation to a radius of less than ten times the diameter of the





cable or less than the value recommended by the cable manufacturer. Cable connected to electronic equipment in the system shall be tagged to show its function and the location of its other end. All labels shall be of durable material and securely fastened to the cable.

4. Each reel of coaxial cable used in the system shall be sweep tested for transmission and structural return loss and be so certified in writing by the cable manufacturer. Transmission sweep tests shall establish conformance to guaranteed loss values from 50 - 1000 MHz. Structural return loss tests by sweep method shall show a minimum return loss of 26 dB RL VHF.


6. All connections shall be made with suitable connectors only at a known point or where otherwise indicated on the drawings to facilitate later system servicing. There shall be no splicing of coaxial cables.

7. All coaxial cables shall be installed in a manner to prevent sharp bends and pressure points that may cause the cable to lose its concentricity due to core migration. Particular care shall be taken where bridle rings are used.



10. Amplifiers and Multi-Taps properly mounted to painted backboard, neatly arranged in orderly fashion and accurately identified.


12. All head-end equipment securely installed within equipment cabinet(s) by screws, bolts, nuts, etc or by method approved by Design Consultant. All holes intended for equipment mounting used for securing equipment to rack. Provide all exposed hardware in same color and type, preferably matching cabinet finish (i.e. black cabinet-black rack screws).

13. Incoming service cable shall be provided by the CATV Company and shall be extended to the new headend location by the Contractor. Contractor is to schedule with the local cable service provider to ensure completion in a timely manner with project schedule.

14. Provide accurate documentation listing all equipment install under this section. This includes; equipment manuals, part numbers, serial numbers, warranties, and location of equipment. If information is found inaccurate during the one-year warranty period, Contractor is requires to re-verify all equipment information at no additional cost to client.


A. Site Tests and Inspections:

1. Test every television outlet for signal level, clear picture and remote origination/control (as applicable).





a. Select one outlet per cable tap and view picture with television. Observe all active channels. Ensure picture is clear with no visual presence of interference of any kind and no audible variance in volume level between channels.

b. Select one outlet per cable tap and perform remote origination/control. Using television placed on any outlet derived from same multi-tap, view remote origination. Ensure picture is clear with no visual presence of interference of any kind and no audible variance in volume level between channels.

2. Test all head-end equipment for proper frequency, audio/video carrier levels, and RF level outputs. Adjust all levels per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Perform all testing required for each building during same day.

4. Perform tests to all systems under direct supervision of manufacturer's representatives or accredited agencies for all specified equipment and services.

5. Submit all test results in tabular format with reference to or backed up by equipment/riser diagram that accurately represents installed system.

6. Submit written test report from authorized representative of equipment manufacturer stating that system has been tested and is in working order prior to final inspection by Design Consultant.

7. Upon completion of the installation of the equipment, the video Contractor shall provide to the Design consultant a signed statement from the equipment supplier that the system has been wired, tested, and functions properly according to the specifications.

8. The minimum operating test observations shall be as follows:

a. Should the demonstration of performance show that the Contractor has not properly balanced the system and that picture degradation is present or that the output is not as specified, the Contractor shall immediately make all necessary changes or adjustments at no additional cost to the Authority and a second performance demonstration conducted.

9. The testing agency making the measurements shall be identified, and the data must be signed and dated by the testing technician.

10. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and personnel required for the test.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. School District Training: Provide minimum 8 hours of training for School District personnel per building used at School District sole discretion and scheduled by School District to fit School District needs.

1. Training scheduled by School District in blocks of 2-8 hours.

2. Include all per diem, travel costs, etc., in cost of training.

3. Begin training after design consultant deems system physically complete and fully operation. Service time not deemed as training.

4. Include following minimum content in training:

a. General systems overview describing sub-systems and their relationships with each other.





b. Specifics on sub-systems and how to maintain them to ensure reliable operations.

c. Operation of equipment to perform intended tasks, including (but not limited to) remote origination, camera operation, television operation, cable patching, fuse replacement and so forth.

d. Provide written documentation for all training attendees to supplement training (i.e. diagrams, training outlines/highlights, etc.).




A/V AND SOUND 27 41 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 27 41 00 - AUDIO VISUAL AND SOUND SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Classroom Audio Visual Cabling Harness

2. Classroom Sound Enhancement System

3. Classroom Electronic Whiteboards and projectors (Not in Contract. Shown for reference only.)

4. Specialized Space Audio Visual Systems

a. Multi-Purpose Room

b. Gymnasium

c. Cafeteria

d. Music Rooms

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. “Sound Enhancement” refers to a stand alone sound system which includes speakers, speaker wire, an infrared microphone and receiver, a pendant style microphone and amp/mixer unit.

B. “Communications Network Outlet (CNO)” refers to a collection of one or more mechanical cable termination device for horizontal cable in the work area.

C. “Drop” refers to the vertical transition to a location of one or more CNOs.

D. “Horizontal Cabling” refers to the cabling between and including the work area communications network outlet and the horizontal cross-connect in the telecommunications room.

E. “Jack” refers to a female-style telecommunication receptacle.



1. Classroom sound distribution through a pendent style portable microphone and at least one hand held microphone per learning area.

2. Classroom amplifier/receiver must have audio inputs for at least three auxiliary devices and an additional input to allow transmitting of sound to ceiling speakers from the microphone.

3. Specialized Space Audio Visual Systems

a. Audio Visual systems shall be included for the Multipurpose Room, Cafeteria and Gymnasium.

b. A video input, control and projection system shall be included and handle analog and digital sources from a variety of input devices.

c. The system shall be controllable via wall remotes and computer based software applications.




d. A multi-loudspeaker system shall be provided. Loudspeakers shall be provided and place as shown on the drawings. Clearly label and color code the master volume control for all functions.

e. Hearing Assistance System - Provide a reinforcement system for the hearing impaired in the Multipurpose Room, Gymnasium and Cafeteria. The hearing assistance system shall be an FM radio system that shall not limit operation to certain seats or areas of the room(s). Provide approximately 20-40 milliseconds of high-quality digital signal delay to help in the localization of the sound source.

4. All stand alone sound systems must have call override from the Intercom/PA system in the case of an emergency.



2. Specified cabling system derived from recommendations in approved telecommunications industry codes, standards and methods, including the following documents:

a. Articles 250, 725, 760, 770, 800,810 and 820 of the current National Electrical Code.

b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1 – General Requirements

c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

d. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

e. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), 12th Edition

f. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70): National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Sound Amplifier

2. Sound Speakers

3. Sound Microphones

4. Sound Cabling and Wiring

5. Audio Visual cables and connectors

6. Electronic Whiteboard (NIC, shown for informational purposes only.)

7. Communications outlets, faceplates, and accessories.

8. Wall outlets




9. DSPs

10. Signal extenders

11. Signal Switchers

12. Projectors

13. Control Processors

14. Expansion Units

C. Samples: Provide samples of equipment, cables, microphones and assemblies as described below, prior to installation, for approval by designer.

1. Sound Enhancement – Submit samples of audio visual cables provided including following components and characteristics:

a. Sample characteristics:

i. Provide all components in colors selected by Design consultant.

ii. Provide multiple samples where required to accurately represent range of cables to be provided.

D. The Contractor shall submit line drawings of all systems showing major components of the systems. Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all systems and equipment.

E. Quality Control Submittal

1. Test Reports: Submit complete sample test data and reports with exact labels used on cables and faceplates.

2. Certificates

a. Manufacturer Certification: Submit certification from manufacturer of products to be installed under this contract certifying that Installer is authorized by manufacturer to install specified products.

b. Installer Experience Listing: Submit list of at least 5 completed projects as specified below in “Quality Assurance – Qualifications – Installer.”

F. Contract Closeout Submittal: Comply with requirements of Division 0, including submission of operating and maintenance instructions as item in “Operation and Maintenance Data” manual described in that Section.


A. All Work shall be installed in a first class, neat and professional manner by skilled Technicians. The quality of the workmanship shall be subject to inspection and approval by authorized school district personnel. Any work found to be of inferior quality and/or workmanship shall be replaced and/or reworked until the approval of the school district is obtained.

B. Installer Qualifications: Qualified to cable, terminate and test cabling system specified in this Section, certified by manufacturer of products to be installed, and completed at least 5 installations of similar size, nature and complexity as specified for this project.

C. Conditions for Consideration of "Or Equal" Products: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal”, the proposed "or equal" product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If all the following conditions are not satisfied,




Design Consultant will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:











1.6 WARRANTY


1. System Certification: Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the Authority shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the manufacturing company, registering the installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS – ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND UNUSED

A. Acceptable Products

1. Classroom A/V cabling (pre-terminated with barrel style connectors)

a. Rapid Run

b. Liberty Cable

c. Or approved equivalent

2. Classroom Sound Reinforcement System.

a. Smart Technologies




b. Listen Technologies

c. Rauland


3. Large Format Projectors

a. Epson

b. Panasonic

c. Or approved equivalent

4. Displays

a. Samsung

b. Toshiba


5. The Audio Visual Systems are based on Rane, Extron, Community, Shure, Atlas, Middle Atlantic, APC and other like reputable manufacturers.

a. Equipment substitutions must be submitted in writing to the design team for review and approval.

b. Any equipment not meeting the design criteria will be rejected at the contractor’s expense.

B. Classroom A/V Harness

1. The instructor’s station “Low” and “Projector” assembly shall include the following cables. (see T series drawings for exact cable types and connections)

2. Rapid Run Pre-terminated cables shall be used as the basis of design. Cables must be pre-terminated style cables with factory installed connectors.

a. Composite Stereo Audio

i. RCA style factory terminated connectors

ii. 3.5 MM Stereo terminated connectors

b. Composite Video

i. RCA style factory terminated connectors

c. SVGA

i. HD-15 Pin Video factory terminated connectors

d. HDMI

i. Active and Passive plates with factory terminated connectors

e. USB

i. Active and Passive devices for proper signal transmission for any location greater than 16 ft. apart.




3. Liberty Cable


C. Classroom Sound Equipment (Basis of Design, Smart Technolgies)

1. Control Unit

2. Room Module

3. Ceiling Speakers

4. Infrared Transmitting Microphone

5. Charging Cradle

6. Cable

a. Speaker Cable:

i. Class 2 or better plenum rated. (16 AWG)

b. Infrared Cable

i. RG – 6 Quad, plenum rated or Cat6 UTP.

7. Listen Technologies

8. Rauland


D. Projectors (provide in multipurpose, gym and cafeteria)

1. Epson G5650WUNL Projector

2. Panasonic

3. Samsung


E. Multipurpose Room, Cafeteria and Gymnasium Audio Visual Equipment: (substitutions must provide equal or greater performance) See Drawings for types, locations and quantities.

1. Equipment Cabinet

a. Basis of Design

i. Middle Atlantic SR-40-32 Wall Mounted Swing Cabinet

b. Lowell

c. Or approved equal.

2. A/V Scaling Switcher

a. Basis of Design

i. Extron DVS 510

b. Crestron


3. A/V HDMI Extender




a. Basis of Design

i. Extron DTP HDMI Tx/Rx

b. Crestron


4. A/V Receiver

a. Basis of Design

i. Extron MTP/HDMI UR

b. Crestron


5. A/V Transmitter

a. Basis of Design

i. Extron MTP/HDMI UTAD

b. Crestron


6. A/V HDMI Audio Dembedder

a. Basis of Design

i. Extron HAE100

b. Crestron


7. A/V Control Processor

a. Basis of Design

i. Extron IPCP 505

b. Creston


8. A/V Remote Control Wall Plate

a. Basis of design

i. Extron TLP 350

b. Crestron


9. A/V Cables

a. Basis of design

i. Extron recommended A/V cables for MTP Equipment




b. Cables shall be shielded as required by the manufacturer.

c. Crestron

d. Or approved equal.

10. Assistive Listening Equipment

a. Basis of Design

i. Listen Technologies LS-03

b. Williams Sound


11. Wireless Microphone Equipment

a. Basis of design

i. Shure SLX124/85/sm58

b. VocoPro


12. DVD/CD Player

a. Basis of Design

i. Tascam DV-D01U

b. Denon


13. Auxiliary Input Switcher

a. Basis of Design

i. RDL EZ-HSX4

b. RDL


14. Digital Signal Processor

a. Basis of design

i. Rane HAL1 DSP

b. Biamp


15. Digital Signal Processor Expansion Unit

a. Basis of Design

i. Rane Hal1 Expansion Unit

b. Biamp





16. Power Conditioner

a. Basis of Design

i. Atlas ECS-3

b. Furman


17. Equipment Drawer

a. Basis of design

i. Atlas SD4-14 Drawer

b. Lowell


18. Two Channel Amplifier

a. Basis of design

i. QSC GX7 Two Channel Amplifier

b. Crown


19. Two Channel Amplifier

a. Basis of design

i. QSC GX5 Two Channel Amplifier

b. Crown


20. UPS Equipment

a. Basis of design

i. APC 3000 120 VAC Smart Ups

b. Tripplite


21. Mic Level Input

a. Basis of design

b. Rane Rad1

c. Neutrik


22. Line Level Input




a. Basis of design

i. Rane Rad3

b. Neutrik

c. Or approve equal

23. Stereo Input

a. Basis of design

i. Rane Rad6

b. Neutrik

c. Or approved equal

24. Line Level Output

a. Basis of Design

i. Rane Rad2

b. Neutrik


25. Mic/Line Level Input

a. Basis of Design

i. Rane Rad4

b. Neutrik


26. Volume and Selector Control

a. Basis of Design

i. Rane DR3 Remote

b. Neutrik


27. Wired Microphone

a. Basis of Design

i. Shure SM58S

b. VocoPro


28. Podium Microphone

a. Basis of design

i. Shure MX 412/C Gooseneck Podium Microphone




b. VocoPro


29. Microphone Stands

a. Basis of design

i. Atlas TEB-E

b. ProLine


30. Loudspeakers

a. Basis of design

i. Community IHP1526 Speakers

ii. Community Veris 3594 and Veris 3564

b. QSC

c. Or approved equal

31. Wiring

a. Cat 5e or greater UTP for audio faceplate cables.

b. West Penn 226, or equal, for the cafeteria loudspeaker cluster circuits.

c. Specific cables shall be paired to manufacturer’s requirements.

d. West Penn Wire

e. Commscope

f. Belden

g. Or approved equal.

32. Miscellaneous Connectors

a. Basis if Design

i. Provide Neutrik NC3 series “XLR”, Neutrik NP3C “TRS” or Canare F-09 “RCA” connectors.

ii. Provide Switchcraft N112B connectors.

iii. Provide crimped or gas-tight terminals for all loudspeaker connections. Wirenuts are not acceptable.

b. Mouser


F. Displays

1. Basis of Design

a. Samsung 55” 650 Series 1080P LCD TV with tilting bracket




b. Samsung 46” 750 Series 1080P LCD TV with tilting bracket

2. Panasonic

3. Toshiba


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which AV cabling and sound enhancement equipment and related components are to be installed in coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify affected Prime Contractors and Design consultant in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to ensure a safe and timely installation.






3.2 PREPARATION



1. Identify any additional outlets, circuits, and wiring at the site not shown on T-Drawings and interfering with installation of specified equipment.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide and install all components necessary to install complete AV cabling and sound enhancement equipment systems, including (but is not limited to) connectors, electronics, terminators, pass-thrus, cables etc…

1. Cable runs shall be factory terminated. Splicing of any cable is prohibited

2. Secure all cables within ceiling cavities to building structure.






5. Verify all horizontal cable run lengths prior to installation. Ensure cables do not exceed distances that would degrade the signal transmission requirements


7. Install cables in EMT in all unfinished or exposed areas




11. Communications outlets shall be located to be no more than 6 feet from an electrical outlet.


1. Minimum separation distance from Power Source at 480 V or less:

CONDITION < 2kVA 2-5 Kva > 5 kVA

a. Unshielded power lines or electrical 6 in. 12 in. 24 in.


non-metal pathways

b. Unshielded power lines or electrical 3 in. 6 in. 12 in.


non-metal pathways

c. Power lines enclosed in a grounded 3 in. 6 in. 12 in.



pathway

d. Transformers & Elec. Motors 40 in. 40 in. 40 in.

e. Fluorescent Lighting 12 in. 12 in. 12 in.

C. Install all cable in accordance with National, state and local codes and TIA/EIA Standards, and BICSI methods.





D. Permanently identify all system components following TIA/EIA-606A “Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure” with identification format:

1. Identification: Provide permanent identification labels for outlets, faceplates and cables.

2. Each individual cable shall be labeled on both ends of cable terminations regardless of cable intended use. Labels must be machine printed with permanent black ink on laminated white label material. Contractors must check with appropriate school district personnel for appropriate labeling scheme. The intended format and labeling material must be approved by the school district Technology Department before labeling begins.

3.4 TESTING

A. Audio Visual Harness

1. The contractor shall test all cables included in the harness for proper signal transmission based on manufacturer standards.

2. The contractor shall record remove any cable that does not meet manufacturer standards and replace it with a correctly functioning cable.

3. The contractor shall demonstrate that the installed cables meet manufacturer standards for signal transmission prior to the job being considered complete.

B. A/V Systems

1. The contractor shall test all aspects of the Audio/Visual Systems once it is installed and demonstrate these functions to the owner of owner’s representative.

a. Speaker levels shall be verified to function individually and as a unit.

b. Video Displays shall be verified to display from all input sources.

c. Control of the system shall be shown to control all aspects of the systems.

d. Levels shall be set for all outputs.

e. EDID and HDCP compliance shall be setup and verified.

f. Microphones shall be demonstrated to work as intended by the manufacturer.

3.5 AS-BUILTS

A. As-builts shall be provided in hardcopy and electronic AutoCAD 2010 format or later.

B. As-builts shall show all devices, wiring, connections and components.

1. System setup and diagrams shall be included with as-built documentation

2. Labeling shall be included on as-built documentation.

3.6 ACCEPTANCE



2. Equipment installation is complete and all functions have been tested and documented to function as designed and per the manufacturer’s recommendations.





4. All disturbed ceiling panels, fire stopping materials, covers, etc. have been properly reinstalled.






Revision #5 - July 1, 2013

RADIO REPEATER SYSTEM 27 42 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 27 42 00 – RADIO REPEATER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. UHF Antenna System


A. Design Requirements:

1. Furnish and install a UHF Radio Repeater System in accordance with the requirements for Emergency Responder Radio Coverage found in Section 915 of The International Building Code 2009, New Jersey Edition and Section 510 of the International Fire Code 2009.

2. Include all labor, materials, equipment and services required for complete installation and related work as specified in this Section including (but not limited to) connection of all circuits, apparatus, and equipment required to deliver completely operable system to the School District, ready for use.

3. Pathway will be provided from the existing donor antenna location to the system head end.

4. System design shall take into account:

5. Potential sources of interference

6. Actual building construction materials

7. Expected traffic in every area and density will be provided to accommodate a 30% increase in capacity

8. BDA shall be located to minimize disruptions to other systems

9. Division 27 shall estimate RSSI signal levels at the donor location and provide a detailed system design that will meet the coverage and capacity requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. System shall be designed to provide better than -95 dBm coverage to no less than 95% of the structure.

10. The system shall consist of an NFPA 72-2007 rated Axell D-CSR 4004-A directional amplifier with a discrete distributed antenna system and donor antenna system. Areas that typically need to be evaluated for poor communications are: below grade rooms, parking garages, elevators and areas surrounded by metal and/or concrete. Radio Repeater System shall support the city’s First Responder radio network frequencies. It shall operate at the Fire Command Centre and elevators, elevator lobbies, emergency and standby power rooms, standpipe hose connection locations, the building engineer’s office, mechanical rooms, elevator equipment rooms, fire pump rooms, areas of refuge, entries into required exit stairways, rooms containing the main electrical service disconnecting means, stair enclosures, penthouses, and basements shall also be transparent to communication signals. Amplifiers shall be powered by a dedicated uninterruptible power source (UPS) with a minimum backup time of twelve (12) hours with all amplifiers at rated output. The UPS input circuit shall be a dedicated circuit and connected to the




emergency/standby generator. The circuit shall be provided with a listed “lock on” device.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide fully integrated and operational system capable of forward and reverse operations.

a. Minimum signal strength of -95 dBm shall be receivable within the building when measured in 95 percent of all areas on each floor.

b. Minimum signal strength of -100 dBm shall be received by the agency’s radio system when transmitted from within the building.

c. Ensure overall performance of system does not interfere with local cable service provider’s operations.

d. Provide each part of system complete in detail and operable in unison with all other sections, providing a completely installed television distribution system and connections, as described in this Section.

e. Provide all work, materials, and manner of placement in strict accordance with requirements of latest edition of National Electrical Code.

f. Provide all materials listed as complying with available standards of Underwriter's laboratories or other similarly established standards and carry their label. Apply all materials in strict accordance with Underwriter's laboratories listing.

g. All work described in this Section performed by Contractor or approved qualified subcontractor.

h. The Radio Repeater System shall be FCC approved and amplify the cities two-way radio signals to provide adequate radio coverage throughout the building or structure for the first responders.

i. The system shall be provided in accordance with the applicable International Fire Code and its amendments.

j. Provide necessary donor antenna(s) on the roof level.

k. All cable entry points shall be grounded and lightning arrestors shall be installed per R-56 standard.

l. All equipment shall be grounded per R-56 standard.

m. Provide fire rated coaxial cable with connectors from the roof level down to system head end equipment.

n. Provide plenum rated ½ inch coaxial cable with connectors for all horizontal runs. All materials installed in the plenum including passive devices, hangers, and ties shall be plenum rated.

o. Provide plenum rated fiber optic cable and connectors meeting manufacturer’s recommendations for all fiber runs.

p. Fire stopping shall be installed at any new or existing firewall penetrations.




q. All passive system components including but not limited to splitters, taps, directional couplers and indoor antennas shall support 450 MHz to 2500 MHz.

r. All equipment and materials shall be installed according to manufacturers’ recommendations.

s. All equipment and materials shall be new, not discontinued, and have at least a one year warranty.

t. All labor must be warranted for workmanship defects for a minimum period of one year

u. Installation shall be coordinated with the owner to ensure their macro radio network is not disrupted.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

1. Submit manufacturer's latest publication, part numbers and quantity listings of all supplied components:

a. Splitters and Directional Couplers

b. Cable types

c. Amplifiers

d. Antennas

e. Roof mounted antennas

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Contractor shall submit original specification sheets or clear copies of the same on all items. Manufacturer’s name, make and model number shall appear on each sheet. Submittals shall be indexed and presented in a neat and logical order in a binder. Submittals shall contain installation, operation and programming manuals of the proposed equipment and systems to provide the Authority and Design consultant complete information as to system features, functions and capabilities.

2. The Contractor shall submit line drawings of all systems showing major components of the systems. Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all systems and equipment.

3. The Contractor shall submit to the Design consultant for approval, prior to the installation of any part of the video distribution system, design consultant drawings of the system showing the interconnections of all equipment with the designed video distribution system with calculated signal levels. Specification sheets covering all component parts of the system shall be submitted along with the design consultant drawings. The system and equipment as shown on the design consultant drawings and specification sheets shall meet all items of the specifications.

4. System design documentation including design assumptions, power budgets, system block diagram, and floor plans showing cable routing, antenna locations, and equipment locations.




5. Product data sheets for all electronic equipment, fiber and coaxial cable, splitters, couplers and antennas.

6. Bill of materials including equipment and materials lead times.

7. Four references for prior Public Safety in-building reinforcement system installations.

8. Resumes for Design Engineer, Project Manager, and Installation Supervisor.

C. As-Built Drawings

1. Provide riser drawings of complete system including all device locations and cabling.

2. Provide 1/8” scale drawings in hardcopy and electronic format for review and acceptance by the architect and owner.

1.4 QUALITY CRITERIA

A. Qualifications

1. All work in conjunction with this installation shall be in accordance with good design consultant practices. The installation shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code, State and local codes, ordinances and regulations of any other governing body having jurisdiction.

2. The Contractor shall submit a list to include at least three (3) of the Contractor’s installations of the proposed radio repeater system, which have been in satisfactory operation for a minimum period of two (2) years.

3. All system equipment shall be limited to the products regularly produced and recommended for service ratings in accordance with design consultant data or other comprehensive literature made available and in effect at the time of bidding.

4. The Contractor shall have experience with the installation and performance of radio repeater systems of not less than two (2) years prior to the bid date.

5. The Contractor shall be an authorized distributor for the proposed equipment and system with full manufacturer’s warranty privileges.

6. The Contractor shall maintain a complete inventory of all parts necessary for satisfactory service and maintenance of the proposed system.

7. The Contractor shall provide equipment of one manufacturer for the system and bulletin board components of the video distribution system unless specifically approved in writing by the Design consultant.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Regulations, Standards and Publications:

a. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code 2011” Articles 810 and 820

b. ANSI- TIA/EIA – 568B “Telecommunications Standard for Pathways”

c. IEEE Standard No: 205-2001

d. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), 12th Edition




2. System wiring shall be in accordance with good design consultant practices as established by the EIA and NEC. Wiring shall meet all established State and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from grounds and shorts.


A. Conditions for Consideration of "Or Equal" Products: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal”, the proposed "or equal" product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If all the following conditions are not satisfied, Design Consultant will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:



3. Proposed product t is fully documented and properly submitted.









A. Deliver all materials in good condition, store in a dry place, off ground, and keep dry at all times.

B. Materials should be clearly marked with project name, number and Contractor’s name.

C. If equipment is dropped and damaged, it is to be replaced at the contractor’s expense.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall warrant the equipment to be new and free from defects in materials and workmanship and will, within two years from the date of acceptance, repair or




replace all or any part of the equipment found to be defective. Warranty maintenance, shall be provided by the Contractor during normal working hours at no expense to the Authority.

B. At the completion of the job and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall guarantee in writing that the systems are properly adjusted and shall warrant the systems free from defects for a period of two (2) years from the date of Final Acceptance by the Authority. In addition, the Contractor shall provide a guaranteed service response time of not more than 48 hours from the time of receipt of a trouble call. Service and maintenance during the two-year warranty period shall include all parts and labor and shall be at no additional cost to the Authority.

1.8 AUTHORITY’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. A comprehensive installation, operation, programming and instruction manual shall be supplied as part of the system. The manual shall provide complete service information, including schematics, layout drawings, and interconnecting diagrams showing the location of all the outlets, cable taps, cable routes, and other installed components. Include final "as built" one line system drawings. Include for this particular project parts lists to permit quick and efficient maintenance and repair of the equipment by qualified technicians. Manuals shall include 8-1/2" x 11" device location/cabling route drawings provided in CAD format (AutoDesk - AutoCad 2004 or later). Manuals shall include a copy of the operations manuals. Manuals shall be indexed and neatly bound in a hardcover three ring binder. Three (3) copies of this manual shall be provided to the Authority upon project completion. Contractor shall retain a minimum of one (1) copy for their permanent records.

1.9 COMMISIONING

A. Authority reserves the right to determine the final approval of the system at the time of scheduled job completion. Failure to meet the installation schedule or provide the "precise functional equivalent" shall result in the removal of the system at the Contractor's expense

B. The Contractor shall furnish 3 - four (4) hour sessions of in service training with the system. Operating manuals and user guides shall be provided at the time of the training. Provide a minimum of three operating manuals.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor or his subcontractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that he maintains a fully equipped service organization, capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system, including standard replacement parts. He or his agent shall be prepared to offer a service contract for the maintenance of the system after the guarantee period

B. Diagrams: The Contractor shall furnish three complete sets of operating instructions, including cable diagrams, and other information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance of the system components. As-built drawings of the system shall be supplied. These drawings shall include signal levels measured throughout the system as they were at the acceptance date of the system.

C. Service Calls: Provide 8 hours of service calls on system in school after final acceptance to make any adjustments necessary to keep system at peak operating condition. Service calls performed as requested by the School District. Warranty work is not included in the service call time.




D. Service Contract: Equipment Supplier: Accredited by proposed equipment manufacturers and prepared to offer service contract for system maintenance on completion of guarantee period and provide names, locations, and size of 10 recent successful installations in area; 24 hours per day service, with 24 hour non-emergency service response time provided, and including 1 hour emergency call response time on 365-day-per-year, 24 hours per day basis.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Radio Repeater System: Axell Wireless and LMR shall be the basis of design

1. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Motorola

b. Nexedge

c. Or Approved Equal

2.2 UHF ANTENNA SYSTEM

A. Coaxial Cable and Connectors

1. LMR-400 or approved equal.

B. Plenum Rated Air-Dielectric Coaxial Cable

1. RFS ICA12-50JPL ½” ClearFill or approved equal for in-building applications.

C. Amplifiers

1. Basis of Design: Axell D-CSR-4004-A

2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Motorola

b. Nexedge

c. Or Approved Equal

D. Exterior Antenna

1. Commscope DB499A Antenna Yagi or approved equal.

E. 450-470 MHz Antenna

1. Laird Technologies or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS

A. Contractor must be a licensed installer for the county or district for which the contract is registered. Contractor is responsible for the necessary permit to do the job. The contractor must have a minimum of three years installation with a school district and provide references for said work.




3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verifications of Conditions

1. Contractor is subject to random examinations by the design firm for verification of conditions on the installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Distribution:

1. Where not provided as part of the electrical work or the data/voice work, the Contractor shall furnish and install necessary conduit, raceways, pull boxes, outlet boxes and cable to provide a complete system as herein specified. All wiring shall be tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short-circuits. All outlet boxes shall be as specified for other wiring devices; size as required by equipment manufacturer.

2. Cables shall be installed in pathways, as detailed on the drawings and/or as specified, above non-accessible ceilings, where exposed, and wherever it may be subject to physical damage. Where not provided as part of the electrical work or the data/voice work, the Contractor shall provide a raceway (conduit) from each outlet to above the accessible ceiling. Otherwise, cable shall be installed above accessible suspended tile ceilings and attached to building structure with approved bridle rings or J hooks, cable is not permitted to rest on ceiling. The cable routes used shall avoid steam lines, power wiring and other utilities that may adversely affect the system's performance or result in damage to the cable. If the routes required place the cable in proximity to these utilities, the cable shall be suitably protected. Under no circumstances shall cable be run in hangers used for pipes or electric conduits nor shall the cable be supported in any way by attachment to these pipes, conduits or ceiling hangers.

3. During the installation work, improper bending, stretching, twisting, kinking, pinching or any other improper handling must not deform the cable. All cable runs shall contain "S" loops or other means to accommodate expansion and contraction. Coaxial cables shall not bend at any point of installation to a radius of less than ten times the diameter of the cable or less than the value recommended by the cable manufacturer. Cable connected to electronic equipment in the system shall be tagged to show its function and the location of its other end. All labels shall be of durable material and securely fastened to the cable.


5. All connections shall be made with suitable connectors only at a known point or where otherwise indicated on the drawings to facilitate later system servicing. There shall be no splicing of coaxial cables.

6. All coaxial cables shall be installed in a manner to prevent sharp bends and pressure points that may cause the cable to lose its concentricity due to core migration. Particular care shall be taken where bridle rings are used.






9. Amplifiers and Multi-Taps properly mounted to painted backboard, neatly arranged in orderly fashion and accurately identified.


11. All head-end equipment securely installed within equipment cabinet(s) by screws, bolts, nuts, etc or by method approved by Design Consultant. All holes intended for equipment mounting used for securing equipment to rack. Provide all exposed hardware in same color and type, preferably matching cabinet finish (i.e. black cabinet-black rack screws).

12. Provide accurate documentation listing all equipment install under this section. This includes; equipment manuals, part numbers, serial numbers, warranties, and location of equipment. If information is found inaccurate during the one-year warranty period, Contractor is requires to re-verify all equipment information at no additional cost to client.

13. As-built system design documentation including design assumptions, power budgets, system block diagram, and floor plans showing cable routing, antenna locations, and equipment locations.

14. Product data sheets for all electronic equipment, fiber and coaxial cable, splitters, couplers and antennas.

15. Final bill of materials.

16. Test results of as-built system verifying system meets design requirements including:

17. Results of test showing RSSI and MOS scores measured at discrete points shall comply fully with IBC section 915 and IFC section 510.

18. RSSI levels at each interior antenna.

19. BDA commissioning documentation including date of commission, actual off-air downlink levels at the donor antenna and BDA, isolation between the donor antenna(s) and the DAS, and BDA gain and AGC settings.

20. Training for up to four personnel on the system, not to exceed two hours. Training manuals shall include product data sheets, as-built system documentation, and system testing and commissioning documentation.


A. Site Tests and Inspections:

1. Test every location for signal level:

2. Test all head-end equipment for proper frequency, audio/video carrier levels, and RF level outputs. Adjust all levels per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Perform all testing required for each building during same day.

4. Perform tests to all systems under direct supervision of manufacturer's representatives or accredited agencies for all specified equipment and services.




5. Submit all test results in tabular format with reference to or backed up by equipment/riser diagram that accurately represents installed system.

6. Submit written test report from authorized representative of equipment manufacturer stating that system has been tested and is in working order prior to final inspection by Design Consultant.

7. Upon completion of the installation of the equipment, the Contractor shall provide to the Design consultant a signed statement from the equipment supplier that the system has been wired, tested, and functions properly according to the specifications.

8. The testing agency making the measurements shall be identified, and the data must be signed and dated by the testing technician.

9. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and personnel required for the test.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. School District Training: Provide minimum 8 hours of training for School District personnel per building used at School District sole discretion and scheduled by School District to fit School District needs.

1. Training scheduled by School District in blocks of 2-8 hours.

2. Include all per diem, travel costs, etc., in cost of training.

3. Begin training after design consultant deems system physically complete and fully operation. Service time not deemed as training.

4. Include following minimum content in training:

a. General systems overview describing sub-systems and their relationships with each other.

b. Specifics on sub-systems and how to maintain them to ensure reliable operations.

c. Operation of equipment to perform intended tasks, including (but not limited to) remote origination, camera operation, television operation, cable patching, fuse replacement and so forth.

d. Provide written documentation for all training attendees to supplement training (i.e. diagrams, training outlines/highlights, etc.).




INTERCOM & CLOCK 27 50 00 - 1


SECTION 27 50 00 – INTERCOM AND CLOCKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYS

A. Section Includes

1. This section and associated drawings define a communications system for an intercom, public address and master clock system. The contractor shall provide all infrastructure, cable, hardware and equipment as defined to provide a complete and operational system.



1. Intercom/PA/Master Clock System

a. The facility intercommunication system shall be a low voltage system that utilizes a copper cable infrastructure to distribute a user-defined input in a single or bi-directional manner. The system shall be capable of multiple, simultaneous conversations on separate channels throughout the facility through telephones and loudspeaker assemblies.

b. A programmable master for tone distribution schedule shall also be included as part of the overall system.

c. The system shall be microprocessor based and have to ability to interconnect with the telephone system installed within the facility if future connection is required. In addition, the system must be expandable to meet the user’s future expansion needs and be programmable from a computer terminal located at the facility.


1. Rack/Cabinet mountable equipment

2. Announcement distribution from a central location to zones, individual classrooms, groups or all facility speakers

3. Broadcast of user defined input (radio signal, compact disc, aux input, etc.) to zones, individual rooms, groups or all facility loudspeakers

4. Emergency cut-in to all speakers in an emergency situation from a central location

5. Two-way intercommunication between the central rack, any call-in location or any selected two-way speaker location

6. Hands free communications by means of a loudspeaker or speakerphone used as a transducer or speaker/microphone combination

7. Visual and audio monitoring of all intercommunication system activity

8. Volume and level controls for all centrally located intercommunication system equipment

9. Tone distribution based off the master clock that can be partitioned into zones

10. Capability to tie into any auxiliary sound system throughout the facility





11. High priority call-in from any telephone in an emergency situation

C. Regulatory requirements

1. All work will conform to the National Electric Code and applicable local ordinances.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Submit the shop drawings, product data and quality control submittals specified below at the same time as the package

2. Shop Drawings shall include the following items but are not limited to:

a. Wire types

b. System wiring diagrams showing all connections

c. Drawings including all equipment locations

d. Associated equipment specifications and cut sheets

e. Product data including catalog cut sheets, manufacturer’s default specifications, user operation guides and a bill of materials

C. Quality Control Submittal

1. Submit the name, address and telephone number of the nearest fully equipped service organization.

2. Submit a certificate of completion of installation and service training from the system manufacturer.

3. Certificates



D. Contract Closeout Submittal: Comply with requirements of Division 0, including submission of operating and maintenance instructions as item in “Operation and Maintenance Data” manual described in that Section.

1.4 AS-BUILTS

A. All systems must have as-built drawings provided in electronic CAD and hardcopy format that clearly show all system components, wiring schemes and system interconnections.


A. All Work shall be installed in a first class, neat and workmanlike manner by skilled Technicians. The quality of the workmanship shall be subject to inspection and approval by authorized





WCPS personnel. Any work found to be of inferior quality and/or workmanship shall be replaced and/or reworked until the approval of WCPS is obtained.

B. Qualifications

1. Installer

a. Must be qualified to cable, terminate, install and program the equipment specified in this Section, certified by manufacturer of products to be installed, and completed at least 5 installations of similar size, nature and complexity as specified for this project.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s system warranty against electrical or mechanical defects for 1 year from date of final acceptance.

1. System Assurance: The System Assurance shall cover the failure of the wiring system to support the application which it was designed to support as well as additional application(s) introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums


1.7 TRAINING

A. Installing contractor shall provide a minimum of 8 hours of training on system operation and managements as part of their scope of work.

1. Additional hours shall be provided on a time and materials basis at the request of the owner.

B. Installing contractor shall provide a video recording on a standard format DVD to the owner which includes training sessions.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Installing contractor shall provide a minimum of two hardcopy and one electronic copy of all operation and maintenance manuals to the owner at project completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers

1. The intercom system shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer with a proper support and maintenance operation in place. No substitutions for these systems.

a. Intercom shall be a Bogen Quantum System

b. Clocks shall be a Bogen IP System

2.2 MATERIALS

A. CONSOLE





1. Rack-mounted equipment shall be Bogen Model TCPER

a. 77” Rack

B. MCRMP / MCMP / QRC24-48 (Compact Rack System)

1. Rack Mount full, Mini-System, or Wall Mount panel. Shall include the following components:

a. Quantum Processor Card QSPC1

b. Analog Card

c. Station Card

d. Telephone Interface Card

e. 5 volt / 12 volt Power Supply

f. 26 volt Power Supply(s)

g. Audio Program Module Interface Assembly

C. MCRMF / MCMF / QRC24-48

1. MCRMF Rack mounting mainframe. Includes built-in ventilation fans and the following circuit cards:

a. Quantum Processor Card

b. Analog Card

c. Station Card


e. Ribbon Cable Assembly

2. MCF Wall Mount mounting mainframe. Utilizes convection cooling and the following circuit cards:


b. Analog Card

c. Station Card


3. QCR24 / QCR48 Compact Quantum Rack System Mainframe (1 per Mini-System). Includes built-in ventilation fan and the following circuit cards:


b. Analog Card

c. Station Card






D. MCRRP / MCRRC / MCRC

1. Relay Module/Card

E. MCRCA

1. Ribbon Cable Assemblies

F. Program Sources

1. Bogen CD Player

2. Bogen AM/FM Tuner

3. Bogen Desktop Paging Microphone

G. Power Amplifiers

1. Bogen 60-Watt Amplifier



H. Bogen Station Equipment

1. Administrative Display Phone

2. Administrative VoIP Phone

3. Administrative Wall-Mount Phone

4. Administrative Desktop Phone

5. Secure Call - Call Assurance Call-in Switch

6. Call switch with Privacy

7. Rocker-style Call Switch

I. Optional Bogen Equipment

1. Telephone Access Card

2. Telemedia Control Unit

3. Television Control Unit

4. Handheld Infrared Transmitter

J. Administrative Phone

1. Admin phones shall be one of the following Bogen Model(s)

a. MCDS4 – Administrative Display Phone

b. QSIP1 – Administrative VoIP Phone (Desk or Wall)

K. Call Staff Stations





1. Staff Stations shall be Bogen Model:

a. SC1 – Secure Call - Call Assurance Call-in Switch

b. CA21B – Call Switch with Privacy

L. Intercom System Speakers

1. Classroom Speakers shall be Bogen:

a. Ceiling Speakers: CSD2X2 Drop-In Ceiling Speakers

b. Wall Speakers: MB8TSQ/SL Metal Box Speakers

2. Hallway Speakers shall be Bogen:

a. Ceiling Speakers: CSD2X2 Drop-In Ceiling Speakers

b. Wall Speakers: MB8TSQ/SL Metal Box Speakers

3. Outdoor / Gym / Locker Room Speakers shall be Bogen:

a. FMH15T mounted in BBSM6 surface-mounted vandal-resistant enclosure/BBFM6 flush-mounted vandal-resistant enclosure with FMHAR8 adapter ring and SGHD8 heavy duty grille

b. KFLDS30T Wide Dispersion Reentrant Horn Loudspeakers

4. Common Area Speakers shall be Bogen:

a. HFCS1 High-Fidelity Ceiling Speakers

b. OCS1 NEAR Orbit Ceiling Speakers

c. OPS1 NEAR Orbit Pendent Speaker

M. MASTER CLOCK

1. Bogen BCMA 8000

N. CORRECTABLE SECONDARY CLOCKS

1. Bogen BCAP Analog IP clocks

O. CORRIDOR CLOCKS

1. Bogen BCAP Analog IP Clocks

P. Intercom and Clock Wiring

1. Cat 6 UTP (Shall be identical to Cat 6 UTP in Section 27 10 00)

2. 2 Conductor 18 AWG or greater

3. 4 Conduictor 18 AWG or greater

4. 4 Conductor (2 Shielded) 18 AWG or greater

5. Per manufacturer’s specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION





3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which telecommunications cabling and equipment and related components are to be installed in coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify affected Prime Contractors and Design consultant in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to ensure a safe and timely installation.





5. Confirm all device locations and cable pathways and advise Design consultant in writing of any discrepancies or issues in Design described in Contract Documents.

3.2 PREPARATION



1. Identify any additional intercom equipment, devices, and wiring at the site not shown on T-Drawings and interfering with installation of specified equipment.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide and install all components necessary to install complete intercom/PA/master clock system, including (but is not limited to) cable, connectors, patch panels, call switches, speakers, etc…

B. Secure all horizontal cables within ceiling cavities to building structure.

1. Loosely bundle all cables and support from structure at unequal intervals from 5 to 6 feet with spring steel fasteners and cable clip rated for use with high performance cables (similar to Caddy Series “CableCat” or approved alternate mounting methods) including placement in cable tray as indicated on Drawings. All mounting clips shall be seismic type as per BOCA.







4. Do not support cables from ceiling grid T-Bars, grid wire supports or bridle rings.

5. Do not allow cables to touch ceiling grid.

6. Install cables in EMT conduit in all unfinished, exposed areas as shown in Design consultant roof plans and/or T-Drawings, unless alternate pathways are noted.




C. Install all exposed cabling in surface raceway by Wiremold, Hubbell or Panduit where in-wall conduit has not been provided. Follow all manufacturers’ guidelines requirements regarding bending radius and slack. All bends, offsets and fittings shall be appropriately sized to provide 30% capacity after installation.

D. Install all cable in accordance with National, state and local codes and TIA/EIA Standards, and BICSI methods.


2. Follow detail drawings to locate equipment racks and cabinets. Where it is necessary to deviate, to obtain 30-inch clearance between equipment, obtain Design consultant’s written approval before mounting cabinet/rack.

3. Ladder-type cable tray shall be affixed 6 inches above all data racks and equipment cabinets, and routed to all points of entry into each telecommunications room.

a. Include transition to proper height for penetration into hallway or other wall penetration as indicated on Drawings.

b. Install sufficient 4-inch conduits from telecom rooms into hallway (minimum of 2) with protective insulating bushings, cable spillway or specially designed cable tray sections, with appropriate firestop materials.

E. Properly terminate all cables at speakers, call switches, administrative consoles and distribution racks. Permanently identify all cables in pullboxes, transition points, and termination points by affixing pre-marked self-adhesive wraps similar to Brady “B-500+ Plastic Cloth Markers.”


1. Identification: Provide permanent identification labels for end devices and associated cabling at each end.

3.4 TESTING

A. Intercom/Clock System







3.5 AS-BUILTS

A. Accurate as-built drawings shall be provided in electronic and hard copy format.

a. All equipment shall be shown in its exact location

b. All cables shall be labeled appropriately.

c. All cameras shall be labeled and uniquely identified.

d. 3 copies of electronic (CAD) drawings shall be distributed on appropriate media: 1 to construction management, 1 to designers and 1 to the school district.

e. 3 hard copies of CAD drawings shall be plotted on full size sheets and test results of every installed cable and camera have been given to the construction management for appropriate distribution.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Intercom/Clock System Demonstration

1. 16 Hours of demonstration and training on all aspects of the completely installed system must be provided for the owner.

a. Training shall be video recorded for the owner and given to them after acceptance.

b. Training and system demonstration must include all aspects of the system and it operation.

c. Additional training, beyond the initial 16 hours, shall be provided for the owner at their request on an hourly rate basis.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE





4. All disturbed ceiling panels, covers, etc. have been properly reinstalled.







7. Submit Manufacturer’s Warranty Application.




INTRUSION AND ACCESS 28 10 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 28 10 00 - INTRUSION AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Intrusion Detection cabling

B. Intrusion Detection sensors

C. Intrusion Detection end devices

D. Intrusion Detection headend equipment

E. Access Control Server

F. Access Control Hardware

G. Card Readers

H. Associated Cabling

I. Entry Door Video Intercom

J. Manual Door Release System

K. Access and Intrusion Servers and Software

L. Associated power supplies, terminations, equipment, labeling and associated cable performance testing.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Intrusion Detection system refers to burglar alarm equipment including motion detectors, door contacts, control panels, communication panels, power supplies, expansion modules and associated wiring.

B. Access Control system refers to card readers, cabling, electronics, access cards and system database to allow or prevent access to the facility.



1. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services and operations required for a complete installation an Intrusion Detection System.

a. Base panel

b. Expansion modules

c. Keypads

d. Annunciators

e. Motion Detectors

f. Door Contacts

g. Communication Modules

h. Power Supplies




i. Controllers

j. Card Readers

k. Servers

l. Application Software

2. All wiring shall be wired according to manufactures specifications.

a. Refer to notes on each drawing to determine exact installation methods.

b. Strictly adhere to most current version of TIA/EIA Telecommunications cabling standards.

c. Permanently identify and label all cables and termination devices, at distribution rack and workstation in accordance with ANSI TIA/EIA-606 Standard or as agreed by Design consultant and Authority.

d. Remove and replace any cables failing to meet end-to-end testing requirements; do not abandon cable in place. All cable shall be terminated at both ends, unless noted in T-Drawings.


1. The system shall produce a signal if the system is breached by an unauthorized user.

2. Each sensor shall be individually alarmed.

3. The system shall be capable of a minimum of 8 partitions.

4. The system shall be capable of being scheduled.

5. The system shall be capable of being controlled from the main panel, keypad locations, central station and PC connected to the LAN.

6. The intrusion detection system will alert and record movement throughout the facility that is both authorized and unauthorized.

7. The systems will be capable of communicating onsite as well as to remote locations.

8. The systems shall be controllable in case of emergency situation.

9. All systems shall operate on dedicated circuits with associated cabling in EMT.





c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2 – Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components and subsections.




d. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components

e. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

f. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

g. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

h. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), 12th Edition

i. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70): National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Motion Detectors, Door Contacts, Keypads

2. Headend Control Panels and Communications Modules

3. Power supplies

4. Copper cable and termination devices.


6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Card Readers

8. Controllers

9. Servers

C. Samples: Provide samples of assemblies and connections as described below, prior to installation, for approval by designer.

1. Intrusion Detection cables and connections – Submit samples of cables and terminations to be provided including following components and characteristics:

a. Provide all components in colors selected by Design consultant.

D. Quality Control Submittal

1. Test Reports: Submit complete sample test data and reports with exact labels used on cables termination fields.

2. Certificates






E. Contract Closeout Submittal: Comply with requirements of Division 0, including submission of operating and maintenance instructions as item in “Operation and Maintenance Data” manual described in that Section.


A. All Work shall be installed in a first class, neat and workmanlike manner by skilled Technicians. The quality of the workmanship shall be subject to inspection and approval by authorized school district personnel. Any work found to be of inferior quality and/or workmanship shall be replaced and/or reworked until the approval of school district personnel is obtained.

B. Qualifications

1. Installer

a. Qualified to cable, terminate, program and test Intrusion Detection systems, and associated power wiring specified in this Section and other Division 27 and 28 series specifications, certified by manufacturer of products to be installed, and completed at least 5 installations of similar size, nature and complexity as specified for this project.















1.6 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer warranty coverage for cable systems associated with the Intrusion Detection System and associated Access Control System

1.7 TRAINING

A. Installing contractor shall provide a minimum of 8 hours of training on system operation and managements as part of their scope of work.

1. Additional hours shall be provided on a time and materials basis at the request of the owner.

B. Installing contractor shall provide a video recording on a standard format DVD to the owner which includes training sessions.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Installing contractor shall provide a minimum of two hardcopy and one electronic copy of all operation and maintenance manuals to the owner at project completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design

1. Intrusion Detection – Bosch (No Substitutes)

2. Access Control –Lenel (No Substitutions)

3. Entry Door Video Intercom – AIPHONE

4. Manual Door Release System – Ingersoll Rand (Schlage) (No Substitutions)

5. Any system component not meeting the design and performance criteria will be rejected.

2.2 INTRUSION DETECTION

A. Main Panel

1. Bosch D9412GV4

B. Expansion Modules

1. Bosch D8125 Popex Zone Expander

2. Bosch D8128D OCTO POPIT

C. Motion Detectors

1. Bosch AX 970 Dual Tech @70’

2. Bosch AX 835 Dual Tech @35’




D. Door Contacts

1. GE Security 1078 W-N

E. Communications Modules

1. Conettix B420 Ethernet Communication Module

F. Power Supplies

1. Altronix AL400 VLX 12/24 V

G. Wiring

1. Wire 8C, 22AWG for 2000’ range

2. Wire 4C, 22AWG for 5000’ range

H. Battery Backup

1. D1238 Battery

2.3 ACCESS CONTROL

A. Copper Cabling Components for security systems

1. Cable shall be identical to cable types in Section 27 10 00.

2. UTP Cabling (Plenum Rated)

a. Cabling shall provide identical performance to Cat 6 UTP data and voice cabling included in Section 27 10 00 and meet all district performance criteria.

b. Requirements: Complete balanced, twisted-pair compliant with current Category 6 provisions under TIA/EIA 568B Telecommunications Cabling Standard, including but not limited to:

i. “Component compliant” components certified to meet all requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.2 “Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components.”

ii. After assembly into completed cabling channel, all components meet performance requirements as specified in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and B.2, meet cable manufacturer’s and outlet manufacturer’s performance requirements and are performance certified for Category 6 as a complete channel system.

iii. Shall meet specified physical and transmission characteristics requirements.

iv. Exceed minimum performance requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B by significant margin. Cabling solutions not demonstrating significant margin are not acceptable.

c. Physical Characteristics

i. 100 Ohm Category 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable (UTP)

ii. Meeting requirements of ANSI/ICEA S-80-576. For cables not specified in “Approved Components” paragraph, all 4 pairs insulated with F.E.P. providing maximum 0.023-inch diameter of insulated conductor.

iii. Security data cable shall be green in color

iv. Acceptable Cable




(a) See section 27 10 00

(b) Or Approved Equivalent

v. Consists of four 22 - 26 AWG twisted pairs.

vi. Cable shall be plenum or non-plenum as required by code.

vii. Color coding of pairs:

(a) Pair 1………………W-BL; BL

(b) Pair 2………………..W-O; O

(c) Pair 3………………..W-G; G

(d) Pair 4………………..W-BR; BR

viii. Overall diameter not exceeding 0.250 inches for a single cable.

ix. Ultimate Breaking Strength (ASTM D 4565): 400 N minimum

x. Withstands 1-inch bend radius at –20 degrees Celsius without jacket or insulation cracking.

d. Third-party verified to meet TIA/EIA Category 6 requirements. All completed cabling channels fully backwards compatible with requirements of Category 5 and 5e cabling systems.

e. Transmission Characteristics

i. DC resistance of any conductor not exceeding 9.38 Ohms per 100m max. at 20 degrees Celsius measured in accordance with ASTM D4566.

ii. Mutual capacitance of any pair at 1 kHz for 100 m. of cable not exceeding 5.6nF.

iii. DC resistance unbalance between any two conductor of any pair not exceeding 5 percent when measured at or corrected to 20 degrees Celsius in accordance with ASTM D 4566.

iv. Capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz of any pair not exceeding 330 pF per 100 m.

v. Delay skew not exceeding 25 ns at 100 MHz.

vi. Propagation delay of any pair at 10 MHz not exceeding 5.7 ns/m.

vii. Maximum Attenuation of any pair not exceeding values given in TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.

viii. NEXT coupling loss, PSNEXT loss, ELFEXT loss, PS-ELFEXT loss and Return Loss meeting requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.

f. See section 27 10 00 for cabling requirements.

3. Fiber Optic Strands (Plenum Rated)

a. Cable shall be identical to cable in Section 27 10 00.




b. 50 Micron Multimode Fiber Optic Strands: Ultra rated to 10 Gbps, fiber optic cable with 50/125 µm core/cladding diameters, 900 mm buffer.

i. Standards

(a) Meeting NEC, Article 770 – Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways and passed UL 910 flame test.

(b) Tight-buffered fibers color-coded in accordance with TIA/EIA-598 “Color Coding of Fiber Optic Cables.”

(c) Differential Mode Delay per TIA-492.

ii. Fibers: Meet TIA/EIA 455-45A “Microscopic Method for Measuring Fiber Geometry of Optical Waveguides” for 50/125 fiber optic cables.

iii. Meet or exceed all Attenuation requirements for fiber optic cable in Addendum 1 of TIA/EIA-568-B.3 “Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 µm Optical Fiber Cables.”

iv. Minimum LED Transceiver Bandwidth Requirements: 2000 MHz at 1 Km at 850 nm and 500 MHz at 1 Km at 1300 nm.

(a) IEEE 802.3z Performance: Supports VCSEL 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GbE) operation in 1000BASE-SX operating window (850 nm) at 300 meters.

v. Shall not exceed 1800 feet in length.

vi. Cable Operating Temperature Range:

(a) Indoor Cables: -20 degrees Celsius to 70 degrees Celsius.

4. Patch Panels for security

a. All patch panels must provide identical performance to Cat 6 patch panels included in Section 27 10 00 and meet all district performance criteria

b. Shall meet requirements for category 6 (per SCHOOL DISTRICT standards) performance requirements.

c. Panels shall contain the number of termination ports required to terminate all LAN and telephone jacks in service area, plus 20% spare capacity.

d. Acceptable units:

i. See section 27 10 00

ii. Or approved equivalent.

e. Panels shall contain the number of termination ports required to terminate all LAN and telephone jacks in service area, plus 20% spare capacity.

5. Patch Cables for security

a. Factory terminated and tested UTP patch cables at device and equipment cross-connect meeting requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B for patch cable testing.

i. Meet all requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 standard.




ii. Contact plating of minimum of 50 micro inches of gold in contact area over 50 micro inch of nickel, compliant with FCC part 68.5.

iii. Use 8-position connector, unkeyed.

iv. Modular connector maintaining paired construction of cable to facilitate minimum untwisting of wires.

v. Factory assembled and constructed to 100 ohm, 4-pair UTP per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B for minimum, Category 6 compliance.

vi. Performance marking indelibly labeled on jacket by manufacturer.

vii. Accepts color-coded labels to comply with TIA/EIA-606 labeling requirements at both ends.

viii. Manufactured by ISO 9001 Company.

6. Multi-Conductor Cables

a. Cables shall be matched to device requirements per manufacturer’s guidelines.

b. Cables shall be solid conductor type cables.

7. Power Wiring (if required beyond POE switches)

a. Wires shall be approved for use in plenum rated spaces.

b. Power wiring shall be approved by the security manufacturer for use with the security system.

c. 14/2 AWG copper cable.

B. System Server

1. Lenel PCS-32ES

C. Door Controllers

1. Lenel LNL-2210

D. Card Readers

1. Lenel LNL-XF1050K

2. Lenel LNL-XF2110D

E. Wiring

1. Per Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions

2. Equipment shall utilize the security LAN

F. Battery Backup

1. System shall be on UPS equipment and battery backup.

2.4 ENTRY DOOR VIDEO INTERCOM

A. Exterior Station

1. Basis of Design

a. AIPHONE JK-DVF




2. Viking


B. Interior Station

1. Basis of Design

a. AIPHONE JK-1MED

b. AIPHONE JK-1HD

2. Viking


C. Power Supply

1. Basis of Design

a. AIPHONE PS-1820UL

2. Viking


D. Door Release

1. Basis of Design

a. AIPHONE RY-18L

2. Viking


E. Wiring

1. Per Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions

2.5 MANUAL DOOR RELEASE SYSTEM

A. No Substitutions

B. Desk Console

1. Ingersoll Rand 8208A

C. Power Supplies

1. Per unit

D. Door Contacts

1. GE Security 1078 W-N

E. Wiring

1. Multi Conductor 22AWG

2. Per Manufacturer Installation Instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which Intrusion Detection cabling and equipment and related components are to be installed in coordination with Installer of materials




and components specified in this Section and notify affected Prime Contractors and Design consultant in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to ensure a safe and timely installation.






3.2 PREPARATION


B. Existing Intrusion Detection Equipment: Ensure all systems remain operational throughout the project.

1. Identify any circuits and/or wiring at the site not shown on T-Drawings and interfering with installation of specified Equipment.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide and install all components necessary to install a complete Intrusion Detection System, including (but is not limited to) connectors, sensors, panels, power supplies, terminators, etc…

1. Cable runs shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations in all cases. Any deviation will result in system rejection.








6. Install cables in EMT conduit in all unfinished, exposed areas as shown in Design consultant and Architectural roof plans and/or T-Drawings, unless alternate pathways are noted.





B. Install all exposed cabling in surface raceway by Wiremold, Hubbell or Panduit where in-wall conduit has not been provided. Follow all manufacturers’ guidelines requirements regarding bending radius and slack. All bends, offsets and fittings shall be appropriately sized to provide 30% capacity after installation.

C. Install all cable in accordance with National, state and local codes and TIA/EIA Standards, and BICSI methods.


2. Identification: Provide permanent identification labels for patch panels, access panels and entrance facilities.

3.4 TESTING

A. Intrusion Detection, Access Control and Entry Systems

1. Upon completion of work, all parts of the systems installation shall be tested by the installing Contractor and demonstrated free of any defects. Preliminary testing will be permitted but shall not be accepted in lieu of obtaining final test results. Final test results shall be accomplished by the use of proper test equipment for the system being tested.

2. Each device shall be demonstrated to individually alarm and pin point the exact triggered sensor. Any system failing this requirement will be wholly rejected at the contractor’s expense.

3. All card reading equipment shall be demonstrated to function to manufacturer’s specifications.

4. The video phone entry system shall be verified to be operation and perform to manufacturer’s specifications.


3.5 AS-BUILTS

A. All devices shall be shown in their accurate location

B. All equipment and cables shall be properly identified and labeled.




C. Accurate as-built drawings shall be provided in electronic and hard copy format.

1. 3 copies of electronic (CAD) drawings shall be distributed on appropriate media: 1 to construction management, 1 to designers and 1 to school district personnel.

2. 3 hard copies of CAD drawings shall be plotted on full size sheets and test results of every installed cable have been given to the construction management for appropriate distribution.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Access, Intrusion and Video Entry Systems Demonstration

1. 16 Hours of demonstration and training on all aspects of the completely installed systems must be provided for the owner.


b. Training and system demonstration must include all aspects of the system and its operation.


3.7 ACCEPTANCE


1. Cable and equipment installation is complete and all cables and equipment have been tested and documented to be installed according to specifications and drawings. Use form at the bottom of this specification for zone descriptions and delineation.

2. A school district Security and Technology representative has successfully tested the “LIVE” system.




6. A 1-Year Installers warranty has been given to a school district Security and Technology representative.





Contact ID ACCOUNT# Subscriber Name _________________________________________

CHOOSE ONE:

□ ADDENDUM TO A NEW SUBSCRIBER MONITORING AGREEMENT.

□ CHANGE TO DATA ON AN EXISTING SUBSCRIBER ACCOUNT.

NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, THE DEFAULT CALLBACK 0PTl0N FOR RESTORE IS LOG ONLY; TROUBLE IS DEALER ONLY.

PLEASE INDICATE CALLBACK OPTION. EXCLUSION OF THIS INFORMATION MAY DELAY THE PROCESSING OF A SUBSCRIBER MONITORING AGREEMENT. IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR REPRESENTATIVE.

PANEL: □ADEMCO □NAPCO □FBI □APEX OTHER (SPECIFY)_______________________

PARTITIONED?: □ NO □ YES (DEFINE BELOW)

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8





EVENT QUAL. EVENT CODE PARTITION ZONE# USER# ZONE DESCRIPTION / USER NAME CALLBACK OPTION Ax



CCTV 28 20 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 28 20 00 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Video Surveillance Cabling (Plenum Rated)

2. Video Surveillance Hardware, Cameras and Components

3. Video Surveillance Servers

4. Video Surveillance Network Video Recorders

5. Video Surveillance Workstations

6. Video Surveillance Software

7. All materials, terminations, equipment, labeling and associated cable performance testing.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27 for applicable definitions and terms.

B. CCTV and video surveillance refer to the same system and are used interchangeably. Terms refer to cabling system included in this specification section.



1. Provide a complete IP based video surveillance system.

a. System shall utilize IP cameras, CAT 6 UTP cabling connected to CAT 6 patch panels.

b. Patch panel shall be connected to the LAN via POE switches and multimode backbone fiber.

i. Each new switch shall have dedicated strands of backbone multimode fiber connected to the chassis switch at the school.

c. Servers and workstations shall reside on the LAN and be accessible via the TCP/IP network locally and remotely.

d. Headend equipment shall be located in the main telecom room.

e. Antivirus software shall be loaded and active on the selected server equipment.

2. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services and operations required for complete installation of LAN compatible Category 6 copper horizontal (camera) wiring.

a. All horizontal UTP wiring employs a star topology.

i. Category 6 UTP wiring terminates in Category 6 RJ-45 male connector jack at cameras location and on Category 6 rack-mounted patch panel dedicated for security cameras in telecommunications room. Connections wired per TIA/EIA-568A.




b. Network cables routed from distribution racks throughout building as shown on T-Drawings.

i. Note and record all cable lengths to the nearest foot.

ii. Replace any UTP cable exceeding 90 meters (295 feet) and route to reduce length to a minimum of 90 meters. Complete all cable rerouting for compliance at no additional cost to Authority.

iii. Replace any cable not meeting industry standards for Cat 6 cables.

iv. Identify to Design consultant prior to installation of any UTP cables that cannot be reduced to 90 meters or less in total length (rise and run).

v. Strictly adhere to most current version of TIA/EIA Telecommunications cabling standards.

c. Category 6 rated RJ-45 type connectors with all four copper pairs terminated and tested in accordance with EIA 568B wiring standard.

d. Permanently identify and label all cables and termination devices, at distribution rack and workstation in accordance with ANSI TIA/EIA-606 Standard or as agreed by Design consultant and Authority.

e. Remove and replace any cables failing to meet end-to-end testing requirements; do not abandon cable in place. All cable shall be terminated at both ends, unless noted in T-Drawings.


a. 50 Micron Multimode Fiber Optic Strands: Ultra rated to 10 Gbps, fiber optic cable with 50/125 µm core/cladding diameters, 900 mm buffer.

i. Standards














(b) Outdoor Cables: -40 degrees Celsius to 70 Degrees Celsius.


1. System shall provide multiple recording channel solutions (4, 16, 32, 64 channels) for the quantity of cameras shown.

2. System shall be software based and utilize a server level operating system such as, Microsoft Server 2008, etc,

a. The server operating system shall allow regular updates and security patches to be installed.

b. The server shall have Hard Drive Fault Tolerance, Dual Power Supplies and OS Backup capabilities.

3. System shall allow enterprise level antivirus software to be loaded, configured and run per the manufacturer’s specifications.

a. Certain directories may be excluded from real time scanning.

4. The server and client stations shall be accessible remotely.

5. System shall provide MGEG-4, MJPEG, wavelet and H.264 video compression.

6. IP cameras shall have vari-focal lenses with auto iris and remote digital zoom.

a. Camera lens shall be suited for the anticipated field of view.

7. IP cameras shall have a wide dynamic range and day night functionality.

8. System shall be capable of recording HD video and megapixel resolutions.

9. System shall provide variable frame rate recording up to 30 FPS.

10. System shall provide edge based motion sensing and recording features.

11. System shall allow simultaneous recording and playback of video.

12. System shall provide application and web-based camera viewing.

13. System shall provide multiple user access levels with associated permissions.

14. System shall be expandable.

15. System shall provide remote configuration and management.

16. System shall provide a minimum of 30 days of recorded video for each channel.

17. System shall support cameras from multiple vendors.

18. System shall comply with applicable requirements in Local, State and Federal Codes, TIA/EIA Standards, and BICSI methodology.







c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2 – Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components and subsections.

d. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components

e. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

f. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

g. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

h. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard

i. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), Tenth Edition

j. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70): National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications, wiring diagrams, calculations and similar information for the following items demonstrating compliance with the specified requirements.

1. Copper cable, patch cables and termination devices.


3. Wiring diagrams.

4. Sample of each cable test report.

5. Cameras with anticipated lens type and size.

6. POE Switches

7. NVRs

8. Power Supplies

9. Software Applications

10. Workstations

11. Servers

C. Samples: Provide samples of equipment as described below, prior to installation, for approval by designer.

1. CCTV cables and connections

2. CCTV Cameras




3. CCTV Housings and Mounts

D. Quality Control Submittal

1. Test Reports: Submit complete sample test data and reports with exact labels used on cables and patch panels

2. Certificates



E. Contract Closeout Submittal: Comply with requirements of Division 0, including submission of operating and maintenance instructions as item in “Operation and Maintenance Data” manual described in that Section.


A. All Work shall be installed in a first class, neat and workmanlike manner by skilled Technicians. The quality of the workmanship shall be subject to inspection and approval by authorized school personnel. Any work found to be of inferior quality and/or workmanship shall be replaced and/or reworked until the approval of school personnel is obtained.

B. Qualifications

1. Installer

a. Qualified to cable, terminate and test data network cabling system, coaxial cable system and associated power wiring specified in this Section and section 17150, certified by manufacturer of products to be installed, and completed at least 5 installations of similar size, nature and complexity as specified for this project.















1.6 WARRANTY


B. A fifteen (15) year Extended Product Warranty and Systems Assurance Warranty for UTP camera wiring system shall be provided by the manufacturer as follows:

1. Extended Product Warranty: The Extended Product Warranty shall ensure against product and workmanship defects, that all approved cabling components exceed the specifications of TIA/EIA 568B and Addenda for fiber link/channels and copper components, for a fifteen (15) year period. The warranty shall apply to all passive components, including both cable and connecting hardware as a combined system. Any claims cover replacement costs on any defective product, both material and labor. Extended warranties beyond fifteen (15) years will be considered.

2. System Assurance: The System Assurance shall cover the failure of the wiring system to support the application which it was designed to support as well as additional application(s) introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums that use the TIA/EIA 568B component and link/channel specifications for cabling, for a fifteen (15) year period.


C. Manufacturer warranty coverage for fiber cable systems associated with the CCTV System.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cabling for CCTV shall be identical to equipment listed in Section 27 10 00.

B. CCTV Recording Equipment shall be from Lenel. (District Proprietary Equipment)

C. CCTV Camera Basis of Design shall be Axis.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Copper Cabling Components for video surveillance systems

1. See Section 27 10 00 for cabling requirements and manufacturers.

2. UTP Camera Cabling (Plenum Rated)




a. Camera cabling shall provide identical performance to Cat 6 UTP data and voice cabling included in Section 27 10 00 and meet all district performance criteria.

b. Requirements: Complete balanced, twisted-pair compliant with current Category 6 provisions under TIA/EIA 568B Telecommunications Cabling Standard, including but not limited to:

i. “Component compliant” components certified to meet all requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.2 “Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components.”

ii. After assembly into completed cabling channel, all components meet performance requirements as specified in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and B.2, meet cable manufacturer’s and outlet manufacturer’s performance requirements and are performance certified for Category 6 as a complete channel system.

iii. Shall meet specified physical and transmission characteristics requirements.

iv. Exceed minimum performance requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B by significant margin. Cabling solutions not demonstrating significant margin are not acceptable.

c. Physical Characteristics

i. 100 Ohm Category 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable (UTP)

ii. Meeting requirements of ANSI/ICEA S-80-576. For cables not specified in “Approved Components” paragraph, all 4 pairs insulated with F.E.P. providing maximum 0.023-inch diameter of insulated conductor.

iii. Security data cable shall be green in color

iv. Acceptable Cable

(a) See section 27 10 00

(b) Or Approved Equivalent

v. Consists of four 22 - 26 AWG twisted pairs.

vi. Cable shall be plenum or non-plenum as required by code.

vii. Color coding of pairs:

(a) Pair 1………………W-BL; BL

(b) Pair 2………………..W-O; O

(c) Pair 3………………..W-G; G

(d) Pair 4………………..W-BR; BR

viii. Overall diameter not exceeding 0.250 inches for a single cable.

ix. Ultimate Breaking Strength (ASTM D 4565): 400 N minimum

x. Withstands 1-inch bend radius at –20 degrees Celsius without jacket or insulation cracking.

d. Third-party verified to meet TIA/EIA Category 6 requirements. All completed cabling channels fully backwards compatible with requirements of Category 5 and 5e cabling systems.




e. Transmission Characteristics

i. DC resistance of any conductor not exceeding 9.38 Ohms per 100m max. at 20 degrees Celsius measured in accordance with ASTM D4566.

ii. Mutual capacitance of any pair at 1 kHz for 100 m. of cable not exceeding 5.6nF.

iii. DC resistance unbalance between any two conductor of any pair not exceeding 5 percent when measured at or corrected to 20 degrees Celsius in accordance with ASTM D 4566.

iv. Capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz of any pair not exceeding 330 pF per 100 m.

v. Delay skew not exceeding 25 ns at 100 MHz.

vi. Propagation delay of any pair at 10 MHz not exceeding 5.7 ns/m.

vii. Maximum Attenuation of any pair not exceeding values given in TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.

viii. NEXT coupling loss, PSNEXT loss, ELFEXT loss, PS-ELFEXT loss and Return Loss meeting requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.

f. See section 27 10 00 for cabling requirements.


a. See Section 27 10 00 for equipment.

b. 50 Micron Multimode Fiber Optic Strands: Ultra rated to 10 Gbps, fiber optic cable with 50/125 µm core/cladding diameters, 900 mm buffer.

i. Standards














4. Patch Panels for CCTV Cabling

a. All patch panels must provide identical performance to Cat 6 patch panels included in Section 27 10 00 and meet all district performance criteria

b. Shall meet requirements for category 6 (per SCHOOL DISTRICT standards) performance requirements.

c. Panels shall contain the number of termination ports required to terminate all LAN and telephone jacks in service area, plus 20% spare capacity.

d. Acceptable units:

i. See section 27 10 00

ii. Or approved equivalent.

e. Panels shall contain the number of termination ports required to terminate all LAN and telephone jacks in service area, plus 20% spare capacity.

5. Patch Cables for CCTV Cabling

a. See Section 27 10 00 for equipment.

b. Factory terminated and tested UTP patch cables at workstation and equipment cross-connect meeting requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B for patch cable testing.

i. Meet all requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 standard.

ii. Contact plating of minimum of 50 micro inches of gold in contact area over 50 micro inch of nickel, compliant with FCC part 68.5.

iii. Use 8-position connector, unkeyed.

iv. Modular connector maintaining paired construction of cable to facilitate minimum untwisting of wires.

v. Factory assembled and constructed to 100 ohm, 4-pair UTP per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B for minimum, Category 6 compliance.

vi. Performance marking indelibly labeled on jacket by manufacturer.

vii. Accepts color-coded labels to comply with TIA/EIA-606 labeling requirements at both ends.

viii. Manufactured by ISO 9001 Company.

6. Power Wiring (if required beyond POE switches)

a. Wires shall be approved for use in plenum rated spaces.

b. Power wiring shall be approved by the CCTV manufacturer for use with the CCTV system.

c. 14/2 AWG copper cable.

B. CCTV Recording Equipment

1. Equipment is Proprietary, no substitutions.




2. Admin Server

a. Lenel PCS-32ES (1) with

i. Microsoft Windows 7 Professional

ii. SQL 2008 R2 Express

iii. OnGuard Server Software licenses for system admin

iv. License Server

v. Map Designer

vi. CCTV Interface

vii. Video Verification

viii. Guard Tour

ix. Login Driver

x. Account Linkage

xi. Support for up to 32 Card Readers

3. Video Enabler

a. Lenel SWG-DV (1)

4. Video Recorder Software

a. Lenel SW-LNR-CH1 (57)

5. NVR

a. Lenel DVC-LP-A-A00-03-3T (2) with

i. Windows 7 operating system

6. PTZ Controller

a. Axis T8310

C. CCTV Cameras

1. Indoor Day/Night Dome Basis of Design

a. Axis 9-3346V

b. Pelco

c. Panasonic


2. Interior PTZ Basis of Design

a. Axis Q6032

b. Pelco

c. Panasonic





3. Exterior PTZ Camera Basis of Design

a. Axis Q60335-E

b. Pelco

c. Panasonic


4. Workstations

a. Basis of Design – Dell Precision T7500

b. HP

c. Lenovo

d. Or approve equal

5. Monitors

a. Basis of Design – Samsung BX2450

b. Dell

c. HP


6. Network Switches

a. Basis of Design - Cisco 24 Port POE

i. 10/100/1000BASE-T with support for IEEE 802.3af PoE

ii. Up to 320 GPS

iii. Four 100/1000 SFP Uplinks

iv. Full Class 3 support for IP CCTV Cameras.

b. Netgear

c. SMC


7. UPS

a. 1500 VAC Basis of Design

i. APC RS1500

b. 3000 VAC Basis of Design

i. APC Smart UPS 3000 XL

c. 5000 VAC Basis of Design

i. APC Smart UPS 5000

d. TrippLite




e. Minuteman

f. Or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which CCTV cabling and equipment and related components are to be installed in coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify affected Prime Contractors and Design consultant in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to ensure a safe and timely installation.






3.2 PREPARATION



1. Identify any circuits and/or wiring at the site not shown on T-Drawings and interfering with installation of specified Equipment.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide and install all components necessary to install complete telecommunications cabling and equipment systems, including (but is not limited to) connectors, patch cables, terminators, etc…

1. Cable runs shall be continuous and unbroken from end to end. Splicing of any LAN, or coaxial video distribution cable is prohibited.


3. Loosely bundle all cables and support from structure at unequal intervals from 5 to 6 feet with spring steel fasteners and cable clip rated for use with high performance cables




where cable tray or other support structure has not been provided as indicated on Drawings. All mounting clips shall be seismic type as per BOCA.




7. Install cables in EMT in all unfinished, exposed areas as shown in Design consultant and Architectural roof plans and/or T-Drawings, unless alternate pathways are noted.


9. Provide a minimum of 15’ of cable slack at camera location and 24 inches at patch panels, unless noted otherwise.




13. 10 feet of service loop shall be provided in the ceiling at each workstation. Contractor shall not secure service loop in coils, but route in such a manner as to minimize EMI.


1. Minimum separation distance form Power Source at 480 V or less:

CONDITION < 2kVA 2-5 Kva > 5 kVA

a. Unshielded power lines or electrical 6 in. 12 in. 24 in.


non-metal pathways

b. Unshielded power lines or electrical 3 in. 6 in. 12 in.


non-metal pathways

c. Power lines enclosed in a grounded 3 in. 6 in. 12 in.



pathway

d. Transformers & Elec. Motors 40 in. 40 in. 40 in.




e. Fluorescent Lighting 12 in. 12 in. 12 in.

C. Install all exposed cabling in surface raceway by Wiremold, Hubbell or Panduit where in-wall conduit has not been provided. Follow all manufacturers’ guidelines requirements regarding bending radius and slack. All bends, offsets and fittings shall be appropriately sized to provide 30% capacity after installation.

D. Install all cable in accordance with National, state and local codes and TIA/EIA Standards, and BICSI methods.


E. Properly terminate all cables at camera locations and distribution racks. Permanently identify all cables in pullboxes, transition points, and termination points by affixing pre-marked self-adhesive wraps similar to Brady “B-500+ Plastic Cloth Markers.”


1. Identification: Provide permanent identification labels for patch panels, access panels and entrance facilities.

3.4 TESTING

A. LAN and Video Cabling System



3.5 AS-BUILTS

A. Accurate as-built drawings shall be provided in electronic and hard copy format.

a. All equipment shall be shown in its exact location

b. All cables shall be labeled appropriately.

c. All cameras shall be labeled and uniquely identified.

d. 3 copies of electronic (CAD) drawings shall be distributed on appropriate media: 1 to construction management, 1 to designers and 1 to the school district.

e. 3 hard copies of CAD drawings shall be plotted on full size sheets and test results of every installed cable and camera have been given to the construction management for appropriate distribution.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. CCTV System Demonstration

1. 16 Hours of video surveillance demonstration and training on all aspects of the completely installed system must be provided for the owner.





b. Training and system demonstration must include all aspects of the system and it operation.


3.7 ACCEPTANCE







6. A 1-Year Installers warranty has been given to a school district Security or Technology representative.




BOILER ROOM GAS DETECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 28 33 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 28 33 00 – BOILER ROOM GAS DETECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and service to supply and install a methane (natural gas or CH4) and carbon monoxide (CO) detection and control system indicated on the drawing and specified in this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include mounting details and service requirements and compliance with authorized Federal agency.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of gas monitor; include gas ppm range, temperature range, alarm outputs, readout range, furnished specialties, installation requirements, and power consumption.


C. Coordination Drawings: Include boiler or machinery room layout showing location of monitoring devices in relation to refrigerant equipment.

D. Product Certificates: For monitoring devices, signed by product manufacturer.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Reference standards: Units shall be certified to UL and CSA requirements.

B. Manufacturer to be ISO 9002 accredited.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Automated logic. 2. Vulcain or approved equal. 3. Kele 4. Or Approved Equal.



2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Provide the appropriate equipment which includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Coordinate alarms and sequence with the building automatic temperature control

manufacturer. Provide the appropriate signal that can communicate with the building automatic temperature control system.

2.3 CONTROL PANEL

A. Control panel must be capable of communicating digitally through two RS-485 communication buses with the networked transmitters. Each communication bus must be capable of accepting up to 16 addressable transmitters at a maximum distance of 2000 feet. One power supply (bringing either 17-27 Vac or 24-38 Vdc) will be sufficient to power the entire gas detection network: controller and sensors.

B. Control panel will activate two internal DPDT relays at fully programmable alarm levels (and within programmable time delays) and be capable of activating up to 32 relay modules of 8 relays each. Relay rating will be no lower than 5 A, 30 Vdc or 250Vac (resistive load). Optionally available will be local individual 4-20mA outputs anywhere on the daisy chain communication link through the Basis of Design VA420I Module or approved equal.

C. Control panel will be capable of communicating with an annunciator panel. Panel will be powered by the controller or be powered by an external power supply rated at 17-27 Vac or 24-38 Vdc. Annunciator panel must be capable of communicating digitally with a controller through an RS-485 communication port. The panel will indicate the exact concentration of gas, the gas detected and the location of the sensor by sweeping through the network and displaying the detected information of each transmitter on the LCD display. The display will indicate two alarm levels for each transmitter (up to 32 transmitters). LED will also provide visual feedback in the following manner:

1. Normal operation: Green LED 2. Alarm level 1: Red LED 3. Alarm level 2: Red LED 4. Failure: Yellow LED

5. Annunciator will have three alarm levels (or 2 alarm levels with a fault alarm). Each alarm level will be attached to a DPDT relay. Relay rating will be no lower than 5A, 30 Vdc or 250 Vac (resistive load). Annunciator panel’s audible alarm will also be activated at fully programmable alarm levels (and within programmable time delays) by the control panel. The rating of the audible alarm will be no less than 65 dBA at 3 feet.

6. Unit will be manufactured to UL1244 and CSA 22.2. Annunciator must be manufactured within an ISO 9002 production environment.

D. Control panel will be capable of communicating with an Analog/Digital Converter Basis of Design Model 420I or approved equal. Converter will be powered by the control panel’s power output rated or by power transformer rated at 17-27 Vac or 24-38 Vdc. Converter must be capable of communicating digitally with control panel and up to 16 transmitters through an RS-485 communication port at distances of up to 2000 feet. Unit will have two settings available for communication back to the BMS (or DDC). In the first setting the VA-420I will listen into a network of up to 16 transmitters providing three 4-20mA output to the BMS (or DDC). While in this operational setting the unit will be capable of providing the average of reading, the maximum reading and the minimum reading of all of the transmitters. In the second setting the unit will be capable of communicating with up to 8 transmitters providing dedicated 4-20mA outputs for each transmitters. Connector must be manufactured within an ISO 9002 production environment.



E. The control panel will indicate the exact concentration of gas, the gas detected and the location of the sensor by sweeping through the network and displaying the detected levels at each point on an alphanumeric display. The display will indicate two alarm levels for each sensing point. LED will also provide visual feedback in the following manner:

1. Normal operation: Green LED 2. Alarm level 1: Red LED 3. Alarm level 2: Red LED 4. Failure: Yellow LED

F. The standard 2-high/low alarm levels will be complemented with an optional third level that can be programmed into the panel at a later date.

G. Panel will have an incorporated audible alarm, rated at no less than 65 dBA at 3 feet, that will be activate at fully programmable levels.

H. Control panel will leave the factory fully programmed and will be adjustable in the field by keying instructions on the keypad or via a laptop. The control panel must also be capable of hooking up to a printer through an RS-232C port.

I. Three levels of continuous self-diagnostics will verify the reading of each transmitter for abnormal sensing behavior, loss of communication with the transmitters and program corruption analysis.

J. Unit will be manufactured to UL 1244 label and CSA 22.2. Controller must be manufactured within an ISO 9002 production environment.

2.4 GAS SENSORS

A. Catalytic Bead methane or electrochemical type carbon monoxide transmitter will be powered by the control panel’s power output, or be powered by an external power supply rated at no less than 17-27 Vac or 24-38 Vdc. Fully addressable catalytic bead or electrochemical transmitter must be capable of communicating digitally with control panel through an RS-485 communication port. Gas transmitters must be installed in a true daisy chain with an end of the line resistor on the last transmitter.

B. Combustible and Carbon Monoxide gas will enter the gas detection chamber through diffusion principle. Unit will perform the detection of methane or carbon monoxide within the area the gas will be present. Methane or carbon monoxide will be detected by the catalytic bead or electrochemical method. The transmitter will have resolution levels of 1 ppm with a minimum range of 0-100 % LEL. Temperature and relative humidity variations will have no effect on the unit’s accuracy.

C. As an in the space indication of methane or carbon monoxide concentration unit must be capable of integrating an LCD.

D. Transmitter must be capable of incorporating an optional DPDT relay 5A, 30 Vdc or 250 Vac (resistive load) Along with networking capability with the control panel, unit must also have analog outputs of 0-10 Vdc and 4-20mA for communicating with a BMS/DDC.

E. Transmitter will be capable of operating within relative humidity ranges of 5-90% and temperature ranges of 32 degrees F to 100 degrees F.

F. Unit will be equipped with an impact resistant housing equivalent to a metal NEMA 2 rating.

G. Unit will be manufactured to UL 1244 label and CSA 22.2. Unit must be manufactured within an ISO 9002 production environment.



H. Sensor alarm levels and unit to be installed to the following parameters: TOXIC GASES FIRST

ALARM SETPOINT (TLV-TWA)

SECOND ALARM SETPOINT (TLV-STEL)

SENSOR LOCATION

RADIUS OF COVERAGE

FIRST ALARM SETPOINT

SECOND ALARM SETPOINT

SENSOR LOCATION

RADIUS OF DETECTION

Methane CH4 25% LEL 50% LEL 1 ft below ceiling 20 feet Carbon Monoxide 35 ppm (TLV-

TWA) 200 ppm (TLV-STEL)

3-5 feet above floor 50 feet

2.5 STROBE HORN

A. Meet the following requirements:

B. Strobe horn will be activated by the relay of the Control panel or the Annunciator panel. Power requirement will be 120 V AC 60/60 Hz 0.35 Amps. Unit will be capable of being mounted directly onto conduit or onto a 4-inch junction box.

C. Unit will be capable of operating within relative humidity ranges of 0-100% and temperature ranges of –30 degrees F to 150 degrees F.

D. Rating of horn will be no less than 72 dB at 10 feet. Intensity of light will be no less than 40Wand will flash at a frequency of 1 per second.

E. Unit will be certified by CSA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACTIVATION SEQUENCE

A. Set up the following operation mode:

1. Activate one exhaust fan and one make-up zone when concentration reaches Alarm Level A (first alarm setpoint) as indicated in the above table.

2. Activate audible and visual alarms (located on the controller and the external strobe horn) when concentration reaches Alarm Level B (second alarm setpoint) as indicated in the above table.

3. Coordinate the sequence of operation with the drawings and the automatic temperature control specification and/or sequence of operation. Provide a 4-20mA signal (or other approved compatible signal) to automatic temperature system as required.

B. Meet manufacturer’s requirements.

C. Provide complete commissioning service by manufacturer’s authorized representative.




GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT 31 00 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 31 00 00 – GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Report of Geotechnical Exploration, prepared by Whitman, dated November 2011, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Geotechnical and Foundation Study Report.


A. The following geotechnical and foundation study report was prepared for SSP Architectural Group on behalf of the New Jersey Schools Development Authority. It is included in the Contract Documents for informational purposes only.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED)


NJ Schools Development Authority New Public School #20 JE-0010-C01 Revision #1 – March 6, 2013

SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction.

E. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain.



B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Engineer.

C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises as indicated by Engineer.

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify New Jersey One Call for area where Project is located before site clearing.

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and tree-protection measures are in place.

F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Flag each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.



C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

C. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches

below exposed subgrade. 3. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.



3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. 1. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.


NJ Schools Development Authority New Public School #20 JE-0010-C01 Revision #3 – April 26, 2013

EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 31 20 00 – EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.

1.3 Geotechnical Report and project relate Environmental Reports

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.



1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles. 2. Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches . 2. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.

C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.




A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.

B. Contractor to consult with project environmental professionals regarding specific capping requirements, acceptable backfill depth for various finished cover type and soil removal.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures, specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing” are in place.

C. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

E. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils:

1. Plasticity Index: 8.

2. Fill shall be clean, well graded granular soil which is non-expansive and non-collapsible and shall have at least 90% passing a 1-½ sieve and not more than 12% passing a No.



200 sieve. No particles shall be larger than 6” in any dimension. Material shall be free from organic material and other deleterious material.

3. Any material selected as imported fill material shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of delivery to site. Laboratory testing shall be submitted to demonstrate compliance with specifications.

4. Imported fill shall be in compliance with all requirements of New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection Site Remediation standards as applicable. Certification of compliance and, test results substantiating compliance shall be furnished to the Owner and Engineer by the Contractor not less than one week prior to its intended use.

5. The Owner reserves the right to test off-site fill material for conformance with these specifications.

C. Subbase Material: Dense graded aggregate meeting requirements of New Jersey Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Section 901.10.

D. Base Course: Dense graded aggregate meeting requirements of New Jersey Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Section 901.10.

E. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

I. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Separation Geotextile: Non-Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 205 lbs ASTM D 4632. 3. Tear Strength: 80 lbs; ASTM D 4533. 4. Puncture Strength: 500 lbs; ASTM D 4833. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 80 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 6. Permittivity: 1.4 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.



7. UV Stability: 70 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.



3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

4. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.



B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the baseball field, with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation.

3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.8 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing trash and debris.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 12 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"



D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material , free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8-10 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557-91: 1. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and

compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.



2. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.

3. For buildings and foundations initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.

3.13 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope

grades. 2. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a

single layer. 3. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in

layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 8 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

4. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.


A. Special Inspections: Contractor Owner shall engage a qualified special inspector testing agency to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with

requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Owner shall engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 5,000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.16 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.




OFF-GASSING MITIGATION 31 21 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 31 21 00 – OFF-GASSING MITIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements applies to this section. Provide gas vapor barrier as indicated, specified and required.

B. Work in this section - principal items include: 1. Gas vapor barrier providing protection from the following gases: Methane, other

Hydrocarbon vapors in concentrations up to 20,000ppm, Hydrogen Sulfide, Radon.

C. Related work NOT in this section: excavation and backfilling, parge coat on masonry to receive gas vapor barrier membrane, mortar beds or concrete toppings over gas vapor barrier membranes, latex waterproofing, damp-proofing, flashing and sheet metal, joint sealers, soil sterilant, gas collection systems, gas monitoring, and drainage.


A. Gas vapor barrier contractor/applicator shall be trained and approved by gas vapor barrier manufacturer. A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to application of gas vapor barrier to assure proper substrate and installation conditions, to include contractor, applicator, architect/engineer and special inspector.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for specific application.

B. Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval. 1. Gas vapor barrier membrane material. 2. Protection Board and/or Protection Mat. 3. Prefabricated Drainage Mat. 4. Geotextiles.


A. Deliver materials to site in original unbroken packages bearing manufacturers label showing brand, weight, volume, and batch number. Store materials at site in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Do not allow materials to freeze in containers.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protect all adjacent areas not to receive gas vapor barrier. Where necessary, apply masking to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to other finish surfaces.




B. Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within manufacturer’s recommendations for the material and product used.

C. Minimum clearance of required for application of product: 90° spray wand- 2 feet / Conventional spray wand- 4 feet.

D. Ambient temperature shall be within manufacturer’s specifications. If winter conditions apply, we recommend the use space of heaters and necessary cover (i.e. visqueen) to bring the ambient temperature to at least +45°F until the protection course and structural slab rebar or a mudslab protection course has been placed.

E. All plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items to be under or passing through the gas vapor barrier shall be positively secured in their proper positions and appropriately protected prior to membrane application.

F. Gas vapor barrier shall be installed before placement of reinforcing steel. When not possible, all exposed reinforcing steel shall be masked by General Contractor prior to membrane application.

G. Expansion joints must be filled with a conventional waterproof expansion joint material.

H. Surface preparation shall be per manufacturer’s specification.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTY

A. Vapor barrier manufacturer shall warrant its products to be free of defects. As factors, which affect the result obtained from this product, including weather, equipment utilized, construction, workmanship and other variables- are all beyond the manufacturer's control, manufacturer shall warrant only that the material conforms to its product specifications. Under this warranty manufacturer will replace at no charge any product not meeting these specifications within 12 months of manufacture, provided it has been applied in accordance with manufacturer’s written directions for use recommended as suitable for this product. Warranties are available for a longer period upon request and mutual written consent. This warranty is in lieu of any and all other warranties expressed or implied (including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use), and manufacturer shall have no further liability of any kind including liability for consequential or incidental damages resulting from any defects or delays caused by replacement or otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fluid applied gas vapor barrier system – Basis of Design: LIQUID BOOT®; a single course, high build, polymer modified asphaltic emulsion. Water borne and spray applied at ambient temperatures. A minimum thickness of 60 dry mils, unless specified otherwise as some cities and engineers may require a thicker membrane. Non-toxic and odorless. LIQUID BOOT® Trowel Grade has similar properties with greater viscosity and is trowel applied. Manufactured by CETCO Remediation Technologies/AMCOL International Corporation. 1. Alternate Products/Manufacturers:

a. GeoSeal TM, Land Science Technologies/REGENESIS, Inc. b. Tremco Sealants.





B. Gas vapor barrier physical properties:

GAS VAPOR MEMBRANE TEST METHOD VALUE Hydrogen Sulfide Gas Permeability ASTM D1434 None Detected Benzene, Toluene, Ethylene, Xylene, Gasoline, Hexane, Per-chloroethylene

ASTM D543, D412, D1434 (tested at 20,000 ppm)

Passed in gas permeability and weight change

Acid Exposure (10% H2SO4 for 90 days) ASTM D543 Less than 1% weight change Radon Permeability Tested by US Dept. of Energy Zero permeability to Radon (222Rn) Bonded Seam Strength Tests ASTM D6392 Passed Micro Organism Resistance (Soil Burial)- average weight change, average tensile strength change, average tensile stress change, average elongation change, bonded seams, methane

ASTM D4068-88 Passed

Methane Permeability ASTM 1434-82 Passed Oil Resistance Test- average weight change, average tensile strength change, average tensile stress change, average elon-gation change, bonded seams, methane permeability

ASTM D543-87 Passed

Heat Aging- average tensile strength change, average tensile stress change, average elongation change, bonded seams

ASTM D4068-88 Passed

Dead Load Seam Strength City of Los Angeles Passed Environmental Stress-Cracking ASTM D1693-78 Passed PCE Diffusion Coefficient Tested at 6,000 mg/m3 2.74 x 10-14 m2/sec TCE Diffusion Coefficient Tested at 20,000 mg/m3 8.04 x 10-14 m2/sec WATERPROOFING TEST METHOD VALUE Soil Burial ASTM E154-88 Passed Water Penetration Rate ASTM D2434 <7.75 x 10-9 cm/sec Water Vapor Permeability ASTM E96 0.24 perms Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E96 0.10 grains/h-ft2

POTABLE WATER TEST METHOD VALUE Toxicity Test 22 CCR 66696 Passed. CCR Bioassay—Flathead Minnow Potable Water Containment ANSI/NSF 61 NSF Certified for tanks >300,000 gal GENERAL INFORMATION TEST METHOD VALUE Coefficient of Friction- geotextile both sides ASTM D5321 0.72 Cold Bend Test ASTM D146 Passed. No cracking at –25°F Freeze-Thaw Resistance (100 Cycles) ASTM A742 Meets criteria. No spalling or disbondment Accelerated Weathering & Ultraviolet Exposure ASTM D822 No adverse effect after 500 hours Hydrostatic Head Resistance ASTM D751 Tested to 138 feet or 60 p.s.i Elongation ASTM D412 1,332% - Ø reinforcement, 90% recovery Elongation- 8oz. non-woven geotextile both sides ASTM D751 100% (same as geotextile tested separately) Tensile Strength ASTM D412 58 p.s.i. without reinforcement Tensile Strength-8oz. non-woven geotextile both sides ASTM D751 196 p.s.i. (same as geotextile tested separately) Tensile Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM D413 2,556 lbs/ft2 uplift force Puncture Resistance-8oz. non-woven geotextile both sides ASTM D4833 286 lbs. (Probe Travel= .756 in., same as geotextile tested separately) Flame Spread ASTM E108 Class A with top coat (comparable to UL790) Electric Volume Resistivity ASTM D257 1.91 x 1010 ohms-cm WATERPROOFING

TEST METHOD VALUE

Elongation ASTM D412 800% Bond Seam Strength Tests ASTM D6392 Passed Methane Permeability ASTM D1434 None detected Water Vapor Permeability ASTM E96 0.18 perms

C. Agency Approvals: 1. City of Los Angeles Research Report # 24860-Approved for “LIQUID BOOT® Membrane

for Below-Grade Waterproofing and Gas Barrier”. 2. United States Navy-Approved for “LIQUID BOOT® for Use World Wide to Waterproof

Earth-Covered Steel Ammunition Storage”. 3. NSF International-NSF/61 approved for “Potable Water Tank Liner”.




4. Canadian Construction Materials Board-Approved for “Waterproofing and Damp proofing”.

5. County of Los Angeles Department of public works-Approved for “LIQUID BOOT® Application as a Methane Gas Barrier”.

D. LIQUID BOOT® 500 - Contact CETCO before specifying or bidding LIQUID BOOT® 500 to insure LIQUID BOOT® 500 is appropriate for the project. LIQUID BOOT® 500 may be used in lieu of LIQUID BOOT® (described in section 2.1 B. above) where the membrane is not exposed to hydrostatic head pressure. The Agency Approvals in section 2.1 C above do not apply to LIQUID BOOT® 500. The physical properties for LIQUID BOOT® 500 are as follows: 1. Note: LIQUID BOOT® 500 may tend to sag on vertical surfaces at higher ambient

temperatures. When this condition occurs, use LIQUID BOOT® at these locations. 2. Agency Approval- City of Los Angeles Research Report-RR 25549-Approved for “LIQUID

BOOT® 500 Spray Applied Membrane for Below-Grade Waterproofing and Gas Barrier”. 3. Or Approved Equal.

E. Protection-On vertical surfaces, use LIQUID BOOT® UltraShield P-100 or other protections as approved by the manufacturer, project architect or engineer. On horizontal surfaces, use LIQUID BOOT® UltraShield G-1000 or other protections as approved by the manufacturer, project architect or engineer. 1. Due diverse jobsite conditions, all protection materials must be approved by the

membrane manufacturer, including the use of the LIQUID BOOT® UltraShield products. 2. Or Approved Equal.

F. Prefabricated Drain Mat- On vertical surfaces, use LIQUID BOOT® UltraDrain 6200. On horizontal surfaces, use LIQUID BOOT® UltraDrain 9000. 1. Or Approved Equal.

G. Adhesive system for LIQUID BOOT® UltraShield and LIQUID BOOT® UltraDrain: Use LIQUID BOOT® UltraGrip. 1. Or Approved Equal.

H. Gas vapor vent piping - LIQUID BOOT® GeoVent system. 1. Or Approved Equal.

I. Base Geotextile - LIQUID BOOT® BaseFabric T-40 non-woven geotextile, unless otherwise specified and approved by membrane manufacturer. 1. The heat-rolled side shall be used as the application surface. Some projects may require

a heavier geotextile (LIQUID BOOT® BaseFabric T-60). 2. Or Approved Equal.

J. Cold Joints, Cracks, Form Tie Holes: Covered with Hardcast CRT 1602 Tape 3" wide 1. Or Approved Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. All surfaces to receive gas vapor barrier shall be inspected & approved by the applicator at least one day prior to commencing work.




3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Provide 24 inch minimum clearance out from surfaces to receive the gas vapor barrier. The application surface shall be prepared and provided to the applicator in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications listed below: 1. Concrete/Shotcrete/Masonry- Concrete surfaces shall be light broom finish or smoother,

free of any dirt, debris, loose material, release agents or curing compounds. Fill all voids more than 1/4 inch deep and 1/4 inch wide. Masonry joints, cold joints, and form joints shall be struck smooth. All penetrations shall be prepared in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Provide a 3/4 inch minimum cant of LIQUID BOOT®, or other suitable material as approved by manufacturer, at all horizontal to vertical transitions and other inside corners of 120° or less. Allow to cure overnight before the application of LIQUID BOOT®. All cracks or cold joints greater than 1/16 inch must be completely grouted with non-shrink grout as approved by engineer. Install Hardcast reinforcing tape over all cold joints, cracks and form tie holes (after holes and cracks are grouted).

2. Dirt & Gravel- The sub-grade shall be moisture conditioned and compacted to a minimum relative compaction of 90 percent or as specified by civil/geotechnical engineer. The finished surface shall be smooth, uniform, free of debris and standing water. Remove all stones or dirt clods greater than 1/4 inch. (NOTE: Aggregate sub-bases shall be rolled flat, free from any protruding sharp edges). Penetrations shall be prepared in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. All form stakes that penetrate the membrane shall be of rebar which shall be bent over and left in the slab. Trenches shall be cut oversize to accommodate gas vapor barrier membrane and protection course with perpendicular to sloped sides and maximum obtainable compaction. Adjoining grade shall be finish graded and compacted. Excavated walls shall be vertical or sloped back, free of roots and protruding rocks. Specific sub-grade preparation shall be designed by a qualified civil or geotechnical engineer. If organic materials with potential for growth (ie: seeds or grasses) exist within the sub-base, spray apply soil sterilant at the sterilant manufacturer's recommended rate.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. INSTALLATION ON CONCRETE/SHOTCRETE/MASONRY (Follow the procedures below carefully). 1. Refer to section 3.3.C, "Sealing Around Penetrations", for procedures to seal around

penetrations. 2. Provide a ¾” minimum cant of LIQUID BOOT®, or other suitable material as approved by

manufacturer, at all horizontal to vertical transitions and other inside corners of 120° or less. Allow to cure overnight before the application of LIQUID BOOT®.

3. Delineate a test area on site with a minimum dimension of 10 feet by 10 feet (3m by 3m). Apply LIQUID BOOT® to a thickness of 60 mils and let it cure for 24 hours. Observe for blisters. If minor or no blistering occurs, proceed to the next step. (See note regarding blisters). If significant blistering does occur, apply a thin (10 mil) tack coat of LIQUID BOOT® “A” side without catalyst to the entire concrete surface and allow to cure before proceeding. (See also information regarding blister repair).

4. Spray apply LIQUID BOOT® to a 60 mil minimum dry thickness. Increase thickness to 100 dry mils if shotcrete is to be applied directly to membrane. If a second coat is required, remove any standing water from the membrane before proceeding with the second application.

5. Do not penetrate membrane. Keep membrane free of dirt and debris and traffic until a protective cover is in place. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to insure that the membrane and the protection system are not penetrated.




6. After membrane has cured and checked for proper thickness and flaws, install protection material pursuant to manufacturer’s instructions. a. NOTE: All testing or inspection to be performed prior to placing protection course. b. NON-HORIZONTAL SURFACES: Spray on non-horizontal surfaces should begin

at the bottom and work towards the top. This method allows the product to adhere to the surface before hitting catalyst runoff.

c. NOTE: Due to the nature of concrete as a substrate, it is normal for some blistering to occur. This is caused by either concrete's tendency to off-gas or water that is temporarily trapped between the concrete and the membrane. With time and the applied pressure of backfill or over-slab, blisters will absorb into the concrete without detriment to the membrane. A small number of blister heads should be sampled and checked for proper membrane thickness. If the samples have the minimum required membrane thickness, then the remaining blisters should not be punctured or cut. If the samples have less than the minimum required membrane thickness, then the area can either be re-sprayed to obtain the proper thickness, or the blisters can be cut out and the area re-sprayed or patched with LIQUID BOOT® Trowel Grade.

B. INSTALLATION ON DIRT SURFACES AND MUDSLABS. 1. Roll out LIQUID BOOT® BaseFabric geotextile on sub-grade with the heat-rolled side

facing up. Overlap seams a minimum of 6 inches. Lay geotextile tight at all inside corners. Apply a thin 10 mil tack coat of LIQUID BOOT® “A” side without catalyst within the seam overlap. Line trenches with geotextile extending at least six inches (6") onto adjoining sub-grade if slab and footings are to be sprayed separately. Overlap seams a minimum of 6 inches. Lay geotextile tight at all inside corners. Apply a thin 10 mil tack coat of LIQUID BOOT® “A” side without catalyst within the seam overlap.

2. Minimize the use of nails to secure the geotextile to the dirt subgrade. Remove all nails before spraying membrane, if possible. Nails that cannot be removed from the dirt subgrade are to be patched with geotextile or Hardcast reinforcing tape overlapping the nail head by a minimum of two inches (2"). Apply a thin tack coat of LIQUID BOOT® under the geotextile patch, when patching with geotextile.

3. Refer to section 3.3.C, "Sealing Around Penetrations", for procedures to seal around penetrations.

4. Spray apply LIQUID BOOT® onto geotextile to a 60 mil minimum dry thickness. Increase thickness to 100 dry mils if shotcrete is to be applied directly to membrane. If a second coat is required, remove any standing water from the membrane before proceeding with the second application.

5. Do not penetrate membrane. Keep membrane free of dirt, debris and traffic until a protective cover is in place. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to insure that the membrane and the protection system are not penetrated.

6. After membrane has cured and checked for proper thickness and flaws, install protection material pursuant to manufacturer’s instructions. a. NOTE: All testing or inspection to be performed prior to placing protection course.

C. SEALING AROUND PENETRATIONS. 1. OPTION 1

a. Clean all penetrations. All metal penetrations shall be sanded clean with emery cloth.

b. For applications requiring LIQUID BOOT® BaseFabric geotextile, roll out geotextile on sub-grade with the heat-rolled side facing up, overlapping seams a minimum of six inches (6"). Cut the geotextile around penetrations so that it lays flat on the sub-grade. Lay geotextile tight at all inside corners. Apply a thin (10 mil) tack coat of LIQUID BOOT® “A” side without catalyst within the seam overlap.

c. At the base of penetration Install a minimum ¾ inch thick membrane cant of LIQUID BOOT®, or other suitable material as approved by manufacturer. Extend




the membrane at a 60 mil thickness three inches (3") around the base of penetration and up the penetration a minimum of three inches (3"). Allow to cure overnight before the application of LIQUID BOOT® membrane. (See manufacturer’s standard detail).

d. Spray apply LIQUID BOOT® to an 60 mils minimum dry thickness around the penetration, completely encapsulating the collar assembly and to a height of one and one half inches (1 1/2") minimum above the membrane as described in 3.3.C.1.c above. Spray-apply LIQUID BOOT® to surrounding areas as specified for the particular application. (SEE MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD DETAIL).

e. Allow LIQUID BOOT® to cure completely before proceeding to step "F. f. Wrap penetration with polypropylene cable tie at a point two inches (2") above the

base of the penetration. Tighten the cable tie firmly so as to squeeze, but not cut, the cured membrane collar.

2. OPTION 2 (For Gas Vapor Membrane Only) a. Clean all penetrations. All metal penetrations shall be sanded clean with emery

cloth. b. For applications requiring LIQUID BOOT® BaseFabric geotextile, roll out geotextile

on sub-grade with the heat-rolled side facing up, overlapping seams a minimum of six inches (6"). Cut the geotextile around penetrations so that it lays flat on the sub-grade. Lay geotextile tight at all inside corners. Apply a thin (10 mil) tack coat of LIQUID BOOT® “A” side without catalyst within the seam overlap.

c. Spray-apply LIQUID BOOT® to surrounding areas as specified for the particular application to a 60 mil minimum dry thickness. At the base of penetration install a minimum 3/4 inch thick membrane cant of LIQUID BOOT®, or other suitable material as approved by manufacturer. Extend the membrane at 60 mil thickness up the penetration a minimum of three inches (3"). Allow to cure overnight before proceeding to D (SEE MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD DETAIL).

d. Spray apply LIQUID BOOT® the membrane at an 60 mil thickness three inches (3") around the base of penetration and up the penetration, completely encapsulating the collar assembly, to a height of one and one half inches (1 1/2") minimum above the membrane as described in 3.3.C.2.c above. (SEE MANUFACTURER’S STANDARD DETAIL).

e. Allow LIQUID BOOT® to cure completely before proceeding to step "F". f. Wrap penetration with polypropylene cable tie at a point two inches (2") above the

base of the penetration. Tighten the cable tie firmly so as to squeeze, but not cut, the cured membrane collar.


A. Field Quality Control is a very important part of all LIQUID BOOT® applications. Applicators should check their own work for coverage, thickness, and all around good workmanship before calling for inspections.

B. The membrane must be cured at least overnight before inspecting for dry-thickness, holes, shadow shrinkage, and any other membrane damage. If water testing is to be performed, allow the membrane to cure at least 72 hours prior to the water test. When thickness or integrity is in question the membrane should be tested in the proper manner as described below. However, over-sampling defeats the intent of inspections. Inspectors should always use visual and tactile measurement to guide them. Areas suspected of being too thin to the touch should be measured with the gauges to determine the exact thickness. With practice and by comparing tactile measurements with those of the gauges, fingers become very accurate too.

C. ON CONCRETE/SHOTCRETE/MASONRY & OTHER HARD SURFACES




1. Membrane may be checked for proper thickness with a blunt-nose depth gauge, taking one reading every 500 square feet. Record the readings. Mark the test area for repair, if necessary.

2. If necessary, test areas are to be patched over with LIQUID BOOT® to a 60 mils minimum dry thickness, extending a minimum of one inch (1") beyond the test perimeter.

D. ON DIRT AND OTHER SOFT SUBSTRATES 1. Samples may be cut from the membrane and geotextile sandwich to a maximum area of

2 square inches. Measure the thickness with a mil-reading caliper, per 500 sq. feet. Deduct the plain geotextile thickness to determine the thickness of LIQUID BOOT® membrane. Mark the test area for repair.

2. Voids left by sampling are to be patched with geotextile overlapping the void by a minimum of two inches (2"). Apply a thin tack coat of LIQUID BOOT® under the geotextile patch. Then spray or trowel-apply LIQUID BOOT® to a 60 mils minimum dry thickness, extending at least three inches (3") beyond geotextile patch

E. SMOKE TESTING FOR HOLES (Optional) 1. Holes or other breaches in the membrane can be detected by conducting a smoke test.

This involves pumping smoke under the membrane for a specified period of time, under a specified pressure, which varies from project to project. Contact CETCO for information about this test.



ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Hot-mix asphalt (HMA) paving. 2. Asphalt surface treatments.

B. References 1. New Jersey Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge

Construction, 2007 Edition or most current (NJDOT Specification)

1.2 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit price, TON



1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 2. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each paving material. Include statement that mixes containing recycled materials will perform equal to mixes produced from all new materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency.


E. Buy American Certification: For manufactured products. Include statement that materials comply with the By American Act, 41 U.S.C. §§10a-10d and all supplies and construction materials to be used are produced in the United States.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by NJDOT.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.



C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of New Jersey Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction for asphalt paving work, latest edition as amended.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Tack Coat: In accordance with NJDOT Specification– Section 401.03.02. 2. Asphalt Base Course: In accordance with Section 401 of NJDOT Specification. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: In accordance with Section 401 of NJDOT Specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES FOR HMA

A. Coarse Aggregate: In accordance with NJDOT Specification– Section 901.05.01

B. Fine Aggregate: In accordance with NJDOT Specification– Section 901.05.02.

C. Mineral Filler: In accordance with NJDOT Specification– Section 901.05.03

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. General: In accordance with NJDOT Specification– Sections 401 and 902 and as follows:

B. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320, Table 1 PG 64-22.

C. Tack Coat: In accordance with NJDOT Specification– Section 401.03.02

D. Water: Potable.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Recycled Materials for Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixes: Reclaimed asphalt pavement; reclaimed, unbound-aggregate base material; and recycled tires asphalt shingles or glass in accordance with NJDOT Specification– Section 902.02..

B. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA, and not classified as "restricted use" for locations and conditions of application. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.



2.4 MIXES

A. Recycled Content of HMA Asphalt: Recycled content of HMA asphalt shall be as described in the NJDOT Specification – Section 902.02.02.

B. Hot-Mix Asphalt: NJDOT HMA Mix designs: 1. Base Course: Hot Mix Asphalt 19M64 Base Course. 2. Surface Course: Hot Mix Asphalt 9.5M64 Surface Course.

C. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, Type 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15

tons. 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.02 to 0.08 gal./sq. yd.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.3 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT

A. Spreading and Grading. If using a stringline reference system, ensure that the system is in place and approved by the Engineer before placing HMA. Ensure that the underlying surface meets line and grade as specified in NJDOT Specifications – Section 202.03.03.C. Before placing HMA, ensure that the tack coat has been placed as specified in this specification. Obtain Engineer’s approval of the underlying surface far enough in advance of spreading HMA to allow 1 day’s paving operations.

Ensure that the certified APCT is present during paving operations.



Ensure that an MTV independently delivers HMA from the HMA trucks to the HMA paver.

Before beginning, ensure that the temperature of the screed on the HMA paver is heated to at least the laydown temperature of the HMA. Using the MTVs and HMA pavers, construct paving courses in lifts of at least 4 times the nominal maximum aggregate size of the HMA being constructed. Ensure that the grade and profile are maintained.

Where directed, use HMA having a nominal maximum aggregate size of 3/8 inch or less in transition (run out) areas. On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make use of a paver impractical, spread, rake, and lute HMA with hand tools. For these areas, dump, spread, and screed the HMA to obtain the required compacted thickness.

3.4 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints to provide a smooth riding surface. When using a bulkhead to

form the joint, ensure that the bulkhead forms a straight line and vertical face. If a bulkhead is not used to form the joint, make the joint by sawing the compacted HMA for a sufficient distance behind the end of the placement to ensure full thickness and a smooth surface at the joint. Remove the full lift thickness of HMA ahead of the sawed joint. In either case, paint the joint face with polymerized joint adhesive before the fresh material is placed against it. Unless prohibited by field conditions, cross roll to obtain thorough compaction of these joints.

5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.

6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.5 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to

ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.



E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.



B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to AASHTO T 168.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than three cores taken.



b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.



CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Driveways. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walks.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.



B. Submittals:

1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements. For each design mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain portland cement replacements, to determine amount of portland cement replaced.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection.

E. Other Action Submittals:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer of detectable warnings ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency.



B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates


E. Buy American Certification: For manufactured products. Include statement that materials comply with the By American Act, 41 U.S.C. §§10a-10d and all supplies and construction materials to be used are produced in the United States.


A. Detectable Warning Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of stamped concrete paving systems.

B. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

D. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel.

E. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.

G. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

H. Epoxy-Coated, Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars.

I. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

J. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

K. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement.




A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type I Type II or Type III. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 3. Recycled Concrete Aggregate (RCA): Contractor may use recycled concrete aggregate

that conforms to the gradation and plasticity requirements of regular non-recycled coarse aggregate to obtain LEED credit MR 4.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use chemical admixtures for concrete that conform to AASHTO M 194 and are listed on the NJDOT’s qualified product list (QPL).

Use chemical admixtures of the following types:

1. Type A – Water-reducing admixtures 2. Type B – Retarding admixtures 3. Type C – Accelerating admixtures 4. Type D – Water-reducing and retarding admixtures 5. Type E – Water-reducing and accelerating admixtures 6. Type F – Water-reducing, high range admixtures 7. Type G – Water-reducing, high range, and retarding admixtures

Do not use chemical admixtures that contain calcium chlorides or any other chlorides that may initiate or promote corrosion of the reinforcement steel.

Locate all bulk storage tanks for chemical admixtures inside a heated area with an ambient temperature of not less than 32 °F. Do not use chemical admixtures that have been allowed to freeze until they have been agitated and retested.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 4, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound: Use liquid membrane-forming compounds conforming to AASHTO M 148, Type 1-D, clear or translucent with fugitive dye.



2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi or as shown on drawings. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 3 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for No. 57 nominal maximum aggregate size.



D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement if reinforced concrete paving will be exposed to chlorides in service or 0.30 percent by weight of cement for reinforced concrete paving that will not be exposed to chlorides but will be exposed to moisture in service.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture, high-range, water-reducing admixture or high-range, water-reducing and retarding admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.



F. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and/or ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons.

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.



3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.

F. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is

placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys

unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 20 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated.



4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 3 inches either way from centers of dowels.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within 3 inches either way from centers of dowels.

3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.



F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement dowels and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

K. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.



2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing moisture-retaining-cover curing curing compound or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch. 4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12

inches of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch. 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch.



7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches of dowel.

8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.



B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

F. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



G. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.



PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 32 17 23 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt and concrete pavement.



1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Shop Drawings: For pavement markings.

1. Indicate pavement markings, colors, lane separations, defined parking spaces, and dimensions to adjacent work.

2. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified; on rigid backing, 8 inches square.


A. Buy American Certification: For manufactured products. Include statement that materials comply with the By American Act, 41 U.S.C. §§10a-10d and all supplies and construction materials to be used are produced in the United States.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the New Jersey Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction latest edition as amended for pavement-marking work.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F and a minimum surface temperature of 50 deg F, and not exceeding 95 deg F.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings. 3. Scott Paint Company. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 5. Or Approved Equal.

2.2 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT

A. Pavement-Marking Paint, Epoxy Resin: For long-life pavement striping, use an epoxy resin that is a 2 component, 100 percent solids formulation conforming to the requirements of the NJDOT Standard Specification, 2007 edition – Section 912.03.01:

1. Color: White, Yellow and Blue.

B. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1. Glass beads may be made of 100 percent recycled glass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Striping Plan. At least 20 days before beginning the work, submit to the Engineer for approval a striping plan that includes:

1. Schedule of operations for applying traffic stripes. 2. Number and type of equipment. 3. Manufacturer’s recommendations for use of the materials, including, but not limited to,

mixing ratios and application temperatures.

B. Surface Preparation. Immediately before striping the pavement surface, clean the surface of dirt, oil, grease, and foreign material, including curing compound on new concrete. Clean the surface 2 inches beyond the perimeter of the stripes to be placed.

C. Applying Striping. Mix epoxy resin with an automatic proportioning and mixing machine, and hot-spray the compound at a temperature of between 100 and 130 °F onto dry surfaces. Apply



the compound with a wet film thickness of 20 ± 1 mil. Apply the material during dry weather conditions when the ambient temperature is a minimum of 45 °F and the surface temperature is a minimum of 50 °F. Adjust operations as required for the prevailing ambient and surface conditions to achieve a no-track drying time of 30 minutes or less.

Immediately after, or in conjunction with, the compound application, uniformly apply 12 pounds of large glass beads per gallon of epoxy resin to the compound. After applying the large glass beads, uniformly apply 12 pounds of small glass beads per gallon of epoxy resin to the compound.

Remove all compound that has been tracked or spilled outside of the intended placement areas.

3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.




PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 32 18 16.13-1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 32 18 16.13 - PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Poured-in-place playground surfacing system.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.

2. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.

3. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

4. ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials.

5. ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester.

6. ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.

7. ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide a 2 layer rubber-polyurethane playground surfacing system which has been designed, manufactured and installed to meet the following criteria:

1. Shock Attenuation (ASTM F1292):

a. Gmax: Less than 200. b. Head Injury Criteria: Less than 1000.

2. Flammability (ASTM D2859): Pass. 3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 60 psi. 4. Tear Resistance (ASTM D624): 140%. 5. Water Permeability: 0.4 gal/yd2/second. 6. Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ASTM F1951.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. C. Verification Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard verification samples of 9” x 9”

minimum.




D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Certificate of qualifications of the playground surfacing installer. E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Warranty documents specified herein.


A. Qualifications: Utilize an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer of the playground surfacing system, having experience with other projects of the scope and scale of the work described in this section.

B. Certifications: Certification by manufacturer that installer is an approved applicator of the

playground surfacing system. C. International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) certified.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers

with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful

environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F and a maximum temperature of 90 degrees F.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Install surfacing system when minimum ambient temperature is 40 degrees F and maximum ambient temperature is 90 degrees F. Do not install in steady or heavy rain.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents.

B. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the Poured-in-Place surfacing system.

Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in affected areas; and void the warranty.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of completion of work. PART 2 – PRODUCTS




2.1 POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM A. Basis of Design: Surface America, Inc.

B. Alternate Manufacturers:

1. Robertson Industries

2. Gametime


C. Basis of Design Products/Systems. Poured-in-place playground surfacing system, including the following:

1. PlayBound Poured-In-Place Primer:

a. Material: Polyurethane.

2. PlayBound Poured-in-Place Basemat:

a. Material: Blend of 100% recycled SBR (styrene butadiene rubber) and polyurethane.

b. Thickness: The type of playground equipment determines the required basemat thickness, and the basemat thickness may be different at various locations on the playground site. Depending on ASTM F1292 requirements for critical fall height

c. Available basemat thicknesses: 1 1/4”, 1 1/2”, 2”, 2 1/2”, 3”, 3 1/2”, 4”, and 5”. d. Formulation Components: Blend of strand and granular material.

3. PlayBound Poured-In-Place Top Surface:

a. Material: Blend of recycled EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) and polyurethane.

b. Thickness: Nominal 1/2”, minimum 3/8”, maximum 5/8”. c. Color: Sky Blue 1403 (see plans for locations) d. Dry Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 1.0. e. Wet Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 0.9. f. Dry Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 89. g. Wet Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 57.

2.3 MIXES

A. Mixes: Required mix proportions by weight:

1. Basemat: 14% polyurethane, 86% rubber. 2. Top Surface: 18% polyurethane, 82% rubber.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS




A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the playground surfacing manufacturer.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Substrate preparation must be in accordance with surfacing manufacturer’s specification. B. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the PlayBound Poured-in-Place surfacing

system. Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in affected areas; and void the warranty.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the substrate perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Do not proceed with playground surfacing installation until all applicable site work, including substrate preparation, fencing, playground equipment installation and other relevant work, has been completed.

B. Basemat Installation:

1. Using screeds and hand trowels, install the basemat at a consistent density of 29

pounds, 1 ounce per cubic foot to the specified thickness. 2. Allow basemat to cure for sufficient time so that indentations are not left in the

basemat from applicator foot traffic or equipment. 3. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the basemat surface until it is sufficiently cured.

C. Primer Application: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the basemat

perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal.

D. Top Surface Installation:

1. Using a hand trowel, install top surface at a consistent density of 58 pounds, 9

ounces per cubic foot to a nominal thickness of 1/2”. 2. Allow top surface to cure for a minimum of 48 hours. 3. At the end of the minimum curing period, verify that the top surface is sufficiently

dry and firm to allow foot traffic and use without damage to the surface. 4. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the surface until it is sufficiently cured.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect the installed playground surface from damage resulting from subsequent construction activity on the site.

END OF SECTION 32 18 16.13


Revision #4 – June 20, 2013

ALUMINUM CANTILEVER SLIDING GATE 32 31 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 32 31 00 - ALUMINUM CANTILEVER SLIDING GATE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and appurtenances necessary for installation of the in-dustrial cantilever gate system defined herein at the Jersey City PS-20 project.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving

B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete


The manufacturer shall supply a total industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gate system of the Basis of Design Ameristar® TransPort II design Classicstyle, or similar product by Elite Fence Products Inc., or approved equal. The system shall include all components (i.e., tracks, uprights, bracing, pickets, hardware, fittings and fasteners) required.


The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of con-struction involved and materials and techniques specified.

1.5 REFERENCES

ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.

ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.

ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Fil-tered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus.

ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments.

ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).




ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

ASTM F1184 – Industrial & Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates

1.6 SUBMITTAL

The manufacturer’s submittal package consisting of gate elevations, hardware details, and installation details, shall be submitted prior to installation.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drain-age, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism, and theft.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design: All industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gates shall conform to the Ameristar® TransPort II gate system, Classic style, manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products.

B. Alternate Manufacturers: 1. Elite Fence Products, Inc. 2. Or Approved Equal.

2.2 MATERIAL

A. The materials used for cantilever gate framing (i.e., uprights, diagonal braces and pickets or pales) shall be manufactured from ASTM B221 aluminum (designation 6063-T-6) with a yield strength of 25,000 PSI, a tensile strength of 30,000 PSI and a standard mill finish. The rails shall be manufactured from ASTM B221 aluminum (designation 6063-T-6) with minimum yield strength of 25,000 PSI, a tensile strength of 30,000 PSI and a standard mill finish.

B. Material for diagonal bracing and uprights shall be 2” sq. x ¼” aluminum. Material for pickets shall be 1” x 1/8” wall aluminum.

C. Internal roller truck assembly shall be self-aligning swivel ball-and-socket type running on four bearing wheels. Internal roller truck assembly shall be affixed to the hanger bracket by means of a 5/8” diameter industrial-grade rod end/center bolt, with a minimum static load rating of 10,000 pounds. Attachment of the center bolt to the truck body shall be by means of a swivel joint to ensure equivalent and consistent loading on all bearing wheels and internal track surfaces throughout the travel of the gate.

D. Provide knox lock box at all gates to provide emergency access keys for emergency respond-ers. Locate knox lock box at location of pedestal card reader for gate.

2.3 FABRICATION




A. Pickets, enclosed track, uprights and diagonal bracing shall be pre-drilled and labeled for easy assem-bly. All components shall be precut to specified lengths.

B. Top and bottom rail extrusions shall be mechanically fastened to vertical uprights and reinforced with diagonal braces, as required by drawing.

C. The color shall be Black. The stratification-coated framework shall be capable of meeting the perfor-mance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 1.

Table 1 – Coating Performance Requirements

Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements

Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test).

Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coat-ing loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters).

Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball).

Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. All new gate installations shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans.

B. All hardware shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer installation instructions. Cantile-ver gates shall be installed so they comply with current ASTM F2200 & UL325 standards.

C. Gate stops shall be installed on each track in a way that conforms to current ASTM F2200 standards.

3.2 GATE INSTALLATION

Gate post shall be spaced according to specified gate elevation shown on the detail sheets. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 48” with a minimum diameter of 12”. The “Earth Moving” and “Cast-in-Place Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for




the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core-drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended applica-tion.

3. 3 CLEANING

The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uni-formly away from posts.



STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE 32 31 19 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 32 31 19 – STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the welded ornamental steel fence system defined herein at the Jersey City PS-20 project site.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving

B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete


The manufacturer shall supply a total fence system of Welded and Rackable (ATF – All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel design. The ornamental fence system shall be height or 8’height from grade. The system shall include all components (i.e., panels, posts, gates and hardware) required. Montage Com-merical standard picket fence was used for basis of design. Similar product by Elite Fence Products, Inc. or approval equal will be acceptable upon submittal review.


The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified.

1.5 REFERENCES

ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss. 0020

ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint.

ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus.

ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments.

ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).



ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

ASTM F2408 – Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets.

1.6 SUBMITTAL

The manufacturer’s literature, shop drawings and cut-sheets shall be submitted prior to installation.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft.

1.8 PRODUCT WARRANTY

A. All structural fence components (i.e. rails, pickets, and posts) shall be warranted within specified limitations, by the manufacturer for a period of 20 years from date of original purchase. Warranty shall cover any defects in material finish, including cracking, peeling, chipping, blistering or cor-roding.

B. Reimbursement for labor necessary to restore or replace components that have been found to be defective under the terms of manufactures warranty shall be guaranteed for five (5) years from date of original purchase, unless noted otherwise in the project documents.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

The fence system shall conform to Montage Commercial standard picket space Welded and Rackable (ATF – All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel, design, bottom rail treatment, 4-Rail style manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc or Elite Fence Products, Inc. or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIAL

A. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) and a minimum zinc (hot-dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.60 oz/ft2 (184 g/m2), Coating Designation G-60.

B. Material for pickets shall be 3/4” square x 14 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, 1.5” x 1.4375” x 14 Ga. Fence posts and gate posts shall meet the minimum size requirements of Table 1.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre-punched to accept pickets.



B. Pickets shall be inserted into the pre-punched holes in the rails and shall be aligned to standard spacing using a specially calibrated alignment fixture. The aligned pickets and rails shall be joined at each picket-to-rail intersection by welding process, thus completing the rigid panel assembly.

C. The manufactured panels and posts shall be subjected to an inline electrode position coating (E-Coat) process consisting of a multi-stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), followed by a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum cumulative coating thickness of epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mils (0.058 mm). The color shall be Black . The coated panels and posts shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality char-acteristic shown in Table 2 (Note: The requirements in Table 2 meet or exceed the coating perfor-mance criteria of ASTM F2408).

D. The manufactured fence system shall be capable of meeting the vertical load, horizontal load, and in-fill performance requirements for Industrial weight fences under ASTM F2408.

E. Gates shall be fabricated using fusion welded ornamental panel material and 1-3/4” sq. x 14ga. gate ends. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Fence post shall be spaced according to fence detail, plus or minus 1/4”. For installations that must be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimension must be measured along the grade. Fence pan-els shall be attached to posts with brackets supplied by the manufacturer. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 36” The “Earth Moving” and “Cast-in-place Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core-drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application.

3.3 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE

When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1) Remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2) Apply zinc-rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3) Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers’ gate drawings, dependent on standard out-to-out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the appli-cation; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers’ gate drawings shall identify the nec-essary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall be provided by the manufacture of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.



3.5 CLEANING

The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts.

Table 1 – Minimum Sizes for Posts Fence Posts Panel Height 2-1/2” x 14 Ga. 8’ Heights

Gate Leaf Gate Height

8’ Heights Up to 4’ 3” x 12 Ga. 4’1” to 6’ 4” x 12 Ga. 6’1” to 16’ 6” x 12 Ga.

Table 2 – Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteris-tics

ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements

Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test).

Corrosion Re-sistance

B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 1,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters).

Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball).

Weathering Re-sistance

D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method)

Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units).




VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR 32 31 32 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 32 31 32 – VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install a complete microprocessor based vehicular slide gate operator system, with a solid-state board to control all functions of the slide gate operator, as described herein and shown on the plans. Include all necessary control boards, power supplies, loop detectors, connectors, and accessories for a complete operational system.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. All equipment and work specified in this section shall comply, with all the General Conditions of the specifications, contract documents, and drawings as indicated.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Parking control / gate operator systems contractor shall coordinate all work with other contractors and trades where necessary.

B. All necessary conduit, raceways and pull boxes shall be installed by the electrical contractor. C. Installation of the vehicular slide gate operator system shall be coordinated with the installation of

other parking control related systems. D. Aluminum Cantilever Sliding Gate Specification Section 323100.


A. Installation shall comply with all applicable codes. B. All equipment shall be new, in current production, and the standard products of a manufacturer of

vehicular gate operator equipment. C. Manufacturer shall guarantee availability of parts, for a minimum of seven (7) years from date of

shipment. D. If required, manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate features, functions and operating charac-

teristics to the Owner. E. System shall be installed by a factory authorized contractor, with technicians specifically trained

in this system. F. On-site maintenance and repair service shall be available locally and within four (4) hours of noti-

fication for emergency condition. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Vehicular Slide Gate Operator shall be in compliance with Underwriter Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety - Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems, UL 325 Fourth Edition; and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety - Tests for Safety-Related Controls Employing Solid-State Devices, UL 991 Second Edition.

B. Vehicular Slide Gate Operator shall be tested for compliance to UL 325 and UL 991 and shall be LISTED by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

C. Vehicular slide gate fabrication, construction and installation shall conform to ASTM F2200; Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Provisions: Comply with Section 01300 SUBMITTALS.




B. Shall include an equipment list, data sheet(s), system description, block diagrams on equipment to be furnished and electrical wiring diagrams for installation.

C. Shall include all data necessary to evaluate design, quality and configuration of proposed equip-ment and system(s).

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Products shall include a factory warranty that equipment is free from defects in design, material, manufacturing and operation. Factory warranty period shall be for five (5) years parts and work-manship; 60-months from date of shipment.

B. Manufacturer shall not be responsible for improper use, handling, or installation of the product. C. Installing contractor shall guarantee the equipment, wire and installation for 12-months from date

of acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: a. The system as described herein is based on the 9150 series vehicular slide gate

operator system, manufactured by DoorKing, Inc. B. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Vehicular slide gate system operator manufactured by: i. HySecurity ii. Linear iii. Or approved equal.

b. Consideration of alternate manufacturer will be based on ability to comply with all aspects of the specifications, the desired functional operation, quality, reliability, design, size, and appearance of the equipment, and the support capabilities of the manufacturer.


A. Slide Gate Operator: 1. The slide gate operator shall use a microprocessor based solid-state control board that

controls all functions of the slide gate operator. Operator shall be rated for continuous duty for use in residential, commercial and industrial applications.

2. Primary reduction system shall employ an adjustable clutch and power transfer shall be provided by single cog belt drive train.

3. Operator shall employ magnetic sensing to set open and close limit adjustment. Mechan-ical type limit switches shall not be allowed.

4. Operator shall automatically set both open and close limit adjustments upon power-up and activation in the open direction. Operator shall automatically sense for any gate coasting to insure true limit settings.

5. Pulling medium shall provide a positive mechanical connection to the gate system. Fric-tion driven rail type pulling mediums shall not be allowed. Roller chain pulling medium shall be minimum size #40.

6. A positive dead bolt shall activate only when the gate is forced open, to reduce solenoid lock wear and failure.

7. Operator shall be capable of being mounted at the front, center or rear of the gate sys-tem, shall be designed for either left or right hand mount and shall be designed for pad or post mounting.

8. Operator frame shall use 12-gauge G90 galvanized steel to avoid rusting and shall be painted charcoal gray.




9. Operator shall have two 115 VAC convenience outlets available for accessory transform-er power and shall have a built-in lockable power disconnect and reset switch.

B. Control Circuit:

1. Control board shall have connections for optional Gate Tracker board. Gate tracker shall record operator cycles (x100), input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and power up events. Record shall be time and date stamped.

2. Control board shall allow a stop or a stop and reverse function (settable) from a safety re-lated input.

3. Control board shall have two ports for plug in of vehicular loop detectors, (DoorKing, Models 9409 or 9410).

4. A dry set of relay contacts shall be available for external use, and shall have four pro-grammable functions.

5. A special input shall allow the gate to be partially opened. 6. A timer override function shall cause an opening gate to stop and then reverse direction

when the reverse loop(s) or reverse input is clear even if the gate has not reached the full open position, to help reduce tailgating.

7. Control board shall have separate inputs for external contact and non-contact entrapment protection devices.

8. Functions will be user programmable by DIP-switches located on the control board.

C. Fail-Safe Operation 1. To prioritize safety over security, operator shall assume a fail-safe mode in the event of a

power loss or if an entrapment is sensed (entrapment alarm activated). a. Operator shall revert to a fail-safe mode allowing the gate to be pushed open

without any special knowledge or use of any special cranks, keys or other devic-es.

D. Primary Electronic Reverse

1. The vehicular gate operator shall be equipped with an inherent electronic obstruction sensing system. The electronic sensing system shall automatically cause the gate op-erator to stop and reverse if an obstruction is sensed during the open or close cycle.

2. For enhanced safety, the control circuit shall check the obstruction sensing system circuit prior to the start of each cycle of operation. Should the control circuit detect a fault in the obstruction sensing system, the motor shall not be allowed to start.

E. Secondary Entrapment Prevention

1. Non-contact sensors, or contact sensors, or combination thereof, shall be utilized to pre-vent persons from becoming entrapped in the gate system.

2. Warning signs shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instruc-tions and UL 325 guidelines.

F. A complete operational system shall be provided.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Basis of Design: Model 9150 Vehicular Slide Gate Operator or approved equal 1. Single cog belt drive train with adjustable clutch. 2. Automatic limit / coast magnetic adjustment system. 3. Solid-state control circuit and motor control. 4. Partial open limit feature. 5. Anti-Tailgate feature. 6. UL Class of Operation: I, II, III and IV.




7. #40 roller chain. 8. Dimensions: 24 inches high, 15 inches wide, 16.5 inches deep. 9. Horsepower

a. 1/2 HP: 1000 Lb maximum gate weight, 800 Lb if convenience open option is in-stalled. 30-ft maximum gate length, approximately 1-ft/sec gate speed.

b. 1 HP: 1500 Lb maximum gate weight, 1300 Lb if convenience open option is in-

stalled. 45-ft maximum gate length, approximately 1-ft/sec gate speed. 10.Power

a. 115 VAC b. 230 VAC c. 460 VAC

B. Secondary Entrapment Prevention 1. Non-contact sensors (photo-cells).

a. P/N 8080-010 Infrared thru-beam, 165 foot sensing distance. b. P/N 8080-011 Photo-reflective beam, 30 foot sensing distance. c. P/N 8080-030 Polarized photo-reflective beam, 35 foot sensing distance. d. P/N 8080-031 Infrared thru-beam 65 foot sensing distance.

2. Contact sensors a. P/N 8080-015 Single-sided sensitivity with mounting channel. b. P/N 8080-020 Three-sided sensitivity with mounting channel. c. P/N 8080-021 Sensor designed to mount on 2 inch round post. d. P/N 8080-022 Sensor designed to mount on 2 inch square post.

C. Options

1. Vehicle Loop Detectors a. P/N 9410-010 Single channel detector. b. P/N 9409-010 Two channel detector.

2. Chain tray kit (P/N 2601-270) available in 10-ft sections. 3. Red/Green traffic signal (P/N 1603-208). 4. Environmental Control a. P/N 1601-154 Heater kit. 5. Drive Chain

a. P/N 2600-444 Nickel plated drive chain, #40. 6. Post Mount Base Plate

a. P/N 2600-495 Use to post mount the 9150 operator (mounting post are not in-cluded).

7. Gate Tracker: The vehicular slide gate operator shall have output for connection to Gate Tracker control board (P/N 2351-010). Gate Tracker shall maintain a detailed electronic record of cycles, input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and each time power is applied to the operator, time and date stamped.

8. Convenience open (battery backup) drive system.

D. A complete operational system shall be provided. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. It is preferred, but not required, that this product be installed by a qualified technician who is certi-fied by the Institute of Door Dealer Education and Accreditation (IDEA) as a Certified Automatic Gate Operator Installer (CAGOI).




B. Basis of Design Model 9150 (or approved equal) shall be post or pad mounted, as required. 1. Post mount (Requires Basis of Design DoorKing #2600-495 base plate or approved

equal). a. Mounting posts shall be welded to base plate and mounted in concrete, firmly

secured, plumb and level. 2. Pad mount.

a. Mounted directly to a concrete pad, firmly secured, plumb and level. C. Wiring shall be uniform and in accordance with national electric codes and manufacturer’s in-

structions. D. All splices shall be in easily accessible junction boxes or on terminal boards. E. All cable runs in all junction boxes shall be tagged and identified. F. Coordinate all work with other effected trades and contractors.

3.2 SYSTEM INITIALIZING AND PROGRAMMING

A. System shall be turned on and adjustment made to meet requirements of specifications and on-site conditions.

B. System shall function as specified. 3.3 SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES

A. System shall be completely tested to assure that all components and accessories are hooked-up and in working order.

B. System shall be pre-tested by contractor and certified to function in accordance with plans and specifications.

C. System shall be tested in presence of owner's representative. 3.4 OWNER INSTRUCTIONS

A. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of instruction in use and operation of the sys-tem to designated owner representatives, within (30) days of acceptance.

B. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of technical training, in troubleshooting and service of the system, to designated owner representatives within (90) days of system ac-ceptance.

3.5 MANUALS AND DRAWINGS

A. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of standard factory prepared operation, installation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall include typical wiring diagrams.

B. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of any risers, layouts, and special wiring diagrams showing any changes to standard drawings, if required on project.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. The manufacturer recommends periodic maintenance at three month intervals as described in the installation and maintenance manual.

B. External reversing devices should be checked at least once a month.


NJ Schools Development Authority New Public School #20 JE-0010-C01 Revision #1 - March 6, 2013

PLANTS 32 93 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Planting soils. 3. Tree stabilization.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

D. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

E. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

F. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant.

G. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

H. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

I. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

J. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.



K. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

L. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

M. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

N. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

O. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

P. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

Q. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species

and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Trees and Shrubs: One sample of each variety and size delivered to the site for review.

Maintain approved samples on-site as a standard for comparison. 2. Organic Mulch: 1-pint volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags

labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

3. Mineral Mulch: 2 lb of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material.

4. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches. 5. Root Barrier: Width of panel by 12 inches.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods

established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

C. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the

Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Three years' experience in landscape installation. 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position.

Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

D. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.




A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,

or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

C. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.

D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

E. Handle planting stock by root ball.

F. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.

G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in dry condition in water for two hours.

Reject dried-out plants. 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other

acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray.

Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: March 1 – May 15 2. Fall Planting: August 15 – October 1

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be



obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

D. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. 1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas,

and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization, edgings. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion:

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. c. Annuals: Three months.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the

succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at

end of warranty period. c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or

replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for

replaced plant material.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting completion.

B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of planting completion.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded.



State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is

squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

D. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings.

E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 85 percent calcium and magnesium carbonates equivalent to more than 40 percent calcium and magnesium oxides and as follows: 1. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of

55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 2. Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.



D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve.

G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 60 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 4 mmhos/cm; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: Minimum 30 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-

separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

D. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Use fertilizer for establishing turf that has a commercial designation of 10-20-10, or use any 1-2-1 ratio fertilizer containing a minimum of 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent available phosphoric acid, and 5 percent soluble potash.

B. If the fertilizer is to be applied with mechanical spreader in dry form, ensure that a minimum of 75 percent passes a No. 8 sieve, a minimum of 75 percent is retained on a No. 16 sieve, and the maximum free moisture content is 2 percent.

C. Use fertilizer for establishing sod that is any 1-2-2 ratio fertilizer containing a minimum of 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent available phosphoric acid, and 10 percent soluble potash.

2.5 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.8 to 7, a minimum of 3 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3



2. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 90 lbs. 3. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 11 lbs.

B. Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process and stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Supplement with planting soil when quantities are insufficient. 2. Mix existing, native surface topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in

the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. b. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 90 lbs. c. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 11 lbs.

C. Planting Soil: Existing, in-place surface soil. Verify suitability of existing surface soil to produce viable planting soil. Remove stones, roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix surface soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Surface Soil by Volume: 1:3. 2. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 90 lbs.. 3. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 11 lbs.

D. Planting Soil: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. 1. Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free of

stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes, grubs, other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease-causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air-filled, pore-space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis.

2. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. b. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 90 lbs. c. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 11 lbs.

2.6 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally-encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.



2.7 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS

A. Stakes and Guys: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, free of knots, holes, cross

grain, and other defects, 2-by-4-inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end. 2. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes

or turnbuckles or compression springs. 3. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand,

twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. 4. Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets. 5. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.

B. Root-Ball Stabilization Materials: 1. Upright Stakes and Horizontal Hold-Down: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood or

softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-4-inch nominal by length indicated; stakes pointed at one end.

2. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2, with waterborne preservative for soil and freshwater use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic; including ammoniacal copper arsenate, ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate, and chromated copper arsenate.

B. Root Barrier: Black, molded, modular panels manufactured with 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with ultraviolet inhibitors, 85 mils thick, with vertical root deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch out from panel, and each panel 18 inches wide.

C. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil

moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.




C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. 1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery

before moving and again two weeks after planting.

D. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 5 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend

planting soil. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few

days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

2. Spread planting soil to a depth of 5 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil over loosened

subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom



leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped or

container-grown stock. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate

vertical roots for bare-root stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the

bottom of the root ball. 4. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level

and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 5. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do

not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.

6. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 7. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected overnight and when unattended by

Installer's personnel.

B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil.

C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.

3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING

A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove

burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.



D. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.



E. Set fabric bag-grown stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use

planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.



F. Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grade. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill

around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots.

3. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside soil-covered roots about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots.


G. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

3.6 MECHANIZED TREE SPADE PLANTING

A. Trees may be planted with an approved mechanized tree spade at the designated locations. Do not use tree spade to move trees larger than the maximum size allowed for a similar field-grown, balled-and-burlapped root-ball diameter according to ANSI Z60.1, or larger than the manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for the tree spade being used, whichever is smaller.

B. When extracting the tree, center the trunk within the tree spade and move tree with a solid ball of earth.



C. Cut exposed roots cleanly during transplanting operations.

D. Use the same tree spade to excavate the planting hole as was used to extract and transport the tree.

E. Plant trees as shown on Drawings, following procedures in "Tree, Shrub, and Vine Planting" Article.

F. Where possible, orient the tree in the same direction as in its original location.

3.7 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.8 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less

than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.

2. Use two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.

3. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

4. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

B. Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches in caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. 1. Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method:

a. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at least 36 inches below grade. Provide compression spring for each guy wire and tighten securely.

b. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to compression spring. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

c. Support trees with strands of cable or multiple strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to compression spring. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

d. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade.

C. Root-Ball Stabilization: Install at- or below-grade stabilization system to secure each new planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated.



1. Wood Hold-Down Method: Place vertical stakes against side of root ball and drive them into subsoil; place horizontal wood hold-down stake across top of root ball and screw at each end to one of the vertical stakes. a. Install stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of

backfilled excavation. Saw stakes off at horizontal stake. b. Install screws through horizontal hold-down and penetrating at least 1 inch into

stakes. Predrill holes if necessary to prevent splitting wood. c. Install second set of stakes on other side of root trunk for larger trees as indicated.

3.9 ROOT-BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Install root barrier where trees are planted within 48 inches of paving or other hardscape elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

B. Align root barrier vertically and run it linearly along and adjacent to the paving or other hardscape elements to be protected from invasive roots.

C. Install root barrier continuously for a distance of 60 inches in each direction from the tree trunk, for a total distance of 10 feet per tree. If trees are spaced closer, use a single continuous piece of root barrier. 1. Position top of root barrier per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Overlap root barrier a minimum of 12 inches at joints. 3. Do not distort or bend root barrier during construction activities. 4. Do not install root barrier surrounding the root ball of tree.

3.10 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.

E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.11 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins.



B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees and Tree-like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch average

thickness, with 24-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

3.12 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

3.14 DISPOSAL

A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 33 10 00 - WATER UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for combined water service and fire-service mains.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.

H. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.



B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.


A. Field quality-control test reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.

E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.

G. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic

water.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring

seal in each end.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring

seal in each end.

C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.

D. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) American Cast Iron Pipe Company 2) US Pipe and Foundry Company 3) Or Approved Equal.



2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.

2.4 GATE VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. c. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. d. Or Approved Equal.

2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

2.5 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. c. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. d. Or Approved Equal.

2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

a. Standard: MSS SP-60. b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter.



1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.

1. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550 and ends to match piping.

a. Standard: AWWA C508. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

2.6 WATER METERS

A. Water meters will be furnished by utility company.

2.7 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. c. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 and two NPS 2-1/2 outlets, 5-1/4-inch main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical-joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression-type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure.

a. Standard: AWWA C502. b. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.

3. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 and two NPS 2-1/2 outlets, 5-1/4-inch main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical-joint inlet. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression-type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure.

a. Standards: UL 246, FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating 250 psig. c. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire

department. Include cast-iron caps with steel chains. d. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1-1/2 inches point to flat. e. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or

counterclockwise. f. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

E. Underground water-service piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 3 shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K

F. Underground water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 shall be the following: 1. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints.

G. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 shall be the following:

1. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints.

H. Underground Combined Water-Service and Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 6 to NPS 12 shall be the following:

1. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valves with valve box.



3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove

tapping machine and connect water-service piping. 4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem

pointing up and with valve box.

D. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation. 1. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

F. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Make pipe joints according to the following:

1. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.

3.6 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:

1. Concrete thrust blocks. 2. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. 3. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.



3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.

C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.

E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written instructions.

3.9 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

A. Rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's written instructions.

3.10 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position.

B. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Install with valve below frost line. Provide for drainage.

C. AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17.

D. UL/FMG Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24.

3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water-distribution piping to utility water main in accordance with utility company requirements.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.



1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.13 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

c. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.



SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 33 30 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 30 30 00 - SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure couplings. 3. Expansion joints and deflection fittings. 4. Cleanouts. 5. Encasement for piping. 6. Manholes.


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Expansion joints and deflection fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers.


A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Shop drawings for manhole structures.


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Engineer and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption

of service.



2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Engineer's and Owner’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PE Corrugated Sewer Piping: 1. Pipe, Couplings and Fitting: AASHTO M 252.

B. PVC Drainage Piping: 1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2729

2.2 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76. 1. Bell-and-spigot or tongue-and-groove ends for gasketed joints, with ASTM C 443, rubber

gaskets. 2. Class III, Wall B.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. PVC Cleanouts: 1. PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout

of same material as sewer piping.

2.4 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: 1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision

for sealant joints. 2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section,

as required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for

walls and base riser section; with separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 5. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, of length to provide depth indicated. 6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated; with top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection. 9. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP; wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches.



10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings, with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, with diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers: 1. Material: ASTM A 48-83, Class 30B gray iron unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete complying with ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes. 1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of

vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. a. Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. a. Slope: 4 percent.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout



take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent unless

otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in

direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover. 4. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook." 5. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 6. Install PVC corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 7. Install PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 8. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."

G. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 3212. 2. Join PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for

elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints. 3. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation

Manual" for rubber-gasket joints. 4. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings.

B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure

sewer piping unless otherwise indicated. a. Shielded flexiblecouplings for pipes of same or slightly different OD.



b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

2. Use pressure pipe couplings for force-main joints.

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

E. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install manhole-cover inserts in frame and immediately below cover.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts, and use cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. 3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove

section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.



2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or manhole wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi

unless otherwise indicated. b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete

and piping materials. 4. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while

making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 31200 "Earth Moving" for underground utility identification devices. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes. 1. Use detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

manholes.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test.



5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. Fill sewer piping with water. Test with pressure of at least 10-foot head of water,

and maintain such pressure without leakage for at least 15 minutes. b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.

6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. b. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924.

7. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping. Flush with potable water.



STORM DRAINAGE 33 41 00 - 1 February 6, 2013 DCA Submission

SECTION 33 41 00 - STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure transition couplings. 3. Pressure pipe couplings. 4. Expansion joints and deflection fittings. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Drains. 7. Manholes. 8. Channel drainage systems. 9. Catch basins. 10. Stormwater inlets.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers. 2. Catch basins and stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,

covers, and grates. 3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,

covers, design calculations, and concrete design-mix reports.



A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 3 to NPS 10: AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.

1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with tube and fittings.

2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings.

B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 60: AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.

1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings.

2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints for pipes sizes 4-inches to 15-inches.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends.

B. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T-2 wall thickness, PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints for pipes sizes greater than 15-inches.

2.3 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76.

1. Bell-and-spigot or tongue-and-groove ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets sealant joints with ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl-rubber sealant

2.4 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.



1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

2.5 Precast Drainage Structures

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

3. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, 48-inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated.

4. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

5. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape

matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total thickness, that match 24-inch- diameter frame and grate.

8. Steps: Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder; or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 48inches.

9. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.

B. Designed Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced concrete; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for joint sealants.

1. Joint Sealants: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 2. Steps: Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder; or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or



anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 48 inches.

3. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.

C. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural loading.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in

direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321. 4. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 5. Install nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." 6. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."



3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-

seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints. 2. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal

joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints.

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. 3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.5 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.7 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.

B. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.

C. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

D. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated.

E. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints.

F. Embed channel sections in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.



3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains

B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an opening large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.

1. Use detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.



c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water.
